KaleidaGraph

Fourth Edition
Introduction
Welcome to KaleidaGraph®. You have purchased a thoughtfully designed graphing tool which provides the
most powerful visual displays of quantitative information available in either the Windows or Macintosh
environment. Through our documentation, you will learn how to develop accurate journal quality graphs that
mathematically transform even the most complex data into elegant but functional graphical displays.

About this Manual

This manual contains detailed cross-platform information about the KaleidaGraph application. It provides step-by-
step instructions for the Windows and Macintosh platforms. Wherever there is a difference between the two
platforms, it is noted in the text.

The manual assumes that you are familiar with basic operations, such as clicking, double-clicking, and dragging. It
also assumes familiarity with the components of the user interface, such as menus, windows, dialogs, buttons, and
check boxes. If you are not familiar with these terms, review the documentation that came with your computer.

Organization of the Manual

This manual contains examples and procedures for common tasks, such as entering data, creating plots, and
applying curve fits. The following is a brief overview of the chapters and appendixes in the manual:
• Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” discusses system requirements, installation, and several basic concepts,
including opening files, getting help, and quitting the program.
• Chapter 2, “Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph,” provides a tutorial for generating a data set, creating and
editing Scatter and Column plots, and placing the plots in the layout window.
• Chapter 3, “Working with Data Windows,” discusses how to navigate, make selections, add and
delete rows and columns, and format columns in the data window.
• Chapter 4, “Working with Data,” discusses how to enter, import, edit, sort, and export data in the
data window.
• Chapter 5, “Working with Formula Entry,” discusses how to use the Formula Entry window to
perform calculations in the active data window.
• Chapter 6, “Creating Plots,” discusses the different plot types, creating a plot, and generating similar
plots.
• Chapter 7, “Working with Plots,” discusses how to modify the plot, including the axes, ticks, grids,
markers, and plot color.
• Chapter 8, “Working with Plot Tools and Objects,” discusses the plot tools available in
KaleidaGraph, in addition to creating and editing text labels and shapes.
• Chapter 9, “Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars,” discusses how to add curve fits and error bars
to a plot.

3
KaleidaGraph

• Chapter 10, “Importing and Exporting Graphics,” discusses how to import graphic objects into a plot
and export the plots to a printer, file, or another program.
• Chapter 11, “Working with the Layout Window,” discusses how to use the layout window to place
multiple plots on a single page.
• The Appendixes contain information on the program commands, settings files, and toolbox
shortcuts, as well as general reference information.

Learning KaleidaGraph
If you are new to KaleidaGraph, it is recommended that you take the guided tour in Chapter 2. This tutorial
guides you through the process of generating a data set, creating and editing two different plots, and placing
the plots onto a single page. Other topics in the tutorial include modifying the legend, using Formula Entry,
applying a General curve fit, and modifying data in a saved plot.

Once you start using KaleidaGraph, you can refer to the manual and the online help for step-by-step
instructions to complete specific tasks. The online help also includes detailed information on the commands
and dialogs available in the program.

Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
• Instructions for choosing commands are displayed in bold type. Levels are separated with a greater
than symbol (>). For example: Choose Gallery > Linear > Line.
• Dialog buttons and options are displayed in bold type. For example: Click OK.
• Keys that you should press appear in bold type. If joined with a plus sign (+), press and hold the first
key while you press the remaining keys. For example: Press Ctrl+Period.

Contacting Synergy Software

To receive technical support and upgrade information, either fill out and send in the registration card included
with the software or access our web site and register online.

If you have any questions concerning KaleidaGraph, please contact us at:

Synergy Software
2457 Perkiomen Avenue
Reading, PA 19606-2049

Phone: (610) 779-0522

Fax: (610) 370-0548

Internet addresses:
Sales/Upgrades: [email protected]
Tech support: [email protected]

Web sites: www.kaleidagraph.com

www.synergy.com

4
 Introduction

Please feel free to check our web site periodically for:

• Product descriptions
• Technical notes
• Frequently asked questions
• New release information
• Downloadable upgrade patches
• And other topics of interest

5
KaleidaGraph

6
Getting Started

Chapter 1

This chapter lists the hardware and operating system requirements and explains how to install KaleidaGraph
onto your computer. It also covers some basic concepts, including:
• Starting KaleidaGraph.
• Introducing the data and plot windows.
• Opening saved files.
• Opening KaleidaGraph files on another platform.
• Getting help.
• Setting preferences.
• Quitting the program.

1.1 System Requirements

1.1.1 Windows Version
To run KaleidaGraph under Windows, you need the following:
• An IBM compatible computer with at least a 486 processor.
• 16 MB RAM (32 MB if using Windows NT).
• SVGA (256 color) video driver.
• 4 MB free hard disk space (10 MB recommended).
• Windows NT, 95, 98, 2000, or later.

1.1.2 Macintosh Version

To run KaleidaGraph on a Macintosh, you need the following:
• System 7 or later.
• 4 MB of free RAM. Additional RAM is recommended and increases KaleidaGraph’s performance.
• 6 MB free hard disk space (12 MB recommended).

1.1 System Requirements 7

KaleidaGraph

1.2 Installing KaleidaGraph

This section describes how to install the KaleidaGraph software on both the Windows and Macintosh
platforms. A section containing uninstall instructions is also included.

1.2.1 Installing the Windows Version

The installer creates a new folder on your hard disk containing the KaleidaGraph software. If you are
upgrading from an earlier version, your existing KaleidaGraph files are not affected.

Note: If you do not have a CD-ROM drive, the KaleidaGraph CD-ROM contains a Makedisk program that
can be used to create a set of installation disks. This program is located in the Software\Kgdisk.img
directory on the CD-ROM.

To install KaleidaGraph on your hard disk:

1. Quit any other programs that are currently running.
2. Insert the KaleidaGraph CD-ROM.

Note: If AutoPlay is enabled on your system, the CDSetup program starts automatically. You can
click the Install KaleidaGraph button and skip to Step 4.
3. Run SETUP from the Software\Kgraph\Disk1 directory on the CD-ROM. Alternately, you can run
the CDSetup program to install the software.
4. Proceed through the Welcome screen, license agreement, and ReadMe information to display the
KaleidaGraph Installer dialog.
5. Specify where to install the KaleidaGraph program and its related files. To specify a different
directory, click Browse. When you are finished, click Next.
6. Choose the type of installation you want to perform and click Next. The choices are
• Typical - installs all of the KaleidaGraph files.
• Custom - allows you to select which components to install.
• Network - displays a dialog to locate the KaleidaGraph program on the network server. Only
use this if you have purchased a multi-user license.
7. Once all of the program files have been installed, a message is displayed to let you know the
installation of KaleidaGraph is complete.

8 1.2 Installing KaleidaGraph

 Getting Started

1.2.2 Installing the Macintosh Version

The installer creates a new folder on your hard disk containing the KaleidaGraph software. If you are
upgrading from an earlier version, your existing KaleidaGraph files are not affected.

Note: If you do not have a CD-ROM drive, the KaleidaGraph CD-ROM contains disk image files that can
be used to create a set of installation disks. The disk images and instructions for doing this are located
in the disk images folder on the CD-ROM.

To install KaleidaGraph on your hard disk:

1. Insert the KaleidaGraph CD-ROM.
2. Double-click the KaleidaGraph 3.5 Installer icon. Alternately, you can run the CDSetup program
to install the software.
3. Proceed through the Welcome screen, license agreement, and ReadMe information to display the
KaleidaGraph Installer dialog.
4. Choose the installation method (easy or custom) and specify where to place the KaleidaGraph folder

The Easy Install option automatically installs the following items:

• The appropriate version of the KaleidaGraph program (universal, floating point, or Power Mac),
along with the KaleidaGraph Help and New Features documents.
• An Examples folder containing example plots, data files, and curve fits.
• The Microsoft OLE Library, which is required to open Excel files. If this file is already installed,
it is skipped.
• PDF versions of the KaleidaGraph documentation.
To control which files get installed, choose Custom Install from the pop-up menu. If you have
purchased a multi-user license and KaleidaGraph is being installed on a network server, the Custom
Install can be used to place a fat binary version of KaleidaGraph on the server.
5. Click Install. A KaleidaGraph folder is created on your hard disk and the files are installed. A Status
dialog is displayed to keep you informed as the installation progresses.
6. Once all of the program files have been installed, a message is displayed to let you know the
installation of KaleidaGraph is complete.

Note: If you experience any problems during installation, you may need to use the Extensions Manager
control panel to disable third-party extensions. Once KaleidaGraph is successfully installed, you can
return the Extensions Manager to its original settings.

1.2 Installing KaleidaGraph 9

KaleidaGraph

1.2.3 Uninstalling KaleidaGraph

Windows Version
To remove the KaleidaGraph software from your hard disk, perform one of the following:
• Choose Start > Programs > KaleidaGraph 3.5 > Remove KaleidaGraph 3.5.
• Choose Start > Settings > Control Panel and then double-click Add/Remove Programs. In the
dialog that appears, select KaleidaGraph 3.5 and click Add/Remove.

Macintosh Version
To remove the KaleidaGraph software from your hard disk:
1. Quit any other programs that are currently running.
2. Insert the KaleidaGraph CD-ROM.
3. Double-click the KaleidaGraph 3.5 Installer icon. Alternately, you can run the CDSetup program
to remove the software.
4. Proceed through the Welcome screen, license agreement, and ReadMe information to display the
KaleidaGraph Installer dialog.
5. Choose Remove from the pop-up menu and locate the folder that contains the KaleidaGraph
program.
6. Click Remove.

10 1.2 Installing KaleidaGraph

 Getting Started

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

This section introduces some of KaleidaGraph’s basic concepts, such as starting the program, opening files,
and quitting the program. The various areas and terms associated with the data and plot windows are also
explained.

1.3.1 Starting KaleidaGraph

To start KaleidaGraph, perform one of the following:
• Windows: Double-click the KGraph icon or choose Start > Programs > KaleidaGraph 3.5 >
KGraph.
• Macintosh: Double-click the KaleidaGraph icon.
The first time the program is started, the dialog in Figure 1-1 is displayed to personalize your copy of
KaleidaGraph and enter your serial number. If this is a new copy of the program, the serial number is located
on the back cover of the manual. If this is an update from an earlier version, your serial number has not
changed.

Figure 1-1 Startup dialog

After you click OK, two windows are displayed; a data window and the Formula Entry window. The next
section contains an introduction to the data window. Refer to Chapter 5 for information on using the Formula
Entry window to analyze and manipulate data in the active data window.

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics 11

KaleidaGraph

1.3.2 Data Window Overview

The data window, shown in Figure 1-2, contains a spreadsheet used to enter and store data for plotting and
analysis. It consists of a number of cells organized in columns. A data window can contain a maximum of 1000
columns and 1 million rows, subject to memory limitations.

1 5

Figure 1-2 Data window

1. Home Button
Click this button to return the data window to its origin (row 0, column 0). This is useful for quickly
returning to the start of the window when viewing a different section of the data window.
2. Cell Selection Cursor
This cursor is used to make selections in the data window.
3. Posted Note
The Posted Note is used to enter information about the data in the active data window. Each data window
has its own Posted Note. When information is stored in the Posted Note, its icon changes from an empty
note to one with data in it.
4. Title Bar
The title bar displays the name of the file. You can move the data window by dragging the title bar to a
new location.
5. Update Plot Button
Click this button to force an immediate update of the plot that is currently linked to this data window.

12 1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

 Getting Started

Each column in the data window can contain a different data type. You can change the data type for any of the
columns by choosing Data > Column Format. Figure 1-3 shows a data window that contains columns
formatted as Text, Time, and Float.

1 5

3
6

Figure 1-3 Data window elements

1. Column Title
This is the title of the column (in this case Month). By default, the column titles are A, B, C, and so on
for a new data window.
2. Row Numbers
The row numbers are located on the left side of the data window.
3. Text Column
This column displays data that has a Text format applied to it. Notice that the data in the text column is
left-justified.
4. Time Column
This column displays data that has a Time format applied to it. There are a number of options available
for displaying time data.
5. Column Numbers
Each column has a number associated with it. The column number is used to reference columns in the
Macro Calculator and Formula Entry. Whenever a selection is made in the data window, the first column
in the selection becomes column 0.
6. Numeric Column
This column contains data using a Numeric (Float or Double) format. There are a number of options
available for displaying numeric data.

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics 13

KaleidaGraph

1.3.3 Plot Window Overview

Plots are created by entering data into the data window and choosing a plot type from the Gallery menu. After
selecting the data columns to be plotted, the plot is generated and displayed in the plot window. Figure 1-4
shows the components of the plot window.

Figure 1-4 Plot window components

1. Title Bar
The title bar displays the name of the file. You can move the plot window by clicking and dragging the
title bar to a new location.
2. Toolbox
The plot tools are located on a movable palette. The tools are used to create, modify, and enhance objects
in the plot window.
3. Zoom Setting
You can use this pop-up menu to change the view of the active plot window.
4. Find Data Button
Clicking this button displays any data windows referenced by the plot. If the data is archived in the plot,
the data windows are extracted and displayed.

14 1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

 Getting Started

Figure 1-5 shows the main elements found in a standard plot. There are other items that can be added to the
plot, but the elements shown here are common to almost every kind of plot.

1
Test #1
5
2 Example
7
6
6
5 7
4
Test #1

3
3
2
1
4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time

Figure 1-5 Plot elements

1. Legend
The legend consists of a frame, the plot symbols, and the labels used to identify each variable in the plot.
By default, the labels are taken from the names of the columns in the data window. The variables are listed
in the order they are selected for plotting.
2. Axis Labels
The axis labels display the values associated with each of the major tick marks on the plot.
3. Axis Titles
The axis titles are taken from the column names of the data being plotted. If more than one variable is
plotted on the same axis, the title is taken from the first column being plotted on that axis.
4. Grid Lines
The grid lines can be used to display a horizontal or vertical line at each of the major and minor tick marks
in the plot.
5. Plot Title
The plot title is the name of the graph. By default, the plot title is taken from the name of the data window
6. Major Tick Marks
The major tick marks are used to identify the major divisions along the axis.
7. Minor Tick Marks
Minor ticks display the divisions between major tick marks.

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics 15

KaleidaGraph

1.3.4 Using the Toolbar

The Windows version of KaleidaGraph provides a toolbar for easy access to some commonly used commands.
To use the toolbar, click a button to execute the appropriate command. Some of the buttons in the toolbar
change when switching from a data window to a plot or layout window. The toolbars and the functions
available are shown in Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7.

Add Ascending
New Save Cut Paste Undo Rows Sort Statistics

Open Print Copy Clear Append Column Descending Help

Columns Format Sort
Figure 1-6 Data window toolbar

Group Bring To Front

UnGroup Send To Back

Figure 1-7 Plot and layout window toolbar

1.3.5 Using the Shortcut Menu

KaleidaGraph can display a shortcut menu containing commonly used commands when you are working in
the data, plot, or layout window. The commands in the shortcut menu vary depending on what object is
selected and where the pointer is when the shortcut menu is displayed.

To display the shortcut menu, do one of the following:

• (Windows) Right-click.
• (Macintosh) Hold down Control while pressing the mouse button.

1.3.6 Opening KaleidaGraph Files

The Open and Import commands (File menu) can be used to open files previously saved from KaleidaGraph.
The only difference between the two commands is that the Open command lists all files that can be opened by
KaleidaGraph while the Import command only lists files that are the same type as what you select from the
submenu.

The File menu contains a Recent Files command that lists the last eight data or plot files that have been opened
or saved in KaleidaGraph. You can open one of the files in the list by choosing its file name from the submenu

For information on opening KaleidaGraph files created on another platform, refer to Section 1.3.7.

16 1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

 Getting Started

1.3.7 Sharing Files Across Platforms

KaleidaGraph has the ability to share files between the Macintosh and Windows platforms. The table below
lists the file name extensions and file types required to do this successfully.

Kind of File File Name Extension Macintosh File Type

Data file .QDA QDAT

Plot file .QPC QPCT
Macro file .EQN EQNS
Layout file .QPL QPLY
Script file .QSC QSCP
Style file .QST QSTY

Mac to Windows
To take a Macintosh file and open it on a Windows computer, the proper file name extension must be added.
For example, if you created a data file named Results in the Macintosh version, the file needs to be renamed
Results.QDA to be recognized by the Windows version.

The Preferences dialog contains an option that helps when sharing files across platforms. If Add Windows
file extensions is selected, the appropriate Windows file name extension is appended to the file name in the
Save dialog.

Windows to Mac
The method to open Windows files on a Macintosh depends on what version of KaleidaGraph is running on
the Macintosh. The two cases are listed below:
• Version 3.0.8 or later - No extra steps are necessary. The Open dialog automatically lists files that
have the appropriate file name extension and opens them correctly.
• Version 3.0.5 or earlier - For files coming across a network, the file type needs to be modified with
a resource editor before KaleidaGraph can read these files correctly. For files stored on disks, the
appropriate file conversion software (for example, PC Exchange) must be installed and configured,
as shown in the preceding table. If the conversion software asks for the creator, QKPT should be
entered.
Note: There are two AppleScript droplets available on our web site that make the task of sharing files much
easier. By dragging a file or folder onto these programs, the appropriate file name extension or file type
is automatically applied.

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics 17

KaleidaGraph

1.3.8 Getting Help

Windows Version
To get online help, do one of the following:
• Choose Help > Contents.
• Press F1 to display the Help Contents menu.
• Click Help in any dialog that contains a Help button.

• Click the button on the toolbar.

• Choose Start > Programs > KaleidaGraph 3.5 > KGHelp.

Note: If the Help dialog is not displayed, the Help file was not loaded during launch. This occurs if the
KGHelp file is renamed or is not in the Help folder (within the KGraph folder). If necessary, you can
perform a custom installation to reinstall the Help files.

Macintosh Version
To get online help, do one of the following:
• Choose Help > KaleidaGraph Help.
• Press the Help key on the keyboard.
• Click Help in any dialog that contains a Help button.

Note: If the Help dialog is not displayed, the KaleidaGraph Help file could not be found or the QuickHelp
program was deleted. The KaleidaGraph Help file must be in the same folder as the KaleidaGraph
program and it cannot be renamed. If necessary, you can perform a custom installation to reinstall the
Help files.

18 1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

 Getting Started

Help Dialog
The Help dialog, shown in Figure 1-8, contains a table of contents for the topics available in the KaleidaGraph
program. Double-click the topic and the dialog displays the information available for the selected topic. If you
are unable to locate the desired information from the table of contents page, you can use the Index or search
the entire Help system for a particular term.

Figure 1-8 Help dialog

If you need information on using the Help system, choose the How to Use Help (Windows) or Help with
QuickHelp (Macintosh) command under the Help menu.

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics 19

KaleidaGraph

1.3.9 Setting Preferences

KaleidaGraph provides a Preferences command in the File menu to specify what files are saved when you
quit the program. One of the following dialogs is displayed when you choose this command.

Figure 1-9 Preferences dialog (Windows)

20 1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

 Getting Started

Figure 1-10 Preferences dialog (Macintosh)

The pop-up menus in the upper section of the dialog control what happens to each of the different file types
when quitting the program. For data and plot files, you can choose to Always save changes or to display a
Prompt if there are any unsaved windows. If a data or plot window has not been saved previously, a Save
dialog is displayed.

For the remaining types of files (Layout, Macros, Script, and Style), you can choose whether to display the
Prompt dialog if any changes have occurred, Always save, or Never save the changes. For details on the
information stored in each of these files, see Appendix B.

Note: The settings for this dialog are saved as part of the Style file. If you choose Never for the Style, you
must manually overwrite the default Style file by choosing File > Export > Style.

1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics 21

KaleidaGraph

1.3.10 Quitting KaleidaGraph

To close the KaleidaGraph program and return to the desktop, choose File > Exit (Windows) or File > Quit
(Macintosh). KaleidaGraph saves any changes to the default Style, Macros, Script, and Layout files,
depending on what is specified in the Preferences dialog. See Section 1.3.9 for details on setting the program
preferences.

If Prompt is selected for any of the items in the Preferences dialog and changes have occurred to those
particular items, a dialog similar to the one in Figure 1-11 is displayed.

Figure 1-11 Save Changes dialog

22 1.3 KaleidaGraph Basics

Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

Chapter 2

This chapter contains four major examples to guide you through the operation of KaleidaGraph. These
examples show you how to:
• Create a new data set, change the column titles and format, sort the data, and calculate simple statistics
for the data.
• Create a Scatter plot, change the display of the variable, use a few plot tools, and add a curve fit and error
bars.
• Create a Column plot from a saved data set, modify the axes, change the display of the axis labels, and
add value labels above the columns.
• Display the plots from the preceding examples on the same page using the layout window.

Some optional examples are also included to show you how to perform common operations not covered in the
main examples. The topics include editing the legend text and frame, using Formula Entry, applying a user-
defined curve fit, and modifying data in a saved plot.

2.1 Generating a Sample Data Set

This example takes you through the process of typing data into the data window, changing the column titles
and format, sorting the data, and calculating statistics on the raw data.

2.1.1 Entering Data

The first step is to type some data into the data window. To do this:
1. Type 4.3 into the first cell of column 0.
2. Press the Enter (Windows), Return (Macintosh), or Down Arrow key to move down to the next
cell.
3. Type the values 2.9, 4.8, 3.2, 3.9, 3.5, and 2.3 into column 0. After each value is entered, press the
Enter, Return, or Down Arrow key to move down a row.
4. Click the cell at row 0, column 1.
5. Use the same method to type the data values 8.0, 6.2, 9.0, 5.7, 8.8, 7.2, and 4.9 into column 1.

2.1 Generating a Sample Data Set 23

KaleidaGraph

2.1.2 Changing Column Titles and Format

Next we will use the Column Format dialog to change the titles and format for these two columns.
1. Double-click the column title of column 0 (or choose Data > Column Format).
2. Type Time into the field below the listing of column titles.
3. Click the name of the second column (B).
4. Type Test 1 into the field below the listing of column titles.

This dialog can also be used to change the format of the data columns. The following steps change the display
of the data so that each value only has one decimal place.
1. Press Shift and click both the Time and Test 1 entries.
2. From the Format pop-up menu, choose Fixed.
3. From the Decimals pop-up menu, choose 1.
4. Click OK to apply the changes to the data window.

Your data window should resemble the one shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Sample data window

2.1.3 Sorting the Data

Now we will sort the data to get the values in ascending order (from low to high).
1. If it is not already selected, click the Time label in the data window to select the entire column.
2. Choose Functions > Ascending Sort.
3. Press Shift and click both the Time and Test 1 entries.
4. Click OK to apply the changes to the data window.

24 2.1 Generating a Sample Data Set

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

2.1.4 Calculating Statistics

The final step is to calculate a number of standard statistics on one of the data columns.
1. Click the Test 1 label in the data window to select the entire column.
2. Choose Functions > Statistics to display the statistics for the Test 1 data. The Statistics dialog
provides a Copy to Clipboard button to export the results for use in a data, plot, or layout window
3. Click OK.

At this point, you can proceed to the next example or save your data by choosing File > Save Data.

2.2 Creating and Editing a Scatter Plot

This example uses the data from the preceding example to create a Scatter plot. This example shows how to
change the marker type, size, and color, use the Identify and Data Selection tools, apply a Linear curve fit,
display the curve fit equation, and add error bars.

2.2.1 Creating a Scatter Plot

Now, let’s create a plot using the example data entered in the previous exercise.
1. Choose Gallery > Linear > Scatter. The Variable Selection dialog is displayed. Notice that the
name of the data file and its column titles are displayed in this dialog.
2. Select Time as the X variable and Test 1 as the Y variable by clicking the appropriate buttons.
Figure 2-2 shows what the Variable Selection dialog should look like at this point.

Figure 2-2 Variable Selection dialog

3. Click New Plot to create a Scatter plot.

The X variable you selected is the independent variable and the Y variable is the dependent variable. By
default, the X variable is plotted on the horizontal axis and the Y variable is plotted on the vertical axis.

2.2 Creating and Editing a Scatter Plot 25

KaleidaGraph

The title of the plot is taken from the name of the data window. The X and Y axis titles are taken from the
column titles of the variables being plotted. The Y variable title is also used in the legend.

2.2.2 Changing Plot Style

Now that the graph has been created, it can be modified very easily. For example, let’s change how the data
is represented on the plot. You will use the Plot Style dialog to change the marker type, size, and color.
1. Triple-click the marker displayed in the legend (or choose Plot > Plot Style).
2. Select a different marker to represent the variable on the plot. The markers are displayed on the left
side of the dialog. The first six markers in the left column are transparent; all of the others are opaque
3. Change the value in the Marker Size field to 18 and select a different color from the color palette.
4. Click OK and the plot is redrawn to reflect the changes that have been made.

2.2.3 Using the Identify Tool

Now we will use the Identify tool ( ) on the toolbox to display the coordinates of the data.
1. Select the Identify tool by either clicking it or pressing I on your keyboard.
2. Once the tool is selected, click one of the data points. The X and Y coordinates are displayed in the
upper-left corner of the plot window.

It is also possible to leave the coordinates directly on the plot. To do this:

• Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you release the mouse button. This places a label
containing the coordinates to the right of the point.

2.2.4 Applying a Linear Curve Fit

You can quickly and easily fit a curve to a set of data points. To add a curve fit to the plot:
1. Choose Curve Fit > Linear. This displays a dialog to select which variables to fit with the Least
Squares Error method.
2. Select a variable to be fit (in this case Test 1) by clicking its check box.
3. Click OK. The curve fit is calculated and the curve fit line is drawn on the plot. By default, the curve
fit results will also be displayed on the plot. If the equation is not displayed, turn on Display
Equation in the Plot menu.

The position of the equation can be changed using the Selection Arrow.
1. Click the Selection Arrow on the toolbox.
2. Drag the equation to a new position.
3. When the move is complete, click anywhere else in the window and the object handles disappear.
4. You can use the same technique to move the legend.

26 2.2 Creating and Editing a Scatter Plot

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

At this point, your plot should resemble Figure 2-3.

Data 1
y = 1.0205 + 1.7131x R= 0.9255
10

9 Test 1

8
Test 1

6
3.2, 5.7

4
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Time

Figure 2-3 Sample Scatter plot

2.2.5 Exporting the Results of the Curve Fit

Once a curve fit is applied, you can copy the values of the curve fit line to the data window. These values are
appended after the existing data in your data window. The first column will be a series of X values. The
number of X values will be equal to the number of curve fit points specified in the Curve Fit Options dialog
(Format menu). The second column will contain the values from the curve fit at each of these locations.
1. Reselect Linear from the Curve Fit menu. A Curve Fit Selections dialog appears with a drop-down
arrow under View.
2. Click the drop-down arrow and choose Copy Curve Fit to Data Window from the pop-up menu.
3. Click OK to return to the plot window.

2.2.6 Using the Data Selection Tool

Now we will use the Data Selection tool ( ) to graphically remove a point from the plot. The Data Selection
tool operates by enclosing a region of the plot in a polygon. Any data points outside the polygon are removed
from the plot. By pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you make the polygon, the data inside
the polygon can be eliminated.
1. Select the Data Selection tool by either clicking it or pressing S on your keyboard.
2. Once the tool is selected, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and create a polygon around
the data point in the lower-left corner of the plot window. Once the polygon is complete, the point is
removed and the curve fit is recalculated.
3. Double-click the Data Selection tool to return the plot to its original state.

2.2 Creating and Editing a Scatter Plot 27

KaleidaGraph

2.2.7 Adding Error Bars

The last modification to the plot will be the addition of error bars. Error bars enable you to illustrate the amount
of error for the plotted data.
1. Choose Plot > Error Bars to display the Error Bar Variables dialog.
2. Click the check box in the Y Err column to add vertical error bars. The Error Bar Settings dialog is
displayed to choose the type of error.
3. From the pop-up menu, choose Standard Error for the error type. The dialog should look like the
one in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Error Bar Settings dialog

4. Click OK to return to the Error Bar Selection dialog.
5. Click Plot to add the error bars to the plot. The error bars represent the standard error of the entire
data column.

The finished plot is shown in Figure 2-5.

28 2.2 Creating and Editing a Scatter Plot

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

Data 1
y = 1.0205 + 1.7131x R= 0.9255
10

9 Test 1

8
Test 1

6
3.2, 5.7

4
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Time

Figure 2-5 Finished Scatter plot

You have just created a customized plot. You can continue on to the next example or you can save the plot by
choosing File > Save Graph. If you save the graph, a copy of the data window is saved with the plot (in the
same file). The process of opening a saved plot and extracting the data is covered in Section 2.5.4.

2.2 Creating and Editing a Scatter Plot 29

KaleidaGraph

2.3 Creating and Editing a Column Plot

This example uses a Column plot to show how to adjust major and minor ticks, axis labels, fill patterns,
column spacing, plot color, and label rotation, in addition to displaying values above the columns.

2.3.1 Opening a Saved Data File

We will begin this example by opening a saved data set.
1. Choose File > Open.
2. Locate and open the Data folder, which is located in the Examples folder.
3. Double-click the Housing Starts file.

2.3.2 Creating a Column Plot

Now, let’s create a plot using this data.
1. Choose Gallery > Bar > Column. The Variable Selection dialog is displayed.
2. Select Month as the X variable and 1966(K) as the Y variable by clicking the appropriate buttons.
3. Click New Plot to create a Column plot.

2.3.3 Changing Axis Options

The first set of changes will be made in the Axis Options dialog. This dialog contains the majority of the
settings for the axes, grid lines, tick marks, and axis labels.

The first change is to remove the vertical grid lines.

1. Triple-click the X axis (or choose Plot > Axis Options) to display the dialog in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 Axis Options dialog

30 2.3 Creating and Editing a Column Plot

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

2. Click Grids. The dialog changes to show the options that can be selected for the major and minor
grids.
3. Choose None from the pop-up menu to the right of Major.
The next change is to remove the tick marks on the X axis.
1. Click Ticks. The dialog changes to show the options that can be selected for the major and minor
ticks.
2. Choose None from the pop-up menus below both Major and Minor.

The next change also involves the tick marks, but this time on the Y axis.
1. Select the Y axis from the pop-up menu under Axis.
2. Choose Out from the pop-up menus below both Major and Minor.

The last step is to change the maximum Y axis limit from 140 to 160.
1. Click Limits. The dialog changes to show the options that can be selected for the limits.
2. Change the value in the Max field from 140 to 160.
3. Click OK to update the plot with all of the changes that were made while in the Axis Options dialog

2.3.4 Changing the Fill Pattern

Now you can change the fill pattern for the columns using the Plot Style dialog.
1. Triple-click the small square in the legend which is filled with the same pattern as the columns (or
choose Plot > Plot Style).
2. You can now select a different fill pattern for the columns. Click one of the fill patterns and a frame
appears around that pattern to show that it is selected.
3. Click OK.

2.3.5 Increasing the Column Offset

The next step is to increase the amount of space between the columns.
1. Choose Format > Plot Extras.
2. Change the Column Offset percentage from 20 to 40%.
3. Click OK to update the plot.

2.3 Creating and Editing a Column Plot 31

KaleidaGraph

At this point, your plot should resemble the one shown in Figure 2-7.

1966 (K) Housing Starts

160

140
120

100
1966 (K)

80
60

40
20

0
Jan Feb March April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec
Month

Figure 2-7 Sample Column plot

2.3.6 Changing Plot Color

The next step is to add some color to the interior of the plot. By default, plots are created without interior and
background colors. To select an interior color:
1. Click any of the four axes to select the plot. Two sets of icons are displayed at the bottom of the
toolbox. The first icon displays two overlapping rectangles which control the interior and
background color of the plot.
2. Click the rectangle in the foreground and select one of the lighter colors from the color palette that
appears. The selected color is used to fill the interior of the plot.

2.3.7 Editing Text Labels

The following steps remove the X axis title, resize the Y axis title, and rotate the X axis labels.
1. Click the X axis title, Month, and press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh).
2. Click the Y axis title, 1966 (K). Drag any one of the four object handles to increase the font size of
the label. It is also possible to change the font size by double-clicking the text label.
3. Double-click one of the X axis labels. Notice that this dialog has its own set of menus.
4. Choose Format > 90 Degree Rotation.
5. Choose Format > Right Justify so that the rotated labels line up evenly.
6. Click OK to return to the plot window.
7. Drag one of the X axis labels closer to the axis. You can also use the arrow keys to move selected
objects one pixel at a time in the specified direction (10 pixels if you press Shift while using the
arrow keys).

32 2.3 Creating and Editing a Column Plot

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

2.3.8 Adding Value Labels

The last step is to display the value of each column. To do this, turn on Add Values in the Plot menu. The
values are placed at the top of each column. The values can be moved as a group by dragging them to a new
location.

The Column plot is now complete.

2.4 Laying out Plots for Printing

This example shows how to use the layout window to place the plots created in the previous examples on a
single page.

Note: The following steps assume the two plots from the previous examples are still available. If you saved
the plots and quit before reaching this example, use the Open command (File menu) to open these
plots. If you do not have them any longer, you can open any two plots from the Plots folder in the
Examples folder.

2.4.1 Placing Plots in the Layout

To place plots into the layout window:
1. Choose Windows > Show Layout > KG Layout. If no layout has been created previously, an empty
layout window is displayed.
2. Use the Select Plot command (Layout menu) to select the two plots that were created in the
previous examples. At this point, do not worry about their overall placement.

2.4.2 Arranging Plots in the Layout

To arrange the plots in the layout window:
1. Choose Layout > Arrange Layout. The Arrange Layout dialog allows you to enter the number of
rows and columns to divide the layout window into equal sections.
2. The default settings (two rows and one column) are sufficient for this example, so click OK. Notice
that the layout window is divided into two equal sections and the plots are automatically resized and
placed into these sections.

2.4.3 Modifying and Exporting the Layout

It is possible to display more than just plots in the layout window. The plot tools are available, enabling you
to add text and other objects to the layout. Various graphic images can be imported into the layout window.
Also, a background pattern and frame can be added to the layout using the Set Background command
(Layout menu).

Feel free to print the layout by choosing File > Print Layout. The contents of the layout window can be copied
to the Clipboard using the Copy Layout command (Edit menu). It is also possible to export the layout in a
variety of formats using the appropriate command from the Export submenu (File menu).

The layout window can be closed by choosing File > Close. This completes the main portion of the guided
tour. You can either stop at this point or proceed to the additional examples in Section 2.5 to learn more about
KaleidaGraph.

2.4 Laying out Plots for Printing 33

KaleidaGraph

2.5 Additional Examples

This section contains four optional examples to show you some of the finer points of KaleidaGraph. Unlike
the major examples you completed earlier, you do not have to follow the additional examples in any order.
You can select those topics which are relevant to the way you will be using KaleidaGraph to get a greater feel
for the program.

2.5.1 Editing the Legend

This example shows how to edit the legend frame and text. The attributes of the legend frame are controlled
by the bottom three icons on the toolbox. The steps in this example use the last icon in the toolbox, which is
divided into two sections: a Line Style icon on the left and a Line Width icon on the right.
1. Open the Sample Plot file, which is located in the Plots folder in the Examples folder.
2. Click the legend to select it.
3. From the toolbox, click the Line Width icon (the up and down arrows) and choose Hairline from the
pop-up menu. Notice that the legend frame changes from a shadow box to a hairline width line.
4. Now click the Line Style icon (the one to the left of the up and down arrows) and select one of the
dashed lines from the pop-up menu. Notice that the line surrounding the legend now contains the
dashed pattern you selected.
5. Finally, choose None from the Line Style pop-up menu. This removes the legend frame completely

Now we can edit the text inside the legend.

1. Select the Text tool ( ) from the toolbox. You can select this tool by either clicking it or pressing
T on your keyboard.
2. Double-click any of the three labels inside the legend. A dialog is displayed to modify the text.
3. Delete the text in this dialog and type any information you like. Feel free to change the font, size, and
style as well.
4. Click OK to return to the plot and see the change.

The changes you made only affect this one label. If you use the Selection Arrow instead of the Text tool, you
can change the attributes of all legend items at once. However, you cannot edit the text with the Selection
Arrow.

34 2.5 Additional Examples

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

2.5.2 Using Formula Entry

This example shows how to use the Formula Entry window, shown in Figure 2-8, to operate on the data
window. Details on executing a multi-line formula are also included.

Figure 2-8 Formula Entry window

Formula Entry Overview

The Formula Entry window is a very powerful tool for data analysis. Use Formula Entry to enter equations
(functions) that generate and manipulate data in the frontmost data window. The results of a formula can be
placed in a data column, a single cell, or a memory location.

Memory locations and column numbers can be used in formulas. Memory locations range from 0 to 99 and
need to be preceded by an m when used in a formula (m15, m35, and so on).

Column numbers range from 0 to 999 and need to be preceded by a c when used in a formula (c10, c55, and
so on). Column numbers are displayed in a box at the top of the column. Please note that when a selection is
made in the data window, the first column in the selection becomes column 0.

The following are a few examples of basic formulas along with a description of each:
c2=c0+c1; Adds the first two columns together and stores the results in column 2.
c1=c0/1000; Divides column 0 by 1000 and stores the results in column 1.
c2=cos(c0); Calculates the cosine of column 0 and stores the results in column 2.

Executing Individual Formulas

Let’s get started by running a few formulas and seeing their effects on the data window. In the steps that
follow, you can press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) instead of clicking Run.
1. Choose File > New to display an empty data window.
2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry. By default, the F1 button is selected. The F1–F8 buttons can
be used to store common formulas, however, we recommend that you leave F1 for general use and
store your formulas in F2–F8.
3. Click F2, type c0=index() + 1, and click Run. This creates a series from 1 to 100 in column 0.
4. Click F3, type c1=log(c0), and click Run. This function calculates the logarithm of each value in
column 0 and stores the results in column 1.
5. Click F4, type c2=c1^2, and click Run. This formula squares each value in column 1 and stores the
results in column 2.

2.5 Additional Examples 35

KaleidaGraph

6. Click F5, type cell(0,3)=csum(c2), and click Run. This formula calculates the total sum of the values
in column 2 and stores the result in the cell at row 0, column 3. You need to click the right scroll
arrow to see the result of this formula.

Executing Multi-line Formulas

It is not necessary to enter and execute each formula individually. KaleidaGraph has a method to enter multiple
formulas and execute them all at once.

To the left of the F1 button is a Posted Note button ( ). Clicking this button displays a text editor. You
can enter multiple formulas into the editor and run them all at once by clicking Run. The formulas must be on
separate lines and each must be terminated with a semicolon.

Let’s try using the same formulas from before, but this time executing them using the Posted Note window:
1. Choose File > New to display an empty data window.
2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
3. Click the Posted Note button in the Formula Entry window to display a text editor.
4. Type the following formulas into the Posted Note window. Note that each formula ends with a
semicolon and appears on a separate line.

c0=index() + 1;
c1=log(c0);
c2=c1^2;
cell(0,3)=csum(c2);
5. After the formulas are entered, choose File > Exit to return to the Formula Entry window. A message
is displayed in the Formula Entry window telling you to click Run to execute the Formula Posted
Note.
6. Click Run to execute all of the formulas at once.

As you can see, this is a very convenient method to execute multiple formulas at once. Using this method, you
can save the formulas as a text file that can be opened at a later time within the Posted Note dialog.

2.5.3 Applying a General (user-defined) Curve Fit

This example takes you through the process of defining and applying a user-defined curve fit. KaleidaGraph’s
General curve fit is based on the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm. You can solve up to nine unknown
parameters during the fitting process.

Creating a Sample Data Set

We will start by creating a data set from scratch.
1. Choose File > New to display an empty data window.
2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
3. If it is not already selected, click F1.
4. Type c0=index()–50 into the Formula Entry window and click Run. This generates a unit series of
–50 to 49 in the first data column (column 0).

36 2.5 Additional Examples

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

5. Click F2, enter c1=5+10*exp(–c0*c0/(20*20)), and click Run. The results are placed in the second
data column (column 1).

Creating a Line Plot

Now let’s create a Line plot of this data.
1. Choose Gallery > Linear > Line.
2. Select A as the X variable and B as the Y variable.
3. Click New Plot to create a Line plot.

Defining a Curve Fit Equation

Now we are ready to apply a General curve fit. The first step in this process is to define the curve fit and add
it to the list of available General curve fits.
1. Choose Curve Fit > General > Edit General. This displays the dialog in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9 Edit General dialog

2. Click Add.
3. Click the New Fit that was added to the listing on the left side of the dialog. The name can be changed
in the field below the listing. Change the name to Gaussian.
4. Click Edit to display the Curve Fit Definition dialog, shown in Figure 2-10. This is where the curve
fit definition is entered.

2.5 Additional Examples 37

KaleidaGraph

Figure 2-10 Curve Fit Definition dialog

A Gaussian curve fit is of the form y=a+b*e^(–(x–c)^2/d^2). In KaleidaGraph, enter the equation
(using m0 as X and m1–m9 as your unknowns) with some initial guesses to give the algorithm a
starting point. The format for adding initial guesses is to follow the equation with a semicolon and
separate each initial guess with a semicolon.
5. Type m1+m2*exp(–(m0–m3)*(m0–m3)/(m4*m4));m1=1;m2=5;m3=1;m4=10 into the Curve Fit
Definition dialog and click OK to each dialog to return to the plot.

Applying a General Curve Fit

Now that the curve fit has been defined, it can be applied to the data.
1. Choose Curve Fit > General > Gaussian. This is the curve fit that we added in the previous set of
steps.
2. In the dialog that appears, click the check box in front of B to apply the curve fit to this variable.
3. Click OK and the curve fit is calculated and displayed on the plot.
4. If the resulting equation is not displayed already, turn on Display Equation in the Plot menu to show
a table containing the results of the fit. The table lists the values of the unknown parameters along
with the standard error of these values. It should be read as the parameter value +/– the standard error.
The Chi Square and R values are also displayed as part of the curve fit results.
5. Turn off Display Equation to hide the table.

Changing Plot Style

The final changes are to increase the number of markers, hide the variable line, and change the color and line
style of the curve fit line.
1. Triple-click the marker in the legend (or choose Plot > Plot Style).
2. From the Show Markers pop-up menu, choose Every 5th marker.
3. Select None from the Style column to hide the variable line.
4. Click Curve Fit. Now you can control the appearance of the curve fit line.
5. Select a different line style, line width, and color for the curve fit. Click OK to apply the changes.

38 2.5 Additional Examples

 Guided Tour of KaleidaGraph

2.5.4 Modifying Data in a Saved Plot

This example shows how to modify a data point in a saved plot and have the plot and any curve fits
automatically updated.

Extracting the Data

To get started, we need to open a saved plot and extract the data. To do this:
1. Choose File > Open and open the Sample Plot file (located in the Plots folder, within the Examples
folder).
2. With the plot frontmost, choose Plot > Extract Data. The original data used to create the plot is
displayed. The title of the window begins with the same name as the original data file. Additionally,
a date and time stamp is appended to the name, identifying when the data was archived in the plot.

Changing the Data and Updating the Plot

Now we can make changes to the data and have the plot updated.
1. Turn on Auto Link in the Plot menu. When this command is active, you can make changes to the
data and have the plot automatically updated after each individual change.
2. Change the value in the first row of column 1 from 78.5 to 100.
3. Use one of the arrow keys to move to another cell to activate the Auto Link feature. The plot and
curve fit are automatically updated to reflect the modified data value.

Changing Multiple Data Points

If you need to add or modify multiple data points, it may be more efficient to use the Update Plot command
(Plot menu) because Auto Link causes the plot to update after each change. In this case, turn off Auto Link,
make any changes to the data, and choose the Update Plot command. The plot is updated to reflect all of the
changes at once.

2.5 Additional Examples 39

KaleidaGraph

40 2.5 Additional Examples

Working with Data Windows

Chapter 3

This chapter explains how to:

• Create a new data window.
• Use the keyboard to move through the data window.
• Select rows, columns, and a range of cells in the data window.
• Add, insert, and delete rows and columns.
• Edit column titles.
• Change the data format and width of columns.
• Use the Posted Note feature to make notes about the data.

3.1 Hiding, Displaying, and Closing Data Windows

A maximum of 160 data windows can be open at any one time, subject to memory limitations. You can view
a list of all open data windows by choosing Windows > Show Data. Data windows that are currently
displayed on the screen have their names in normal text. Names of hidden data windows appear in italic.

3.1.1 Creating a New Data Window

A blank data window can be created by choosing File > New. Any defaults that have been set using the
Column Format command are used to create the new window. By default, data windows are created 10
columns by 100 rows in size and named Data 1, Data 2, and so on.

3.1.2 Changing the Active Window

To make a data window active, click anywhere in the desired data window or choose Windows > Show Data
and select its name.

3.1.3 Hiding Data Windows

A data window can be hidden by choosing Windows > Hide Window and selecting its name. The next
window in the list becomes active.

3.1.4 Displaying Data Windows

A hidden data window can be displayed using the Show Data command (Windows menu). The names of
hidden data windows appear in italic. Select the name of the desired data window and it is brought to the front

3.1 Hiding, Displaying, and Closing Data Windows 41

KaleidaGraph

3.1.5 Closing Data Windows

You can use the Close All Data command (Windows menu) to close all of the open data windows at once.
Individual data windows can be closed by choosing File > Close or clicking the close box of each window. A
dialog may be displayed, asking if you want to save the data window before closing.

Note: If you do not want to save the data, this dialog can be avoided by pressing Shift while either clicking
the close box or choosing File > Close/NoSave.

3.2 Moving Around the Data Window

There are three methods available for moving around in the data window. You can use the mouse, the
keyboard, or the Go To Cell command.

3.2.1 Using the Mouse

One of the easiest and most common methods to move around the data window is to use the mouse. With the
mouse, you can move to any cell in the data window. To move to a different section of the data window, use
the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.

You can also use the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the data window to return the window
to its origin (row 0, column 0). This is useful for quickly returning to the start of the data window.

3.2.2 Using the Keyboard

There are a number of keys on the keyboard that let you move from one cell to another. When the edge of the
viewing area is reached, the data window scrolls to display the next row or column. The keys and their effects
are listed in the following table.

Key Direction
Left/Right Arrow Move one cell left/right.
Up/Down Arrow Move one cell up/down.
Tab Move one cell to the right.
Shift+Tab Move one cell to the left.
Return Move down one cell.
Shift+Return Move up one cell.
Enter Windows: Same as the Return key.
Macintosh: Move one cell in the same direction as the last move.
Page Up/Down Move one window view up/down.
Home Move to top of column.
End Move to bottom of column.

42 3.2 Moving Around the Data Window

 Working with Data Windows

3.2.3 Using the Go To Cell Command

The Go To Cell command (Data menu) can be used to view a specific cell in the data window. Choosing
this command displays the dialog in Figure 3-1 to enter the row and column numbers of the desired cell. When
you click OK, the data window automatically scrolls to make that cell position visible.

Figure 3-1 Go To Cell dialog

3.3 Switching Between Overwrite and Insert Mode

KaleidaGraph provides two commands, Overwrite Mode and Insert Mode, that control what happens when
you try to edit or replace a data value. The active mode is preceded by a check mark in the Data menu.

If Overwrite Mode is active, cells are automatically selected when using the mouse or keyboard to move to a
cell. Typing data into the current cell replaces any existing data.

If Insert Mode is active, clicking a cell does not automatically select the cell. Instead, a cursor is placed in the
cell to edit the current value. To select a cell in Insert Mode, double-click the active cell.

3.4 Making Selections in the Data Window

This section explains how to select rows, columns, a range of cells, and all of the cells in the data window.

3.4.1 Selecting Rows

A single row can be selected by clicking its row number.

To select a range of rows, do one of the following:

• Click the number of the first or last row that you want and drag to complete the selection.
• Click the first row to be included, press Shift, and click the last row. You can use the scroll bars to
move to the last row.

3.4.2 Selecting Columns

A single column can be selected by clicking the column title.

To select a range of columns, do one of the following:

• Click the column title of the first or last column and drag to complete the selection.

3.3 Switching Between Overwrite and Insert Mode 43

KaleidaGraph

• Click the first column to be included, press Shift, and click the last column. You can use the scroll
bars to move to the last column.

3.4.3 Selecting a Range of Cells

To select a range of cells, drag the mouse until all of the cells you want are selected. If some of the cells are
not visible, keep dragging and the data window will scroll automatically.

To select a large block of data, click the first cell of the block, press Shift, and click the cell in the opposite
corner of the block. You can use the scroll bars to move to the second cell.

3.4.4 Selecting the Entire Window

To select all of the cells in the data window, choose Edit > Select All.

3.5 Adding and Deleting Rows and Columns

By default, data windows are created with 10 columns and 100 rows. It is very easy to increase the number of
rows and columns in the data window.

3.5.1 Adding Rows and Columns

Adding Rows
To add more rows to the data window, choose Data > Add Rows. This command displays the dialog in
Figure 3-2 to enter the number of rows to be added to the data window. The number entered is rounded up to
the next multiple of 100.

Figure 3-2 Add Rows dialog

Note: If the active cell is in the last row of the data window, pressing the Enter (Windows), Return
(Macintosh), or Down Arrow key automatically adds 100 rows to the data window.

Adding Columns
To add more columns to the data window, do one of the following:
• Choose Data > Append Columns and enter the number of columns to be appended to the data
window.
• Press the Right Arrow key (if the active cell is in the last column of the data window).
• Click the Add button in the Column Format dialog (Data menu).

44 3.5 Adding and Deleting Rows and Columns

 Working with Data Windows

3.5.2 Inserting Rows and Columns

Inserting Rows
Rows can be inserted anywhere in the data window. A row can be inserted in a single column or in a range of
columns.

To insert a row:
1. Make a selection in the data window. The row is inserted above the selection.
2. Choose Data > Insert Row. A row of blank cells is inserted into the data window.

Inserting Columns
To insert a column into the data window:
1. Select a column in the data window.
2. Choose Data > Insert Column. A blank column is inserted before the selected column in the data
window.

Columns can also be inserted by pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and clicking a column. A
new column is inserted before the selected column.

3.5.3 Deleting Rows and Columns

Deleting Rows
Rows can be deleted from the data window by making a selection and choosing Data > Delete Row. The
selection is deleted and the remaining data shifts up to take the place of the deleted data.

Deleting Columns
Columns can be deleted from the data window by making a selection and choosing Data > Delete Column.
The selection is deleted and the remaining data shifts over to take the place of the deleted data.

3.5 Adding and Deleting Rows and Columns 45

KaleidaGraph

3.6 Formatting Data Columns

Each column in the data window can contain numeric, date, time, or text data. KaleidaGraph supports six
different data types in the data window: Float, Double, Integer, Date, Time, and Text. Most of these data types
also have several formats available for displaying the data. An individual column can contain only one data
format. The properties of each column are controlled by the settings in the Column Format dialog, shown in
Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Column Format dialog

3.6.1 Editing Column Titles

To change the title of a column:
1. Double-click the title of the column or select the column and choose Data > Column Format. Either
method displays the Column Format dialog. The column that you select in the data window is
preselected in this dialog.
2. Change the column name in the text field. The change takes effect as soon as a different column is
selected or the dialog is closed by clicking OK.

Adding Superscripts, Subscripts, and Alternate Fonts to Column Titles

Superscripts, subscripts, and an alternate font can be used in the column titles by preceding the characters to
be altered with \u (up), \d (down), and \f (alternate font), respectively. To return to the default attributes, use
\n (normal).

Note: The column titles in the data window do not display the superscripts, subscripts, and alternate fonts.
The \n, \f, \u, and \d characters are mixed in with the normal text. However, when you create a plot,
these characters are converted to obtain the desired results, as shown in the following figures.

46 3.6 Formatting Data Columns

 Working with Data Windows

Column title list Plot legend

3.6.2 Changing the Data Format

There are several options in the Column Format dialog that control how the data is displayed. You can change
the data format on a single column or several columns at once.

To change the format of a column:

1. Double-click the title of the column or select the column and choose Data > Column Format. Either
method displays the Column Format dialog. The column that you select in the data window is
preselected in this dialog.
2. Select one or more columns to be formatted. Groups of columns can be selected by clicking one title
and dragging to another title.
Windows: To select nonadjacent columns, press Shift or Ctrl and click each column name. To
deselect a column, press Ctrl and click the title.
Macintosh: To select nonadjacent columns, press Shift or and click each column name. To
deselect a column, press and click the title.
3. Make selections for the data type, format, number of significant digits, trailing zeros, and decimal
separator.
4. When you are finished, you can select more columns to format or click OK to return to the data
window.

3.6.3 Changing Column Widths

To change the width of the columns in the data window:
1. Double-click the title of a column or select a column and choose Data > Column Format. Either
method displays the Column Format dialog.
2. Change the value in the Column Width field. The value in this field defines the column width for
all columns in the active data window. There is no way to set different column widths in the same
data window.
3. To apply the current column width to all open data windows, select the All Windows check box.
4. When you are finished, click OK to return to the data window.

3.6 Formatting Data Columns 47

KaleidaGraph

3.7 Making Notes about the Data

Each data window in KaleidaGraph provides a text editor where you can make notes about the data set. The
text editor is displayed by either choosing Data > Posted Note or clicking the Posted Note button ( ) in
the data window. This information is unique for each data window and is saved as part of the data file.

48 3.7 Making Notes about the Data

Working with Data

Chapter 4

This chapter explains how to:

• Enter data.
• Generate a data series.
• Import text files.
• Cut, copy, paste, and clear data.
• View column statistics.
• Sort data.
• Exchange rows and columns.
• Perform Student t-tests.
• Execute macros.
• Save and print data.
• Create data links via Dynamic Data Exchange under Windows.
• Use Publish and Subscribe in the data windows of the Macintosh version.

4.1 Entering Data

You can enter numeric, date, time, or text data into the data window. Before you enter data, make sure you
know how to move around the data window and how to change the format of a column. Moving around the
data window is covered in Section 3.2; changing the data format is covered in Section 3.6.

4.1.1 Entering Numeric Data

The Column Format dialog (Data menu) provides three data types for displaying numeric data. They are:
• Float - Accurate for numbers containing up to seven digits.
• Double - Accurate for numbers containing up to 16 digits.
• Integer - Displays the numbers as integers.

4.1 Entering Data 49

KaleidaGraph

To enter numeric data:

1. Double-click the title of a column or select a column and choose Data > Column Format. Verify
that the correct data type and format are selected for the column.
2. After you leave the Column Format dialog, use the mouse or arrow keys to select a cell.
3. Type the data value. If you make a mistake, press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh) to
remove incorrect characters.

Note: To enter numbers in scientific notation, enter the number, followed by an e and the power
(for example, 1.23e–4).
4. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) to move down one row, or use the arrow keys to
move around the data window.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all of the data is entered.

Note: If KaleidaGraph detects any characters that are not associated with the selected data type, a beep
sounds when you move to the next cell. Examples of incorrect characters for numeric data include:
text, multiple decimal points, and separators for date and time numbers.

4.1.2 Entering Date or Time Data

To enter date or time data:
1. Double-click the title of a column or select a column and choose Data > Column Format.
2. Choose either Date or Time from the Data Type pop-up menu.
3. Choose the desired format from the Format pop-up menu and click OK.
4. Use the mouse or arrow keys to select a cell.
5. Type the date or time data. If you make a mistake, press Backspace (Windows) or Delete
(Macintosh) to remove incorrect characters.

Note: When entering two digit years less than 40, the Promote 2 digit dates less than 40 option in
the Preferences dialog determines whether the dates are interpreted as 19xx or 20xx.
6. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) to move down one row, or use the arrow keys to
move around the data window.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all of the data is entered.

If you import date or time data from a file, the format must closely match the actual format shown to enable
KaleidaGraph to recognize the column properly. However, if you are typing the data or pasting the data from
the Clipboard (to a column that has been set to a date or time format), variations from the exact format are
allowed. Valid separators for the date and time formats include: slashes (/), colons (:), commas, and spaces.

When importing dates from another program, the Default Date Format setting in the Preferences dialog (File
menu) determines how the dates are interpreted by KaleidaGraph.

50 4.1 Entering Data

 Working with Data

4.1.3 Entering Text Data

To enter text data:
1. Double-click the title of a column or select a column and choose Data > Column Format.
2. Choose Text from the Data Type pop-up menu and click OK.
3. Use the mouse or arrow keys to select a cell.
4. Enter the text data. A maximum of 50 characters can be entered for each text label. If you make a
mistake, press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh) to remove incorrect characters.
5. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) to move down one row, or use the arrow keys to
move around the data window.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all of the data is entered.

Note: Any data that is entered into a Text column appears left-justified.

4.1.4 Missing Values

There may be times when data values are missing in a series of data. In the data window, KaleidaGraph
represents a missing data value with an empty cell, regardless of the data type.

When plotting, if the independent variable (X) contains missing values, KaleidaGraph searches for the first
and last cells that contain data and plots all values in between, ignoring any empty cells. If the dependent
variable (Y) contains missing values, the empty cells are ignored when plotting.

There is an option in the Plot Extras dialog (Format menu) that controls how missing values are treated in
Line, Double Y, Double X, Double XY, High/Low, Step, X-Y Probability, and Polar plots. When Missing
Data Breaks is selected, a missing data point in an X or Y variable causes a break in the line being plotted.
Otherwise, the line is continuous and the missing data points are ignored.

4.2 Generating a Data Series

There are several methods that can be used to generate a series of data. Some of the default macros that come
with KaleidaGraph can be used to create a data series. The Formula Entry window contains commands which
can also be used to place a series into a column. The only problem is these methods do not give you very much
control over the type of series that is generated.

The one method that does give you complete control is the Create Series command from the Functions menu.
This command allows you to specify an initial value, an increment, a multiplier, and a final value for the series

You can create a numeric series in any column that contains a Float, Double, or Integer data format. A date or
time series can be created in any column that contains a Date or Time format.

Note: It is not possible to generate a series in a Text column.

4.2 Generating a Data Series 51

KaleidaGraph

To create a series:
1. Select a column or a range of columns in the data window.
2. Choose Functions > Create Series. A dialog similar to one of the following appears, based on the
format of the column.

Figure 4-1 Create Series dialog (Numeric format)

Figure 4-2 Create Series dialog (Date format)

3. Enter values into the appropriate fields of the dialog and click OK to generate the series.

52 4.2 Generating a Data Series

 Working with Data

4.3 Importing Text Files

KaleidaGraph can open text files that are formatted in a number of different ways. This allows you to read data
created in another program and use that data in KaleidaGraph. The only requirements are that the data must
be saved as a text file and the information must be arranged in a repeating pattern.

4.3.1 Text File Input Format Dialog

Whenever you select a text file to be read into KaleidaGraph, the dialog in Figure 4-3 is displayed. This dialog
allows you to:
• Preview the file.
• Select the delimiter.
• Indicate the number of delimiters between columns.
• Specify the number of lines to skip at the beginning of a file.
• Select whether or not to read titles into the data window.
Note: If you are using the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph, this dialog is not displayed when opening text
files saved from KaleidaGraph. To display the dialog, press Option when opening these text files.

3
1
4
2

Figure 4-3 Text File Input Format dialog

The settings in the Text File Input Format dialog are discussed below:
1. Delimiter:
Delimiters are characters that separate the data values in a text file. The two common delimiters, Tab and
Space, assume that the data contains numbers, dates, or text, and that it is organized in columns, separated
by either tabs or spaces. A delimiter can also be user-defined by selecting Other and typing the desired
delimiter. This delimiter is set to a comma by default.

The Special format can be used to control how the data file is imported into KaleidaGraph. The Special
format is covered in Section 4.3.4.

4.3 Importing Text Files 53

KaleidaGraph

2. Number:
This setting determines the number of delimiters (tabs, spaces, or user-defined) that are present between
data values. The four options are described below:
• Select = 1 if a single delimiter separates the data values.
• Select >= 1 if one or more delimiters separate the data values.
• Select >= 2 if two or more delimiters separate the data values. If less than two delimiters are present,
they are treated as part of the same column.
• Select >= 3 if three or more delimiters separate the data values. If less than three delimiters are
present, they are treated as part of the same column.
3. Lines Skipped:
This setting determines the number of lines at the beginning of the file which are skipped before
interpreting the rest of the data. As this number changes, the data displayed in the preview window adjusts
to reflect the change. The skipped lines are automatically placed into the Posted Note, unless you are
merging a text file with a data set that already contains information in the Posted Note.
4. Options:
When the Read Titles check box is selected, the first line in the preview window is used for the column
titles.
5. Preview Window
This window displays 40 characters from the first four lines of the text file. To see a larger sample of the
file, click View Text.

4.3.2 Importing Missing Data Points

Missing data points can be entered from text files. If =1 is selected for the Number setting in the Text File
Input Format dialog, whenever KaleidaGraph detects two consecutive delimiters, an empty cell is placed in
the data window.

A period can also be used to represent an empty data cell. There is a mainframe program called SAS that uses
the period as a default character for empty data cells.

4.3.3 Example - Reading Basic Formats

This section shows how to import a simple tab-delimited text file. One of the text files that comes with
KaleidaGraph is used as an example.

To import this example data set:

1. Choose File > Open.
2. Locate and open the Data folder, which is located in the Examples folder.
3. Double-click the file Text Example. When KaleidaGraph determines that the file is a text file, the
dialog in Figure 4-4 appears.

54 4.3 Importing Text Files

 Working with Data

Figure 4-4 Text File Input Format dialog

Looking at the preview window of this dialog, you can see that:
• This particular file is tab-separated.
• A single tab is present between the values.
• None of the lines need to be skipped.
• The first line of the file should be used for the column titles.
4. Make the settings shown in the previous dialog and click OK. The text file is opened into a new data
window. Figure 4-5 shows the data window that results from importing the example data set.

Figure 4-5 Resulting data window

4.3 Importing Text Files 55

KaleidaGraph

4.3.4 Using the Special Format

If the delimiter is set to Special, the dialog expands, as shown in Figure 4-6. The Special format requires that
you define the format of the text file by specifying which fields to read and which fields to skip.

Figure 4-6 Expanded Text File Input Format dialog

1. Help...
Clicking Help displays the definitions for the format control characters. These characters are used in the
Title Format and Data Format fields. Some of these definitions display a lowercase letter and an
uppercase letter enclosed in parentheses. The lowercase letter should be used to read that type of value.
The uppercase letter should be used to skip that type of value.
2. View Text...
Clicking View Text displays a larger portion of the text file. This is useful when determining the format
of a text file. The sole purpose of this window is to view the data. It is not possible to edit the text in this
window before importing it into the data window. The only commands you should use are Exit and
Cancel. There is no difference between the functionality of these commands.

56 4.3 Importing Text Files

 Working with Data

3. Import from file...

Clicking this button displays a text editor which can be used to enter, open, and save frequently used
formats. The first line in the editor defines the title format and the second line defines the data format.
4. Title Format:
The Title Format field specifies which labels are to be skipped or read into the data window. It is only
necessary to enter a format in this field if Read Titles is selected. The title format does not have to be the
same as the data format; however, you must read one title for each column being imported.
5. Data Format:
This field defines which data is to be skipped or read into the data window.

4.3.5 Example - Reading Special Formats

This section shows an example of importing a text file that contains unwanted data values. One of the text files
that comes with KaleidaGraph is used as an example.

To import this example data set:

1. Choose File > Open.
2. Locate and open the Data folder, which is located in the Examples folder.
3. Double-click the file Measurements. When KaleidaGraph determines that the file is a text file, the
Text File Input Format dialog appears.
4. Click the Special button. The dialog expands so you can enter the title and data formats. The dialog
should look like Figure 4-7 at this point.

4.3 Importing Text Files 57

KaleidaGraph

Figure 4-7 Expanded Text File Input Format dialog

Looking at the preview window of this dialog, you can see that:
• The file begins with an unusable line which must be skipped.
• There is a title line containing three labels.
• The data is spread across six columns. Three of the columns contain labels and should be
skipped. The other three contain values which should be read as one fixed width field (Time
values) and two variable width fields (Temperature and Volume values).
5. Using the above information, you can now specify the format of the titles and the data. Figure 4-8
shows how the dialog should appear after making the following selections.
• Lines Skipped should be 1 to skip the first line.
• Read Titles should be selected to read in the column titles.
• The Title Format should be either a a a or 3(a). Either one of these formats reads in three
labels, separated by white space.
• The Data Format should be either A f3 A v A v or A f3 2(A v). Using either one of these
formats, the three columns of labels are skipped and only the three columns of data are read into
the data window.

58 4.3 Importing Text Files

 Working with Data

Figure 4-8 Finished Text File Input Format dialog

6. Click OK to import the text file. The resulting data window is shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 Resulting data window

4.3 Importing Text Files 59

KaleidaGraph

4.3.6 Special Format Examples

The following table contains some sample data format strings that may be used for the Special format.

Data Format Effect

wvvv Skips any white space at the beginning of each row

before reading in the variable width numbers.
vvvc Reads the first three columns of variable width
numbers and skips everything else.
vVvc Reads the first and third columns of variable width
numbers and skips everything else.
4(v) c 4(v) Takes a data set with four columns and places it into
eight columns in the data window.
vvv\ Takes a data set with any number of columns
containing variable width numbers and places it into
three columns in the data window.
3 (y f6 b b) Repeats the pattern in the parentheses three times.
After executing this format, the data window would
contain 12 columns.
u, 8(v) Reads eight comma-separated columns containing
variable width numbers.

60 4.3 Importing Text Files

 Working with Data

4.4 Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Clearing Data

There are several commands in the Edit menu that can be used to edit the contents of the data window. Using
these commands, you can cut, copy, paste, and clear data selections.

4.4.1 Binary Mode/Text Mode Setting

This command controls whether the Cut and Copy commands use binary or text format to copy large amounts
of data to the Clipboard. When copying 1000 cells or less, a binary and text representation of the data are
copied to the Clipboard. This occurs regardless of which mode is currently active.

Binary editing is much faster than text editing and allows you to quickly move large amounts of data. Use Text
mode if you need to copy more than 1000 cells and paste them into the plot window or another program.

To view the active mode, click the Edit menu. The active mode is displayed in the menu and has a check mark
in front of it. To switch between modes, choose the active mode.

4.4.2 Cutting Data

Choose Edit > Cut to remove the data selection from the window and place it on the Clipboard, replacing the
previous contents, if any.

4.4.3 Copying Data

Choose Edit > Copy to place a copy of the data selection on the Clipboard, replacing the previous contents,
if any.

4.4.4 Pasting Data

Choose Edit > Paste to place the Clipboard’s contents into the data window. You can also paste data into the
plot window, layout window, or another program.

4.4.5 Clearing Data

Choose Edit > Clear to delete all of the cells in the selection without disturbing the contents of the Clipboard.
To clear a cell’s contents without deleting the cell, use the Clear Data command, the Backspace key
(Windows), or the Delete key (Macintosh).

4.4.6 Including Column Titles when Editing Data

To include the column titles when editing, press Shift while choosing the Cut, Copy, Paste, or Clear
command from the Edit menu.

4.4 Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Clearing Data 61

KaleidaGraph

4.5 Viewing Column Statistics

KaleidaGraph provides 12 different statistics to help analyze data. These statistics are automatically calculated
for each column in the data window. If you need to calculate statistics across multiple columns of data, see
Section 5.3 for details on using Formula Entry to do this. The equations used to calculate the statistics are
listed in Section D.2.

To view statistics on a data set:

1. Select the data for which you want the statistics calculated. If you do not make a selection, the
statistics are calculated for each column in the data window.
2. Choose Functions > Statistics. The Statistics dialog, shown in Figure 4-10, is displayed. This dialog
has a split-screen display so that any two columns can be compared.
3. Click Copy to Clipboard if you want to paste this information into a data, plot, or layout window.
You can also select the Transposed check box so that when the data is copied, each statistic becomes
a column and the different variables become rows.
4. When you are finished, click OK.

Figure 4-10 Statistics dialog

62 4.5 Viewing Column Statistics

 Working with Data

4.6 Sorting Data

KaleidaGraph can perform ascending and descending sorts on a column, a range of columns, or any data
selection. Sorts can be applied to selections that contain any data format.

The sort commands are located in the Functions menu. The Ascending Sort command sorts the data from
low value to high value. The Descending Sort command sorts from high value to low value. Both of these
commands use the same dialog, shown in Figure 4-11. This dialog allows you to select which columns to
reorder during the sort. Any columns you select before entering this dialog are preselected for you.

Figure 4-11 Sort dialog

To sort a range of data:
1. Select the data to be sorted. The selection can contain a few cells, columns, or the entire data window
2. Choose either Ascending Sort or Descending Sort from the Functions menu. The Sort dialog
appears, with the names of any selected columns already highlighted. The first column in the
selection is automatically assigned as the 1st Key.
3. To perform a multi-level sort, click the name of the column to be used as the second sort key and
click the 2nd Key button. Repeat this step for the 3rd Key, if necessary.
4. Select all of the columns to be sorted.
• To select individual columns, press Shift, Ctrl (Windows), or (Macintosh) and click the
column name.
• To select a range of columns, drag with the mouse.
• To select every column in the data window, click All.

4.6 Sorting Data 63

KaleidaGraph

• To deselect a column, press Ctrl (Windows) or (Macintosh) and click the column name.
5. Click OK to perform the sort.

4.7 Transposing Data

You can exchange rows and columns in the data window. When you use the Transpose command, the
columns are converted to rows and the rows to columns. For example, if a selection contains four columns and
128 rows, it contains 128 columns and four rows after transposing the data.

To switch rows and columns:

1. Make a selection in the data window.
2. Choose Functions > Transpose. The selected data is transposed and displayed in the data window

Figure 4-12 shows a sample data window. Figure 4-13 shows the same data window after selecting all of the
columns and using the Transpose command. Notice that the data originally in column 0 is now in row 0 after
being transposed.

Figure 4-12 Before choosing Transpose

Figure 4-13 After choosing Transpose

Note: An error message is displayed if either of the following occurs:

• You attempt to transpose a selection containing text data.

64 4.7 Transposing Data

 Working with Data

• Your selection contains more than 1000 rows, because the data window is limited to a maximum of
1000 columns.

4.8 Masking Data

Masking data provides a way to leave data in the data window but not have it used in any calculations, curve
fits, or plots. Any data that is masked is covered with a red stipple pattern in the data window. Figure 4-14
shows a data window containing masked data cells.

Figure 4-14 Data window containing masked data

Data can be masked using any of the following: the Mask command (Functions menu), the Data Selection
tool from the toolbox, macros, and Formula Entry. Using Formula Entry to mask data is covered in
Section 5.4. The other methods are discussed below.

Note: The Unmask command (Functions menu) can be used to unmask selected data cells.

Mask Command
To mask data with the Mask command:
1. Select the cells to be masked.
2. Choose Functions > Mask. A stipple pattern appears in each of the masked data cells.

Data Selection Tool

You can use the Data Selection tool to select a portion of the plotted data for further plotting and analysis. The
data that is removed from the plot becomes masked in the data window. The use of this tool is discussed in
Section 8.4.

Note: Double-clicking this tool unmasks the data and returns the plot to its original state.

Macros
KaleidaGraph contains three default macros in the Macros menu that mask data upon execution. These
macros are Filter, Simplify, and Invert Mask. Refer to the online help for information on these macros.

4.8 Masking Data 65

KaleidaGraph

4.9 Binning Data

Binning data involves counting the number of data points that fall within a certain range. The binned data
distribution can be exported in any one of three formats for plotting or for annotating a plot. This section shows
how to create Histogram, Step, and Spike plots from the same set of binned data.

4.9.1 Creating a Sample Data Set

This example begins by creating a sample set of data. The data set in Figure 4-15 was created in the following
manner:
1. Create a new data window by choosing File > New.
2. Choose Macros > π Series.
3. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
4. Type c1 = c0 * ran() and click Run. The data window should be similar to Figure 4-15 when you
are finished.

Figure 4-15 Sample data set

4.9.2 Binning the Data

Now that the data has been created, it is ready to be binned.

To bin the data:

1. Select the columns containing the variables to be binned (in this case column 1).
2. Choose Functions > Bin Data. A dialog similar to Figure 4-16 appears.

66 4.9 Binning Data

 Working with Data

Figure 4-16 Bin Data dialog

3. Bin the variables by specifying the minimum and maximum values, number of bins, Y units, and
where to show the counts. If you make any changes to the minimum, maximum, or number of bins,
click Recalculate to update the count. Figure 4-16 shows the settings that were used to bin the data
for this example.
4. Select the appropriate Export Format for the type of plot to be created.
5. Click Copy to Clipboard.
6. Click OK.

4.9.3 Pasting the Results and Creating a Plot

Once the data is binned, it can be pasted into a new data window and plotted. To do this:
1. Choose File > New to create a blank data window.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. The results obtained from binning the data are placed into the data window.
Figure 4-17 shows binning results which were exported with a Histogram format.

4.9 Binning Data 67

KaleidaGraph

Figure 4-17 Results of binning the data

3. Choose the proper plot type from the Gallery menu.
• Histogram - For a single variable, choose Gallery > Bar > Column. For multiple
variables, choose Gallery > Bar > Stack Column.
• Step Plot - Choose Gallery > Linear > Line.
• Spike Plot - Choose Gallery > Linear > High/Low.
4. Select the variables to be plotted.
• Histogram - Select Histogram X for the X variable and one or more binned columns for the Y
variables.
• Step Plot - Select Step X for the X variable and one or more binned columns for the Y variables
• Spike Plot - Select Spike X for the X variable, plus a binned column and Zero for the Y
variables.
5. Click New Plot. The following three figures show the different plot types that can be created. All
three were generated from the same original data set, using the same settings in the Bin Data dialog.
The only difference was the Export Format.

68 4.9 Binning Data

 Working with Data

Binned Data B
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-1.5

-0.5
-1.25

-0.75

-0.25
0

1
-1

0.25
0.5
0.75

1.25
Figure 4-18 Histogram plot of binned data

Binned Data B
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2

Figure 4-19 Step plot of binned data

Binned Data B
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5

Figure 4-20 Spike plot of binned data

4.9 Binning Data 69

KaleidaGraph

4.10 Performing Student t-Tests

A t-test determines if the means of two data columns are significantly different by testing the hypothesis that
the means of the columns are equal. KaleidaGraph provides four types of tests:
• Single sample t-test - This test compares the mean of a single data column to a known or
hypothesized value.
• Paired t-test - This test compares the means of two related data columns.
• Unpaired t-test with equal variance - This test compares the means of two independent groups.
This test makes the assumption that the variances of the two groups are equal.
• Unpaired t-test with unequal variance - This test compares the means of two independent groups.
This test makes the assumption that the variances of the two groups are unequal.

4.10.1 Performing a Single Sample t-Test

Use this test when you want to compare the mean of a sample to a known or hypothesized value.

To perform a single sample t-test:

1. Choose Functions > Student t to display the Student t-Test dialog, shown in Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Student t-Test dialog

2. Click the single group button.
3. Select the column to be tested by either clicking the column name and pressing Group 1 or double-

70 4.10 Performing Student t-Tests

 Working with Data

clicking the column name.

4. Enter the known or hypothesized value in the Test Value field.
5. Click Calculate. The results of the test are displayed on the right side of the dialog.
6. To save the results, click Copy Results to Clipboard. You can then paste the results into a data, plot,
or layout window.
7. Click OK to return to the data window.

4.10.2 Performing a Paired t-Test

Use this test to compare means on the same or related subject over time or under different conditions. This test
requires columns of equal length. Any missing or extra values are skipped when running this test.

To perform a paired t-test:

1. Choose Functions > Student t to display the Student t-Test dialog.
2. Click the paired data button.
3. Select the columns to be tested by either clicking the column name and pressing the Group buttons
or double-clicking the column names.
4. Click the Correlation check box if you want KaleidaGraph to calculate the correlation and
correlation probability values.
5. Click Calculate. The results of the test are displayed on the right side of the dialog.
6. To save the results, click Copy Results to Clipboard. You can then paste the results into a data, plot,
or layout window.
7. Click OK to return to the data window.

4.10.3 Performing an Unpaired t-Test

Use this test to compare the means of two independent groups. This test can be performed on columns of
different length, since no relationship is assumed between the groups. As a special case, if Group 1 is assigned
a Text column, it is used as a grouping variable (for example, gender) to separate the data in the second column
into two groups.

To perform an unpaired t-test:

1. Choose Functions > Student t to display the Student t-Test dialog.
2. Click the unpaired data with equal variance or unpaired data with unequal variance button.
3. Select the columns to be tested by either clicking the column name and pressing the Group buttons
or double-clicking the column names. If you are using a Text column as a grouping variable, it must
be assigned to Group 1.
4. Click the F Test check box if you want KaleidaGraph to calculate the F and F probability values.
5. Click Calculate. The results of the test are displayed on the right side of the dialog.
6. To save the results, click Copy Results to Clipboard. You can then paste the results into a data, plot,
or layout window.
7. Click OK to return to the data window.

4.10 Performing Student t-Tests 71

KaleidaGraph

4.10.4 Interpreting t-Test Results

This section explains the values that are calculated when performing the various t-tests in KaleidaGraph. The
equations used to calculate these values are listed in Section D.3.
• mean difference - This value indicates the difference between the two means, or, in the case of the
single sample t-test, between the mean and the known value.
• degrees of freedom - This is a measure of the sample size.
• t value - The Student’s t statistic.
• t probability - This value determines if there is a statistically significant difference between the two
means. If this value is below a certain level (usually 0.05), the conclusion is that there is a difference
between the two group means.
• correlation - This value represents the linear correlation coefficient between the two groups. The
closer this value is to 1.0, the closer they are correlated.
• correlation probability - This value determines if there is a correlation between the two groups. A
small correlation probability (usually < 0.05) indicates that the two groups are significantly
correlated.
• F value - This value is the ratio of the larger variance over the smaller one.
• F probability - This value determines if the two groups have different variances. A small F
probability value (usually < 0.05) indicates that the two groups have significantly different variances

4.11 Executing Macros

Macros can be used to perform a wide variety of data operations, including those required for data analysis.
KaleidaGraph contains several default macros in the Macros menu. Some of these macros are used to create
data series and others are used to manipulate and analyze data. For more information about a particular macro
or the Macro Calculator, refer to the online help. There is also a PDF file on the CD-ROM that explains how
to write macros and provides some example macros.

To execute a macro:
1. Open the data window to be operated on by the macro. A sample data set is shown in Figure 4-22.

72 4.11 Executing Macros

 Working with Data

Figure 4-22 Sample data window

2. Choose a macro from the Macros menu. The Integrate - Area macro is used for this example.
Choosing a macro from the menu automatically causes it to be executed. Some macros may prompt
for specific information during execution. The following dialogs are displayed during execution of
the Integrate - Area macro.

Figure 4-23 First input dialog

Figure 4-24 Second input dialog

4.11 Executing Macros 73

KaleidaGraph

3. Type the appropriate values into any dialogs that appear. Click OK to continue execution or click
Cancel to stop the macro. Figure 4-25 shows the results of executing the Integrate - Area macro.

Figure 4-25 Macro results

4.12 Exporting Data

KaleidaGraph provides two methods for exporting data files. You can save the data file to disk (in either binary
or text format) or you can print the data file.

4.12.1 Saving Data

To save the data to disk, choose Save Data or Save Data As from the File menu when the data window is
active. If the Save Data command is used on a window that has not been saved before, a Save dialog appears,
allowing you to specify the location and file name.

The Save Data and Save Data As commands always save the data in binary format, because this is
considerably faster and more compact than text format. Binary files can only be read by KaleidaGraph.

If text format is desired, choose File > Export > Tab-Delimited Text. A Save dialog appears, allowing you
to specify the location and file name for the text file.

4.12.2 Printing Data

To print the data set, choose File > Print Data. The Print dialog and its options depend on the printer and
operating system.

If nothing is selected in the data window, KaleidaGraph prints the entire data set. A maximum of 15 columns
can be printed on each page. Decreasing the width of the columns and scaling the output does not increase this
limit.

74 4.12 Exporting Data

 Working with Data

4.13 Linking Data via Dynamic Data Exchange

Note: This section only pertains to the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

KaleidaGraph supports Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) for inserting data from a source document created in
another program into the data window. This is accomplished by creating a link to the data in the source
document. KaleidaGraph displays a copy of the linked data, but the actual data is stored in the source file. The
linked data is updated whenever the original data is modified in the source document.

4.13.1 Creating a Data Link

There are two methods available for creating a data link. The first is to copy the data from another program
and paste it into KaleidaGraph using the Paste Link command. The second method involves using the Create
Link command to manually create a link to data in a source document.

When trying to create data links, please be aware of the following:

• KaleidaGraph acts only as a DDE client, not a server.
• To create data links, the source program must support DDE.
• Before you can establish a link, the source document must be saved to disk.

Copying and Pasting

To link data by copying and pasting:
1. Start by saving the source document to disk.
2. Select and copy the range of data you want linked to KaleidaGraph.
3. Switch to KaleidaGraph and click the cell where you want to place the first data value.
4. Choose Edit > Paste Link.

The linked data appears in the data window. A dark border surrounds the data, indicating that it is linked. To
remove the border, choose Edit > Hide Borders.

Manually Creating a Link

To manually create a link:
1. Start by saving the source document to disk.
2. In KaleidaGraph, click the cell where you want to place the first data value.
3. Choose Edit > Create Link. A dialog similar to Figure 4-26 is displayed.

4.13 Linking Data via Dynamic Data Exchange 75

KaleidaGraph

Figure 4-26 Create DDE Link dialog

4. Type the program, topic, and item in the fields provided. Figure 4-26 shows an example of what this
dialog might look like when creating a link to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
5. Click OK to create a link to the data.

The linked data appears in the data window. A dark border surrounds the data, indicating that it is linked. To
remove the border, choose Edit > Hide Borders.

4.13.2 Updating Linked Data

The Link Options command (Edit menu) determines whether the linked data is updated automatically or
manually. By default, new links are updated automatically.
• Automatic updates - KaleidaGraph updates the linked data when you open a saved data or plot file
that contains a link. If the KaleidaGraph file is already open, the linked data is updated as soon as the
source document is changed.
• Manual updates - KaleidaGraph only updates the linked data when you click Get Update Now in
the Link Options dialog.
Note: Any changes made to the linked data are lost if the original data is modified. If you need to change the
data, it is best to make changes directly in the source file.

4.13.3 Canceling a DDE Link

You can cancel a data link if you no longer want to receive updates. The data remains in the data window, but
the border is removed.

To cancel a DDE link:

1. Choose Edit > Link Options.
2. Click Cancel DDE Link to stop receiving updates. A dialog verifies that you want to cancel the link
3. Click OK to return to the data window.

76 4.13 Linking Data via Dynamic Data Exchange

 Working with Data

4.14 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Data Window

Note: This section only pertains to the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph.

4.14.1 Creating a Publisher

When you create a publisher, an edition is created which contains a copy of the data. Editions are separate files
that are saved to disk. When changes are made in the publisher, the changes are automatically reflected in the
edition and any documents subscribing to the edition. You can specify how often changes are sent from the
publisher to the edition and how often subscribers receive changes from the edition.

To create a publisher from the data window:

1. Select the data to be published in the data window.
2. Choose Edit > Create Publisher. The dialog in Figure 4-27 is displayed.

Figure 4-27 Create Publisher dialog

3. Specify where to store the edition.
4. Enter a name for the edition in the Name of new edition field.
5. Click Publish.

The published data is surrounded by a dark border in the data window. This border indicates that the data is
published. To remove the border, choose Edit > Hide Borders.

A new edition is created every time you create a publisher. If several sections of the same file are published,
each publisher has a separate edition.

4.14.2 Updating a Publisher

Once the publisher and edition are created, the Publisher Options command (Edit menu) controls how often
changes made to the publisher are sent to the edition. The default is to update the edition as soon as changes
to the publisher are saved. Whenever a new edition is sent, the previous copy of the edition is replaced with
the latest version from the publisher.

4.14 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Data Window 77

KaleidaGraph

4.14.3 Canceling a Publisher

You can cancel the publisher if you no longer want to publish the edition in your document. The contents of
the publisher remain, but the border is removed and the edition is no longer updated.

To cancel a publisher:
1. Click any portion of the published edition.
2. Choose Edit > Publisher Options.
3. Click Cancel Publisher to stop updating the edition. A dialog verifies that you want to remove the
publisher.
4. Click OK to return to the data window.

4.14.4 Subscribing to an Edition

Use the Subscribe To command (Edit menu) to insert a copy of an edition into your document. This copy is
called a subscriber. Once the subscriber is inserted into the document, any changes received by the edition are
sent to the subscriber.

To subscribe to an edition:
1. Create a new data window or select one of the cells in the active data window.
2. Choose Edit > Subscribe To. The dialog in Figure 4-28 is displayed.

Figure 4-28 Subscribe To dialog

3. From the list of files, select the name of a published edition.
4. Click Subscribe.

The subscribed edition appears in the data window. A dark border surrounds the data, indicating that it is a
subscriber. To remove the border, choose Edit > Hide Borders.

Note: Any changes made to the data in a subscriber are lost when the next edition is received. If you need to
change the data, it is best to make changes directly in the publisher.

78 4.14 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Data Window

 Working with Data

4.14.5 Updating a Subscriber

Once you have subscribed to an edition, the Subscriber Options command (Edit menu) controls how often
updates to the edition are made. By default, the subscriber is updated when the edition receives new
information from the publisher. Whenever a new edition is sent, the previous copy of the subscriber is replaced
with the latest version of the edition.

4.14.6 Canceling a Subscriber

You can cancel the subscriber if you no longer want to receive updates from the edition. The contents of the
subscriber remain, but the border is removed.

To cancel a subscriber:
1. Click any portion of the subscriber.
2. Choose Edit > Subscriber Options.
3. Click Cancel Subscriber to stop receiving updates from the edition. A dialog verifies that you want
to remove the subscriber.
4. Click OK to return to the data window.

4.14 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Data Window 79

KaleidaGraph

80 4.14 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Data Window

Working with Formula Entry

Chapter 5

The Formula Entry window is a very powerful tool for data analysis. Using this window, you can apply a wide
range of algebraic functions to your data. It also provides a formula script feature to help automate certain
functions in the program.

This chapter explains how to:

• Enter and execute formulas.
• Reference columns, cells, and memory locations in a formula.
• Create multi-line formulas.
• Calculate statistics.
• Linearly interpolate data.
• Obtain values from a curve fit.
• Create shorthand references for constants, variables, and functions in the library.
• Automate the process of creating plots using formula scripts.

5.1 Formula Entry Basics

This section provides the basic information you need to start working with the Formula Entry window. In
addition to this section, you may also want to refer to Section 2.5.2, which guides you through the process of
executing several formulas.

5.1 Formula Entry Basics 81

KaleidaGraph

5.1.1 Formula Entry Window

Choose Windows > Formula Entry to display the window in Figure 5-1. Use the Formula Entry window to
enter formulas that generate and manipulate data in the active data window. The various features of the
Formula Entry window are discussed below.

1
5

2
6

3 7
4
Figure 5-1 Formula Entry window
1. Formula Entry Menu Bar
These menus contain all of the functions that are available in Formula Entry. The commands in these
menus are described in Section 5.9.
2. Text Field
Formulas are entered in this area of the window.
3. Posted Note
This is an internal text editor where multiple functions can be strung together. See Section 5.2 for more
information on multi-line formulas.
4. Function Buttons
Using these buttons, you can assign frequently used formulas to the first eight function keys of your
keyboard. This topic is discussed in Section 5.1.6.
5. Degrees/Radians Buttons
These buttons determine whether the results of trigonometric functions are in degrees or radians.
6. Help...
Click this button to display the Help dialog.
7. Run
This button is used to execute the current formula. Formulas can also be executed by typing Enter
(Windows) or Return (Macintosh). If a data window is not open, this button is unavailable.

5.1.2 Formula Entry Menus

The menus in Formula Entry contain all of the commands and operators that are available for use. You have
the option of choosing the commands from the menu or typing them into the window. Each of the commands
is discussed in detail in Section 5.9.

Operators Menu
The operators available within Formula Entry are listed below. Grouped items have the same precedence.

82 5.1 Formula Entry Basics

 Working with Formula Entry

! factorial
^ power
* multiply
/ divide
% modulo
+ add
– subtract
< less than
<= less than or equal to
> greater than
>= greater than or equal to
== equal to (used for comparisons)
!= not equal to
&& logical AND
|| logical OR
?: conditional
() left and right parentheses
= equal (used to store results)
[] matrix operator

Functions Menu
The Functions menu contains general math functions. Examples of these commands include trigonometric
functions (sine, cosine, and tangent), square root, and absolute value.

Statistics Menu
The Statistics menu contains the commands that are used to calculate statistics on data. Section 5.3 explains
how to calculate statistics using these commands. The equations used to calculate these statistics are located
in Section D.2.

Curve Fits Menu

The Curve Fits menu contains commands that can be used to place curve fit values into the data window. This
allows you to find curve fit values at specific points that were not originally plotted. The procedure for doing
this is discussed in Section 5.6.

Special Menu
The Special menu contains commands that use either a Boolean expression or a text string as part of their
definition.

5.1 Formula Entry Basics 83

KaleidaGraph

Library Menu
The Library menu displays all of the definitions in the current library. If the library is empty, this menu is
also empty. For more information on the library, see Section 5.8.

5.1.3 Formula Structure

A formula calculates new values from existing data in the data window. A formula can be a simple
mathematical operation, such as multiplying a column by a constant, or a more complex operation, such as
calculating the root mean square of a specific group of data.

Formulas are created using a combination of column references, operators, and functions. Memory locations
and constants can also be used in a formula. Formulas are usually constructed with the destination to the left
of the equal sign (=) and the calculation to the right of the equal sign. One exception is the name function,
which specifies the output column as one of the parameters.

The results of a formula can be stored in another column, a cell, or a memory register. If a destination is not
specified, the results are displayed in a dialog similar to Figure 5-2. This is useful for formulas that result in a
single value, such as the commands located in the Statistics menu.

Figure 5-2 Result dialog

5.1.4 Referencing Columns, Cells, and Memory Registers

Column numbers range from 0 to 999 and need to be preceded by a c when used in a formula (c0, c1, and so
on). Column numbers are displayed in a box at the top of the column and are referenced to the start of any data
selection. Please note that when a selection is made in the data window, the first column in the selection
becomes column 0.

Calculations involving columns are performed on a row-by-row basis. If two or more columns are used in a
calculation, corresponding cells in the same row are used to determine the results. If empty or masked cells
are encountered during the calculation, the corresponding cell in the destination column is empty.

Individual cells can be referenced in a formula using the cell function. The syntax of this function is
cell(row#, col#). Using this function, it is possible to store and retrieve data anywhere in the data window.

Memory registers range from 0 to 99 and need to be preceded by an m when used in a formula (m0, m1, and
so on). Memory registers are useful in calculations that result in a single value. The value can be stored in a
memory register and used at a later time in other calculations.

84 5.1 Formula Entry Basics

 Working with Formula Entry

Some example formulas are shown below:

Example Formulas

c1 = c0/1000 cell(0,5) = cell(0,0) – 11

c5 = (c1+c2) * (c3–c4) m1 = npts(c0)
cell(0,2) = mean(c1) m10 = cell(0,0)

5.1.5 Entering and Executing a Formula

This section provides the general instructions for entering and executing a formula in the Formula Entry
window. Section 2.5.2 provides a detailed example of running several formulas and viewing their effect on the
data window.

To enter and execute a formula:

1. Open the data window to be operated on by the formula.
2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
3. Enter the formula into the text field of Formula Entry. You can either type the operators and
functions or choose them from the appropriate menus in the Formula Entry window.
4. Multiple formulas can be entered by separating each formula with a semicolon. The Posted Note can
also be used to enter multiple formulas. This topic is covered in Section 5.2.
5. Click Run to execute the formula.

Note: The results of a formula are based on the data at the time the formula is executed. Changing the data
does not cause the results to automatically recalculate. To update the results, the formula must be
executed again.

5.1.6 Assigning Formulas to Function Buttons

You can store formulas in any of the eight function buttons in Formula Entry. Any formulas that are assigned
to these buttons are saved in the Macros file. It is recommended that you store frequently-used formulas in
F2–F8 and leave F1 for entering general formulas that do not need to be saved.

To assign a formula to a particular function button:

1. Select the appropriate function button in Formula Entry using one of the following methods:
• Click the button in the Formula Entry window.
• Press the corresponding function key on the keyboard.
• Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or (Macintosh) and press the number of the function button you
want to select.
2. Enter the formula into the text field of Formula Entry.

5.1 Formula Entry Basics 85

KaleidaGraph

5.2 Multi-Line Formulas

With the use of the Posted Note in Formula Entry, you can string formulas together and have them executed
sequentially. Each formula should be entered on a separate line and end with a semicolon. This section
provides the general instructions for entering and executing a multi-line formula. Section 2.5.2 provides a
detailed example of executing a multi-line formula and viewing its effect on the data window.

To enter and execute a multi-line formula:

1. Open the data window to be operated on by the formula.
2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
3. Click the Posted Note button ( ) to display the text editor.
4. Enter the individual formulas into the Posted Note. Figure 5-3 shows a multi-line formula entered in
the text editor. Notice that each formula is entered on a separate line and is terminated by a
semicolon.

Figure 5-3 Posted Note with formula entered

5. When you are finished entering the formulas, choose File > Exit to leave the editor. The Formula
Entry window appears, displaying the message shown in Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Formula Entry after exiting the Posted Note

6. Click Run to execute the formulas in the Posted Note.

86 5.2 Multi-Line Formulas

 Working with Formula Entry

5.2.1 Adding Comments

Comments can be added to a multi-line formula. Comments are used to make the formula more readable by
describing the purpose of the program and the use of each individual formula.

Comments can be added anywhere in the Posted Note with the use of a semicolon. Anything after the
semicolon to the first occurrence of a carriage return is treated as a comment. The following lines from the
multi-line formula in Figure 5-3 have had comments added.
c0 = (–0.5 + ran()) * 10; Fill c0 with random numbers between –5 and 5.
macro("Invert Mask"); Execute the Invert Mask macro from the Macros menu.
name("Values", c0); Change the title of c0 to "Values."

5.2.2 Saving Multi-Line Formulas

Multi-line formulas can be saved as a text file by choosing File > Save As in the Posted Note window. This
text file can be reopened at a later time by clicking the Posted Note button in Formula Entry and choosing
File > Open.

5.3 Calculating Statistics with Formula Entry

KaleidaGraph provides 12 commands in the Statistics menu to help you analyze data. The statistics can be
calculated on individual columns or a specific range of data. The equations used to calculate the statistics are
listed in Section D.2.

5.3.1 Individual Column Statistics

Statistics are calculated on individual columns by entering the column number within the statistics function.
This function results in a single data value, which can be displayed in a dialog or stored in a column, cell, or
memory register. The following table shows some example formulas that calculate statistics on individual
columns.

Formula Result
mean(c12) Finds the mean of column 12 and displays the result in a dialog.
c4 = stderr(c3) Determines the standard error for column 3 and places the result in
column 4.
cell(0,5) = std(c15) Finds the standard deviation of column 15 and stores the result in row
0 of column 5.
m2 = cmin(c11) Determines the minimum value in column 11 and stores the result in
memory register 2.

5.3 Calculating Statistics with Formula Entry 87

KaleidaGraph

5.3.2 Statistics on a Specific Block of Data

Statistics can also be calculated on a range of data. This is accomplished using the statistics commands and
the matrix operator, [ ]. This operator enables you to define a range of rows and columns (around the current
row or column index) to use in the calculation. The syntax for the matrix operator is:

[starting row:ending row, starting column:ending column]

It is not necessary to enter starting and ending values if you want to use all of the rows or columns in the
calculation. If the starting and ending values are missing, the entire range of rows or columns is used to
determine the result.

For example:
[,] Operate on the entire data window.
[ , 1:3] Operate on all rows in columns 1 through 3.
[0:25, ] Operate on rows 0 through 25 in all columns.

The following table shows some examples of statistics commands using the matrix operator. Each of these
formulas display the results in a dialog.

Formula Result

stderr([ , ]) Calculates the standard error for the entire data window.
mean([ , 1:1]) Finds the mean for all rows in column 1.
std([0:10, ]) Calculates the standard deviation for rows 0 through 10 in all
columns.
median([0:100, 3:5]) Calculates the median for the data in rows 0 through 100 in columns
3 through 5.
std([–10:10, 0:0]) Finds the standard deviation for a window of data from –10 rows to
+10 rows from the highlighted row in column 0.
npts([0:1000, –3:3]) Finds the number of points in rows 0 through 1000 in a window of
data from –3 columns to +3 columns from the highlighted column.

5.3.3 Calculating Statistics on a Row-by-Row Basis

To calculate statistics on a row-by-row basis, enter zero for both the starting and ending row. For example, the
formula c5 = mean([0:0, 1:4]) calculates the mean for each individual row in columns 1 through 4 and stores
the results in column 5.

88 5.3 Calculating Statistics with Formula Entry

 Working with Formula Entry

5.4 Masking Data with Formula Entry

KaleidaGraph supports two functions (mask and filter) that can be used to mask data via a formula. An
unmask function is also provided to return the data to normal. These commands are defined in Section 5.9.
Some example uses of these commands are listed below.

Note: For more information on masking and unmasking data, refer to Section 4.8.

Formula Result

mask(c0 < 0, c0) Masks any negative values in c0.

mask(c1 < c2, c2) Masks any cells in c2 whose value is greater than the corresponding
cell in c1.
filter(–1, 1, c0) Masks all cells in c0 that are less than –1 or greater than 1.
unmask(c0 > 0, c3) Unmasks any cells in c3 if the corresponding value in c0 is positive.

5.5 Interpolating Data

KaleidaGraph is able to perform linear interpolation through the use of the table function in Formula Entry.
The table command performs a linear approximation of a number (x) based on the data in two columns. The
syntax for this command is table(x, x col#, y col#), such that for a given x value, this function returns an
estimate for y.

Figure 5-5 shows an example use of the table function. The first two columns contain X-Y data points. Column
2 contains a new set of X values for which you want to find the corresponding Y values. The Y values in
column 3 were found by executing the formula c3=table(c2, c0, c1) in Formula Entry.

Figure 5-5 Sample data window

5.4 Masking Data with Formula Entry 89

KaleidaGraph

5.6 Obtaining Values from a Curve Fit

The Curve Fits menu in Formula Entry contains commands that can be used to analyze the values along a
fitted curve. These commands enable you to find values at any point on the curve, as well as calculate the
residual error between the fitted curve and the original data.

Before you can get values from a curve fit, you must first create a plot and apply a curve fit to the data.
Otherwise, an error message is displayed when you try to run the formula.

Note: It is possible to get the curve fit values and residual values into the data window without using Formula
Entry. See Section 9.6.3 for more information on exporting the results of a curve fit into the data
window.

The following sections show how to get values from a curve fit into the data window. Figure 5-6 shows a plot
with a Polynomial curve fit applied (represented by the dashed line) which will be used as an example.

Sinc(5x)

1 8 9
Y = M0 + M1*x + ... M8*x + M9*x
0.8 M0 0.74336
0.6 M1 -2.2635e-06
M2 -1.5172
0.4
M3 5.393e-06
0.2 M4 0.57377
M5 -2.3555e-06
0
R 0.89315
-0.2

-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5

Figure 5-6 Sample plot with Polynomial fit applied

5.6.1 Getting Curve Fit Values into the Data Window

The following steps explain how to use Formula Entry to obtain values from the curve fit at specific X
locations. The X positions can be the original column of X values, a new column of values, or a single point
along the X axis.

Note: Unless the curve fit is extrapolated to the axis limits (see Section 9.8.1), the results are only accurate
if the X values lie within the original range of the data. If the values fall outside the data range, the
results are linearly interpolated.

To calculate values from a curve fit:

1. Activate the data window that contains the fitted variables. Figure 5-7 shows a portion of the data
used to create the sample plot.

90 5.6 Obtaining Values from a Curve Fit

 Working with Formula Entry

Figure 5-7 Data used to create sample plot

2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
3. Enter the formula into the window. Figure 5-8 shows the formula for this example. The formula
should be of the form z = fit(x,y), where:

z is the destination column.

x is either a single data value or a column containing X values.
y is the column that had the curve fit applied.
fit is replaced by the appropriate command from the Curve Fits menu of Formula Entry.

Figure 5-8 Curve fit function entered in Formula Entry

4. Click Run to execute the formula. The destination column is filled with the values of the curve fit
at the specified X values. Figure 5-9 shows the resulting data window, with the curve fit values in
the last column (column 2).

5.6 Obtaining Values from a Curve Fit 91

KaleidaGraph

Figure 5-9 Data window containing curve fit values

Note: This method uses the curve fit points originally calculated when the fit was applied. You may want to
increase the number of calculated points to make the values from the fit more accurate. See
Section 9.8.3 for instructions on increasing the number of curve fit points.

5.6.2 Using the Calculated Equation to Find Values

The most accurate method of getting values from a fit is to use the original equation and the parameters
calculated by KaleidaGraph. This is not possible when a Smooth, Weighted, Cubic Spline, or Interpolate curve
fit is applied to the data, because these curve fits do not result in an equation.

To calculate values using the curve fit’s equation:

1. Copy the curve fit coefficients to the Calculator. Refer to Section 9.6.3 if you are unsure of how to
do this. If you applied a General curve fit, you can skip this step because the parameters are
automatically stored in the Calculator.
2. Activate the data window that contains the fitted variables. Figure 5-10 shows the original data with
a column containing new X values (column 2).

Figure 5-10 Data window containing new X values

92 5.6 Obtaining Values from a Curve Fit

 Working with Formula Entry

3. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.

4. Enter your formula into the window. Figure 5-11 shows the formula used to obtain values from a
curve fit at designated points, where:

c3 is the destination column for the curve fit values.

c2 is the column containing the new X values.
m0–m5 are the curve fit coefficients previously copied to the Calculator.

Figure 5-11 Using the curve fit equation to calculate values

5. Click Run to execute the formula. The destination column is filled with the values of the curve fit
at the specified X values. Figure 5-12 shows the resulting data window, with the curve fit values in
the last column (column 3).

Figure 5-12 Data window containing curve fit values

Note: This method can similarly be used to calculate the X value when the Y value on the fit is known. You
need to rearrange the formula so that it solves for X instead of Y.

5.7 Performing Date and Time Calculations

It is possible to perform calculations on columns containing dates and times. Internally, dates are stored as the
total number of seconds since Jan. 1, 1904 and times are stored as a relative number of seconds. This allows
you to perform calculations on date and time data just as you would with any other kind of data. The easiest
way to illustrate this is to use the Column Format command (Data menu) to change the format of a column
containing dates or times to the Double format. The column now shows the total number of seconds.

5.7 Performing Date and Time Calculations 93

KaleidaGraph

Note: You do not have to change the format of the column before using it in a calculation. This is because
KaleidaGraph automatically stores the values as a total number of seconds.

5.8 Using the Library

KaleidaGraph provides a library which can be used to define constants, variables, and functions for use in
Formula Entry, the Function plot, and the General curve fit. Using the library, you can create shorthand
references to values and functions that you use on a regular basis.

5.8.1 Library Basics

The library is displayed by choosing either Macros > Library or Curve Fits > General > Library. The
current library is displayed in a text editor. Once you are in the editor, you can modify the current library, open
a saved library, or create a new library.

The default library provided with KaleidaGraph contains a number of definitions for variables, constants, math
functions, and curve fit equations. The definitions are grouped together to make it easier to locate a particular
function, but this is not a requirement. You can place the definitions in any order you choose.

One of the main reasons for using the library is to form aliases or shorthand references for functions, variables,
and constants. This is particularly useful for defining sections of a formula that exceed the 256 character limit
in the Formula Entry, Function plot, and General curve fit windows.

5.8.2 Creating Library Definitions

Any of the definitions in the library can be called from Formula Entry, the Function plot, or the General curve
fit. KaleidaGraph searches the current library for any substitutions and makes them before proceeding. Please
note that KaleidaGraph substitutes the definition, so you may want to enclose the definition with parentheses
to maintain the proper syntax after the substitution takes place.

Use the same syntax shown in the default library to create your own definitions. All of the library definitions
are terminated with a semicolon. Anything following the semicolon is treated as a comment, unless the
semicolon is preceded by a backslash (\). The purpose of the backslash is to treat the data after the semicolon
as a continuation of the function. This is normally used to set up initial conditions when defining curve fit
equations.

When creating your shorthand references, it is important to note that the library is not case sensitive. If you
had two functions named S1() and s1(), either one could be substituted by KaleidaGraph.

5.8.3 Creating a Custom Library

The library is saved as part of the Macros file. To create a custom library, choose Macros > Library and save
the default library to disk (using the Save As command in the editor). Then, choose File > New to start a new
library. Use the same syntax shown for the default library. When completed, save the new library to disk.

KaleidaGraph references whichever library is currently open. To reference a new library, use the Open
command in the editor to locate and load the library you want to use. If you want to tie a particular library to
a macros file, use the File > Export > Macros command to save the macros file. The current library becomes
the default library for that particular macros file.

94 5.8 Using the Library

 Working with Formula Entry

5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax

This section describes each of the operators and functions available in the Formula Entry menus. Examples
are provided for each of the items.

5.9.1 Operators Menu

( ) - The parentheses are used with almost every formula to enclose the variable being used in the calculation.
They are also used to set the priority order for calculations.
Example: c3 = (cos(c2) * sin(c1)) + ((2 * tan(c0)) / sqrt(pi))
^ - This operator raises the preceding value to the specified power.
Examples: 5^2, c3 = c1^(1/c0)
* - This operator multiplies two values together.
Examples: 23 * m0, c3 = .9087 * c5
/ - This operator is used for division.
Examples: c4 = c0 / 12.234, c12 = (c8 + c5) / c2
+ - This operator is used for addition.
Examples: c3 = (c2 + c1 + c0) / 3, c12 = 198 + c10
– - This operator is used for subtraction.
Examples: c9 = c8 – c6, c19 = (c12 – c3) / c5
% - This operator performs the mod function.
Examples: c9 = c8 % 4, c13 = c12 % c3
! - This operator calculates the factorial of a number.
Examples: 7!, c13 = c10!
< - This operator compares two values to see if one is less than the other.
Examples: mask(c1 < 3, c1), unmask(c2 < –12, c3)
<= - This operator compares two values to see if one is less than or equal to the other.
Examples: mask(c4 <= c5, c6), unmask(c2 <= 23, c12)
> - This operator compares two values to see if one is greater than the other.
Examples: mask(c1>1, c0), unmask(c4 > c3), c5)
>= - This operator compares two values to see if one is greater than or equal to the other.
Examples: mask(c12 >= 12.34, c12), unmask(c11 >= –5, c11)

5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax 95

KaleidaGraph

== - This operator compares two values to see if they are equal to each other.
Examples: mask(c1 == 4, c1), unmask(c3 == c2, c1)
!= - This operator compares two values to see if they are unequal.
Examples: mask(c2 != c4, c2), unmask(c3 != 2, c3)
&& - This operator performs a logical and on two Boolean expressions. The result of both expressions must
be true (non-zero) for the logical and to be true.
Examples: c3 = (c0>1 && c0<15) ? c0 : 0.5, c1 = (c2>3 && c2<11) ? c2 : 0
|| - This operator performs a logical or on two Boolean expressions. The result of one expression must be true
(non-zero) for the logical or to be true.
Examples: c1 = (c2>1 || c3>1) ? c1 : c4, c2 = (c1<0 || c1 == 0.5) ? 0 : c1
?: - This operator performs a conditional test on a Boolean expression. This operator can be expressed in one
of two ways:
• if (Boolean) expression 1 else expression 2
• (Boolean) ? expression 1 : expression 2
If the result of the Boolean is true (non-zero), return expression 1; if it is false, return expression 2.
Examples: c9 = (c2>.5 || c3>.1) ? c11 : c4, c1 = (c2>1 && c2<10) ? c2 : 0.1
= - This operator is used to place the result of a calculation into a column, cell, or memory location.
Examples: m0 = 12 * m1, c1 = sqrt(c0), c2 = cos(c0), cell(0,5) = cmin(c0)
[ ] - The matrix operator is used to specify a range of data for use in a statistical calculation. The syntax of the
operator is: [starting row:ending row, starting column:ending column].
It is not necessary to enter starting and ending values to use all of the rows or columns in the calculation. If
the starting and ending values are missing, the entire range of rows or columns is used to determine the result
Examples: cmax([ 0:23, 3:10]), c18 = median([ , 12:14])

5.9.2 Functions Menu

abs(x) - Determines the absolute value of a number.
Examples: abs(–5), abs(m3), c3 = abs(c2)
cell(row#, col#) - Gets or sets the value of a specific cell.
Example: cell(0, 2) = 5.5 * cell(1, 3), cell(10, 13) = sqrt(cell(15, 11))
cos(x) - Determines the cosine of a number. The number is in radians or degrees, based on the setting in the
Formula Entry window.
Examples: cos(30), cos(m8), c4 = cos(c2)
diff(x) - Calculates the difference between each value and the one that follows it.
Examples: c5 = diff(c2), c11 = diff(c10)

96 5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax

 Working with Formula Entry

erf(x) - Calculates the error function of a value. This function has the following limiting values: erf(0) = 0,
erf(∞) = 1, and erf(–x) = –erf(x).
Examples: erf(2), c10 = erf(c9)
erfc(x) - Calculates the complementary error function of a value. This function has the following limiting
values: erfc(0) = 1, erfc(∞) = 0, and erfc(–x) = 2–erfc(x).
Examples: erfc(.5), c20 = erfc(c19)
exp(x) - Calculates the value of e (2.7182...) raised to a power.
Examples: exp(3), exp(m1), c10 = exp(c2)
fract(x) - Returns the fractional portion of a number.
Examples: fract(2.83), c12 = fract(c9)
index() - Returns the current row number (starting at 0).
Example: c5 = index() * .5, c11 = index() – 64
inorm(x) - Determines the inverse of the normal distribution for a number between zero and 100%.
Examples: inorm(25), inorm(m2), c10 = inorm(c9)
int(x) - Returns the integer portion of a number.
Examples: int(2.83), c12 = int(c9)
invcos(x) - Determines the inverse cosine of a number. The number is in radians or degrees, based on the
setting in the Formula Entry window.
Examples: invcos(.5), invcos(m3), c6 = invcos(c5)
invsin(x) - Determines the inverse sine of a number. The number is in radians or degrees, based on the setting
in the Formula Entry window.
Examples: invsin(.219), invsin(m0), c15 = invsin(c10)
invtan(x) - Determines the inverse tangent of a number. The number is in radians or degrees, based on the
setting in the Formula Entry window.
Examples: invtan(1), invtan(m2), c9 = invtan(c8)
ln(x) - Calculates the natural logarithm (base e) of a number.
Examples: ln(8), ln(m5), c12 = ln(c9)
log(x) - Calculates the common logarithm (base 10) of a number.
Examples: log(20), log(m10), c18 = log(c15)
norm(x) - Determines the normal distribution of a number between zero and 100%.
Examples: norm(23), norm(m5), c7 = norm(c5)

5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax 97

KaleidaGraph

pi - Represents the value of π (3.1415926...).

Example: c10 = pi * c9, c11 = 3 * pi * c9
ran() - Generates a random number between zero and one.
Examples: c15 = ran(), c9 = c8 * ran()
rsum(col#) - Computes the running sum of a column.
Example: c3 = rsum(c2), c10 = rsum(c9)
sin(x) - Determines the sine of a number. The number is in radians or degrees, based on the setting in the
Formula Entry window.
Examples: sin(45), sin(m6), c11 = sin(c10)
sqrt(x) - Calculates the square root of a number.
Examples: sqrt(192), sqrt(m9), c6 = sqrt(c5)
table(x, x col#, y col#) - The table command performs a linear approximation of a number (x) based on the
data in two columns. The result is that for a given x, this function returns an estimate for y. The order of the
columns determines what value is returned. This function has the following constraints:
• You cannot have masked or empty cells in either the x col# or y col#.
• y col# = f(x col#) may only describe a single value function.
• It does not operate on a subset of rows within a column.
Examples: table(2.5, c0, c1), c4 = table(c3, c0, c1)
tan(x) - Determines the tangent of a number. The number is in radians or degrees, based on the setting in the
Formula Entry window.
Examples: tan(68), tan(m10), c5 = tan(c4)

5.9.3 Statistics Menu

cmin(x) - Determines the minimum value within the specified data.
Examples: cmin(c5), cmin([ , 0:10]), c2 = cmin([ , ])
cmax(x) - Determines the maximum value within the specified data.
Examples: cmax(c15), cmax([ 0:23, 3:10]), c13 = cmax([ , 0:12])
csum(x) - Calculates the sum of the data values.
Examples: csum(c9), csum([ , 0:3]), c12 = csum([0:50, 3:8])
kurtosis(x) - Calculates the kurtosis of the specified data.
Examples: kurtosis(c12), kurtosis([0:5, ]), c5 = kurtosis([0:25, 0:1])
mean(x) - Calculates the mean of the data.
Examples: mean(c0), mean([ , 2:3]), c11 = mean([ , ])

98 5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax

 Working with Formula Entry

median(x) - Calculates the median of the data range.

Examples: median(c3), median([2:10, 0:1]), c17 = median([ , 12:14])
npts(x) - Determines the number of points within the specified data range.
Examples: npts(c1), npts([ , 0:5]), c10 = npts([ , ])
rms(x) - Calculates the RMS (root mean square) of the data range.
Examples: rms(c3), rms([ , 1:1]), c5 = rms([12:21, ])
skew(x) - Calculates the skewness of the data range.
Examples: skew(c15), skew([ , 3:10]), c13 = skew([–10:10, 2:2])
std(x) - Calculates the standard deviation of the data range.
Examples: std(c10), std([12:120, ]), c3 = std([ , ])
stderr(x) - Calculates the standard error of the data.
Examples: stderr(c4), stderr([–5:5, 15:19]), c3 = stderr([ , ])
var(x) - Calculates the variance of the specified data range.
Examples: var(c6), var([0:25, ]), c3 = var([ , ])

5.9.4 Curve Fits Menu

expr(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has an Exponential curve fit applied, this function
determines the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: expr(105, c10), c11 = expr(c8,c9)
gen(" ", x, col#) - Given the name of a General curve fit, an x value, and a column that has the fit applied, this
function determines the value at the x point. If no name is given, the first General fit that is found in the column
is used.
Examples: gen("fit1", 22, c1), c5 = gen(c0, c1), c11 = ("gaussian", c8, c9)
interp(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has an Interpolate curve fit applied, this function
determines the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: interp(11.95, c2), c19 = interp(c15, c18)
lin(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Linear curve fit applied, this function determines the
value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: lin(–12.5, c1), c10 = lin(c9, c5)
logr(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Logarithmic curve fit applied, this function determines
the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: logr(1300, c8), c12 = logr(c3, c4)

5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax 99

KaleidaGraph

poly(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Polynomial curve fit applied, this function determines
the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: poly(.0034, c15), c14 = poly(c12, c1)
pow(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Power curve fit applied, this function determines the
value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: pow(119, c10), c3 = pow(c0, c2)
smooth(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Smooth curve fit applied, this function determines
the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: smooth(11.15, c2), c4 = smooth(c2, c3)
spline(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Cubic Spline curve fit applied, this function
determines the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: spline(–23.098, c17), c4 = spline(c3, c8)
wgt(x, col#) - Given an x value and a column that has a Weighted curve fit applied, this function determines
the value from the fit at the x point.
Examples: wgt(15.657, c2), c9 = wgt(c10, c11)

5.9.5 Special Menu

execute("filename") - This function loads a formula or formula script into the Posted Note and executes it.
This function can only be used in the Formula Entry window; it cannot be used in the Posted Note window.
Examples: execute("Macintosh HD:Scripts:script1"), execute("C:\kgraph\Scripts\script1.txt")
macro(" ") - This function executes a macro by name.
Examples: macro("Simplify"), macro("Invert Mask")
mask(logical expression, col#) - Masks the cells in the specified column if the expression is true.
Examples: mask(c4 > 1.25, c6), mask(c9 != c11, c14)
name(" ", col#) - This command uses the text string given to name the specified column.
Examples: name("Y-Error", c2), name("Residuals", c11)
script("filename") - This function loads and runs the specified plot script. If no name is given, the current
script is executed.
Examples: script("Scatter Plot Script"), script("Temperature"), script()
unmask(logical expression, col#) - Unmasks the cells in the specified column if the expression is true.
Examples: unmask(c2 == c4, c5), unmask(c2 < 4, c3)

5.9.6 Library Menu

The Library menu lists all of the definitions that are present in the current library. If the library is empty, this
menu is also empty.

100 5.9 Function Descriptions and Syntax

 Working with Formula Entry

5.10 Formula Scripting

KaleidaGraph supports an internal set of scripting commands in the Posted Note of Formula Entry. Using
these commands, you can automate the process of opening and closing data windows, creating plots, and
exporting plots to a printer or the Clipboard. Scripts are particularly useful if you repeatedly open the same
types of text files, perform the same set of data manipulations, and generate the same types of plots.

5.10.1 Creating a Formula Script

Formula scripts are similar to the multi-line formulas that were discussed in Section 5.2. The main difference
is that there are a number of additional commands that are supported by KaleidaGraph. These commands
enable you to open data files, create plots, print plots, and export the plots in a variety of formats.

All of the formula script commands are discussed in Section 5.10.2. In addition, the #FORMULA command
supports all of the functions that are available in the Formula Entry window, except for the execute command

To enter and execute a formula script:

1. Verify that a data window is already open. The script cannot execute unless a data window is
available.
2. Choose Windows > Formula Entry.
3. Click the Posted Note button ( ) to display the text editor.
4. Enter the formula script into the Posted Note.
5. When you are finished entering the script, choose File > Exit to leave the Posted Note. You will
return to Formula Entry, which displays the message shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13 Formula Entry after exiting the Posted Note

6. Click Run to execute the script in the Posted Note.

You can save the scripts using the Save As command from the File menu in the Posted Note window. Once
the script has been saved, it can be reopened by choosing File > Open in the Posted Note dialog. Alternately,
you can use the execute function in Formula Entry to load and execute a saved formula script.

5.10 Formula Scripting 101

KaleidaGraph

5.10.2 Formula Script Commands

Definitions
BOOLEAN yes/no/true/false
STRING "255 character string surrounded by quotes"

The format for specifying a path to a file differs between the Windows and Macintosh versions. Under
Windows, the path starts at the hard disk, with subdirectories separated by a backslash (\). On a Macintosh,
the path starts at the hard disk, with subdirectories separated by a colon (:).

The equal sign (=) is optional in this syntax. Anywhere the equal sign is used, the command is also valid
without it.

The commands are case sensitive. The examples for each command show how it should be entered in the
Posted Note window.

Comments can be added between formula script commands with the use of a semicolon. Any lines that begin
with a semicolon are treated as comments. Place comment lines before or after individual formula script
procedures. A syntax error message is displayed if the comment is included within the formula script
command definition.

List of Commands
#CLOSE - This command closes the active window, without saving its contents. The syntax for this command
follows:

#CLOSE

#CLOSE/ALL - This command closes all visible windows, without saving their contents. The syntax for this
command follows:

#CLOSE/ALL

#CLOSE/OPT - This command closes the specified plot or data window. You have the option of saving the
window before closing it. Only plot and data windows should be taken into account when determining the
position number of the window. The syntax for this command follows:

#CLOSE/OPT
window = # (the position of the window from front to back, where the frontmost window is position 1)
save = BOOLEAN
wintype = plot/data (optional)
#END

Example: Save and close the frontmost data window.

#CLOSE/OPT
window = 1
save = true
wintype = data
#END

102 5.10 Formula Scripting

 Working with Formula Entry

#COPY - This command copies the selection in the active data window to the Clipboard. You may optionally
specify a selection as part of the command options. If no selection is specified, the current selection in the
window is used. You may also specify whether to copy column titles in addition to any data. The syntax for
this command follows:

#COPY
[title = BOOLEAN] [Start_Row End_Row Start_Column End_Column]
#END

The numbers should be separated by any white space characters. As a special case, if Start Row has a value of
–1, the entire window is selected. The active cell in the data window is moved to the location specified by Start
Row, Start Column. The selection addresses for both row and column positions begin at zero and are counted
from the upper-left corner of the data window (position 0,0). The default action is not to return titles.

Example: Copy the selection in rows 5–15, columns 1–3 (no titles).
#COPY
5 15 1 3
#END

Example: Copy the selection in rows 0–10, columns 1–2 (with titles).
#COPY
title = true 0 10 1 2
#END
#DATA - This command places tab-separated data in a new data window. The first row should contain titles.
The syntax for this command follows:

#DATA
(First row contains tab-separated titles.)
(The remaining rows contain tab-separated data.)
#END

Example: Use the first row for titles and place the remaining data in a new data window.
#DATA
Time Test#1 Test#2
1.0 38.6 39.7
1.5 41.2 40.9
2.0 42.7 42.3
#END

#DATA/NOTITLE - This command places tab-separated data in a new data window. The first row should
contain data. The syntax for this command follows:

#DATA/NOTITLE
(All rows contain tab-separated data.)
#END

Example: Place the data in a new data window.

#DATA/NOTITLE
1.0 38.6 39.7
1.5 41.2 40.9
2.0 42.7 42.3
#END

5.10 Formula Scripting 103

KaleidaGraph

#DATAFILE - This command loads the data file named in the string. If the file is a text file, it is loaded using
the specified parameters. The syntax for this command follows:

#DATAFILE
file = STRING (This string should be either a simple name or a fully or partially qualified path to the
file. The Open dialog is displayed if the path or file name is incorrect, or if "*.*" is used for the
string.)
delimiter = tab/space/special/STRING (if STRING is used, only the first character of the string is
important)
skip = # (the number of lines to be skipped at the beginning of the file)
read_titles = BOOLEAN
del_number = # (0 -> del == 1, 1 -> del >= 1, 2 -> del >= 2, 3 -> del >= 3)
title_format = STRING (only used when delimiter = special)
data_format = STRING (only used when delimiter = special)
#END

Example: Display the Open dialog to open any data file.

#DATAFILE
file = "*.*"
#END

Example: Open a comma-delimited text file. The path uses a Windows format.
#DATAFILE
file= "C:\kgraph\Data_1.txt"
delimiter = ","
#END

Example: Open a text file using the special format. The path uses a Macintosh format.
#DATAFILE
file = "Macintosh HD:Data:Test #1"
delimiter = special
skip = 0
read_titles = TRUE
title_format = "3(a)"
data_format = "A f3 2(A v)"
#END

#FORMULA - This command executes a list of standard formulas. A semicolon should be placed at the end
of each formula. It is valid to omit the #FORMULA and #END statements if you wish. The syntax for this
command follows:

#FORMULA
(List of standard formulas.)
#END

Example: Calculate the average of two columns and give the output column a title.
#FORMULA
c3 = (c1 + c2) /2;
name("Average", c3);
#END

104 5.10 Formula Scripting

 Working with Formula Entry

#MERGEFILE - This command loads the data file named in the string, starting at the specified row and
column position. The file is loaded using the specified parameters. The syntax for this command follows:

#MERGEFILE
file = STRING (This string should be either a simple name or a fully or partially qualified path to the
file. The Open dialog is displayed if the path or file name is incorrect, or if "*.*" is used for the
string.)
delimiter = tab/space/special/STRING (if STRING is used, only the first character of the string is
important)
skip = # (the number of lines to be skipped at the beginning of the file)
read_titles = BOOLEAN
del_number = # (0 -> del == 1, 1 -> del >= 1, 2 -> del >= 2, 3 -> del >= 3)
title_format = STRING (only used when delimiter = special)
data_format = STRING (only used when delimiter = special)
position = # # (row number and column number separated by a tab)
#END

Example: Display the Open dialog to merge any data file.

#MERGEFILE
file = "*.*"
#END

Example: Merge a comma-delimited text file. The path uses a Windows format.
#MERGEFILE
file= "C:\kgraph\Data_1.txt"
delimiter = ","
#END

#METAFILE - This command exports the active plot window as a Metafile image via the Clipboard. This
command is only available under Windows. The syntax for this command follows:

#METAFILE

#METAFILE/OPT - This command exports the active plot as a Metafile image to a file or the Clipboard,
using the specified parameters. It is not possible to export the plot as an OLE object using this command. This
command is only available under Windows. The syntax for this command follows:

#METAFILE/OPT
scale = # (ranging from 1 to 1000)
hires = BOOLEAN
min_whitespace = BOOLEAN
file = STRING
#END

Example: Export the active plot as a Metafile image at 75%.

#METAFILE/OPT
scale = 75
hires = TRUE
file = "C:\Images\Image_1.wmf"
#END

5.10 Formula Scripting 105

KaleidaGraph

#OPEN - This command opens the specified file. It can be used to open any file that KaleidaGraph recognizes.
The syntax for this command follows:

#OPEN
file = STRING (This string should be either a simple name or a fully or partially qualified path to the
file. The Open dialog is displayed if the path or file name is incorrect, or if "*.*" is used for the
string.)
#END

Example: Open a saved Style file. The path uses a Macintosh format.
#OPEN
file = "Macintosh HD:KaleidaGraph:KG Style"
#END

Example: Open a saved Layout file. The path uses a Windows format.
#OPEN
file = "C:\KGraph\Layouts\Layout_1.qpl"
#END

#PAGE_PRINT - This command prints one or more plot windows using the current settings in the layout
window. The syntax for this command follows:

#PAGE_PRINT

#PASTE - This command pastes text or binary data from the Clipboard into the active data window. You may
optionally specify a selection as part of the command options. You may also specify whether to paste column
titles in addition to any text data. The syntax for this command follows:

#PASTE
[title = BOOLEAN] [Start_Row End_Row Start_Column End_Column]
#END

The numbers should be separated by any white space characters. As a special case, if Start Row has a value of
–1, the entire window is selected. The active cell in the data window is moved to the location specified by Start
Row, Start Column. The selection addresses for both row and column positions begin at zero and are counted
from the upper-left corner of the data window (position 0,0). The default action is not to return titles.

Example: Replace rows 0–10, columns 1–2 with the data on the Clipboard (with titles).
#PASTE
title = true 0 10 1 2
#END

#PICT - This command exports the active plot window as a PICT image via the Clipboard. The syntax for
this command follows:

#PICT

106 5.10 Formula Scripting

 Working with Formula Entry

#PICT/OPT - This command exports the active plot window to a file or the Clipboard, using the specified
parameters. The post_pict parameter is only available for PICT files on a Macintosh. The syntax for this
command follows:

#PICT/OPT
type = pict/bmp/gif/jpeg/png/tiff
scale = # (ranging from 1 to 1000)
post_pict = BOOLEAN (Only use in the Macintosh version when type=pict.)
min_whitespace = BOOLEAN
file = STRING
#END

Example: Export the active plot as a PostScript PICT at 75%. The path uses a Macintosh format.
#PICT/OPT
type = pict
scale = 75
post_pict = TRUE
file = "Macintosh HD:PICT Folder:Test file"
#END

#PLOT_PRINT - This command prints the active plot window. The syntax for this command follows:

#PLOT_PRINT

#SAVE - This command saves the specified plot or data window. Only plot and data windows should be taken
into account when determining the position number of the window. The syntax for this command follows:

#SAVE
window = # (the position of the window from front to back, where the frontmost window is position 1)
wintype = plot/data (optional)
file = STRING
#END

Example: Save the second plot window from the front. The path uses a Windows format.
#SAVE
window = 2
wintype = plot
file = "C:\KGraph\Test Plot.qpc"
#END

5.10 Formula Scripting 107

KaleidaGraph

#SCRIPT - This command can be used to either load a specific script file or create a script from scratch. The
y2 options in the script are only used for Double Y and Double XY plots. The x2 options in the script are only
used for Double X and Double XY plots. The only way to use a template plot, apply curve fits, or apply error
bars is to open a saved plot script file. The syntax for this command follows:

#SCRIPT
file = STRING (Load the script file. This file should be in the same folder as the last script file that was
opened or specified by a fully qualified path. The Open dialog is displayed if the path or file name is
incorrect, or if "*.*" is used for the string.)
x/y/x2/y2 axis title STRING (These commands are valid for the x, y, x2, and y2 axes.)
x/y/x2/y2 axis limits # # (Limits for dates or times can be entered as a STRING.)
x/y/x2/y2 axis auto
x/y/x2/y2 axis linear/log
auto_print = boolean
print_mode = single/layout
auto_save = boolean
save_mode = with_data/without_data/pict/bitmap/metafile/bmp/gif/jpeg/png/tiff
prefix = STRING (The character limit is 8 (Windows) or 26 (Macintosh))
plot_type =line/scatter/double_y/double_x/double_xy/hilo/step/probability/xy_probability/histogram/
box/percentile/bar/stack_bar/column/ stack_column/polar/pie
begin_group (select variables, plot title, and legend text for the group)
title = STRING (one title per group)
legend = STRING
legend = STRING
x = # (select X column number)
y = # (select Y column number)
y2 = # (if using a Double Y or Double XY plot, select Y2 column number)
x2 = # (if using a Double X or Double XY plot, select X2 column number)
window = # (Specify a data window for plotting. The default is the frontmost data window (window 1).
The last window specified is remembered until a new script is encountered or a new window number
is specified.)
end_group
(Add as many groups as you need to the script. Each group creates a new plot.)
#END

Example: Display the Open dialog to load and execute a plot script.
#SCRIPT
file = "*.*"
#END

108 5.10 Formula Scripting

 Working with Formula Entry

Example: Create and save a Scatter plot from two data windows.
#SCRIPT
auto_save = TRUE
save_mode = with_data
prefix = "1/31_Group"
plot_type = scatter
begin_group
title = "Lot 10938"
x=0
y=1
y=2
window = 2
x=0
y=1
y=2
end_group
#END

Example: Create a Line plot from two sets of X-Y data in the same data window.
#SCRIPT
plot_type = line
begin_group
x=0
y=1
x=2
y=3
end_group
#END

Example: Create two Double Y plots from a single data window.

#SCRIPT
plot_type = double_y
begin_group
x=0
y=1
y2 = 2
end_group
begin_group
x=3
y=4
y2 = 5
end_group
#END

#SELECTION - This command sets the selection in the active data window. The syntax for this command
follows:

#SELECTION
Start_Row End_Row Start_Column End_Column
#END

The numbers should be separated by any white space characters. As a special case, if Start Row has a value of
–1, the entire window is selected. The active cell in the data window is moved to the location specified by Start
Row, Start Column. The selection addresses for both row and column positions begin at zero and are counted
from the upper-left corner of the data window (position 0,0).

5.10 Formula Scripting 109

KaleidaGraph

Example: In the active data window, select rows 5–15, in columns 1–3.
#SELECTION
5 15 1 3
#END

Example: Select the entire data window.

#SELECTION
–1
#END

#SET_DIRECTORY - This command sets the default directory. The syntax for this command follows:

#SET_DIRECTORY
directory = STRING (STRING is a fully or partially qualified path to the desired directory. Note: The
path should end in a backslash (Windows) or colon (Macintosh) if the last item is not a file.)
#END

Example: Move up one directory on a Macintosh.

#SET_DIRECTORY
directory = "::"
#END

Example: Move up one directory under Windows.

#SET_DIRECTORY
directory = ".."
#END

Example: Change the current directory to the Sample Data folder on a Macintosh.
#SET_DIRECTORY
directory = "Macintosh HD:KaleidaGraph:Data:"
#END

Example: Set the default directory to be the program directory.

#SET_DIRECTORY
directory = ""
#END

110 5.10 Formula Scripting

 Working with Formula Entry

5.10.3 Example Formula Scripts

The examples in this section follow the same basic format. An overview describes the goal of the script. Then
the example script is listed, just as it would appear if it were being entered directly into the Posted Note of the
Formula Entry window. Following the script is an explanation of each step in the script.

Note: The Scripts folder (Examples folder) contains these three example formula scripts. The paths in the
scripts have been modified to be correct for your particular platform.

Basic Example
This example script performs the following functions:
• Selects a portion of the data window.
• Executes four Formula Entry functions, two of which generate columns of data.
• Copies the data and the titles to the Clipboard.
• Pastes the information into another part of the data window.
The example script is listed below, followed by a description of how it operates.

#SELECTION
0 99 0 1
#END

#FORMULA
c0 = index() + 1;
c1 = log(c0);
name("Series", c0);
name("log(x)", c1);
#END

#COPY
title = true –1
#END

#PASTE
title = true 10 110 2 2
#END

The #SELECTION command selects rows 0 through 99 in the first two data columns. The #FORMULA
command executes formulas which operate only on the selected data cells. The formulas create a data series
from 1 to 100 in the first column, calculate the log of each value in the second column, and name the two
columns.

The #COPY command copies the entire data window, including titles, because the starting row is set to –1.
Finally, the #PASTE command pastes the information on the Clipboard into the data window, starting at row
10 in the third data column.

5.10 Formula Scripting 111

KaleidaGraph

Intermediate Example
This example script performs the following functions:
• Imports a tab-delimited text file.
• Executes two Formula Entry functions.
• Creates a Scatter plot of the raw data.
• Exports the plot to the printer.
The example script is listed below, followed by a description of how it operates.

#DATAFILE
file = "C:\kgraph\Data\example.txt"
delimiter = tab
skip = 0
read_titles = TRUE
del_number = 1
#END

#FORMULA
c3 = (c1 + c2) /2;
name("Average", c3);
#END

#SCRIPT
auto_print = true
print_mode = single
plot_type = scatter
begin_group
title = "Sample Script Plot"
legend = "Mean of Test Data"
x=0
y=3
end_group
#END

The #DATAFILE opens the specified text file. The path to the file uses a Windows format. The text file is
imported as a tab-delimited file which has a single tab between data values, skipping zero lines, and reading
the first line as titles. The #FORMULA command executes two Formula Entry commands which calculate the
average of two columns and place a title in the output column.

The #SCRIPT command generates a Scatter plot from the calculated data. The plot title and legend
information are set directly via the title and legend options within the script. After the plot is created, it is
automatically exported to the printer.

112 5.10 Formula Scripting

 Working with Formula Entry

Advanced Example
This example script performs the following functions:
• Sets the program directory as the default directory.
• Opens a data file.
• Makes a selection in the data window.
• Plots the selected data as a Stack Column plot.
• Exports the plot as a TIFF file, scaling the image by 50%.
The example script is listed below, followed by a description of how it operates.

#SET_DIRECTORY
directory = ""
#END

#DATAFILE
file = ":Examples:Data:Housing Starts.QDA"
#END

#SELECTION
0503
#END

#SCRIPT
y axis title "Range"
y axis limits 0 450
plot_type = stack_column
begin_group
x=0
y=1
y=2
y=3
end_group
#END

#PICT/OPT
type = tiff
scale = 50
file = "Example.tif"
#END

The #SET_DIRECTORY command sets the program directory to be the default path. The #DATAFILE
command opens the Housing Starts data file. The path to this file uses a Macintosh format and begins in the
same directory as the program. Since the path to this file does not start at the root directory, the path begins
with a colon (:).

The #SELECTION command selects the first six rows in the data set. The #SCRIPT command creates a Stack
Column plot of the selected data. The title and limits for the Y axis are defined within this command. The plot
is then exported as a TIFF file with 50% reduction using the #PICT/OPT command. The TIFF file is given the
specified name and is saved in the same directory as the program.

5.10 Formula Scripting 113

KaleidaGraph

114 5.10 Formula Scripting

Creating Plots

Chapter 6

KaleidaGraph provides 19 different plot types for representing your data. All of the available plots are listed
in the Gallery menu. This chapter covers:
• The different types of plots that are available in KaleidaGraph.
• Creating a plot.
• Plotting multiple X-Y pairs on a single graph.
• Plotting a function.
• Generating similar plots.

6.1 Types of Plots

6.1.1 Line Plot
Use a Line plot to represent trends in different data sets over a period of time. Each line in the plot represents
a separate data column. The data is displayed as a series of X-Y pairs, connected to the next point by a line.
The data does not have to be sorted, but it is important to note that the points are connected in the order they
appear in the data window.

Line plots give you a great deal of flexibility in how the data is displayed. You can specify the number of
markers, line style, and line thickness for each variable. You can also hide the line and display only the
markers. All of these characteristics are controlled in the Plot Style dialog.
Damped Sine 50 0.15
1
0.8 40
0.6
0.10
0.4 30
0.2
0 20
0.05
-0.2
10
-0.4
-0.6
0 0.00
0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Figure 6-1 Sample Line plots

6.1 Types of Plots 115

KaleidaGraph

6.1.2 Scatter Plot

Use a Scatter plot to compare large sets of data. Scatter plots are similar to Line plots, except the points are
not connected by lines. Each X-Y pair is represented by a unique marker on the plot. Each column of data is
represented by a different marker.

Scatter plots display a marker for each point in the plot. It is not possible to display a partial set of markers or
a line between the points. If you want this kind of flexibility, plot the data as a Line plot.
Dose Response 10 Sample 2896-1
100 8
90
80
70 6
1
60
Mean
50 4
40 0.1
2
30

-6 0.01 0
10 10-5 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 100 -2 -1 0 1 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

Figure 6-2 Sample Scatter plots

6.1.3 Double Y Plot

Use a Double Y plot to display two groups of data, each with its own vertical scale. Each line in the plot
represents a separate data column. The data is displayed as a series of X-Y pairs, connected to the next point
by a line. The data does not have to be sorted, but it is important to note that the points are connected in the
order they appear in the data window.

The Double Y plot gives you the same amount of control over the display of the data as the Line plot, but with
the added capability of having separate scales on the vertical axes. This plot is useful when you are plotting
two dependent (Y) groups which share a common independent (X) variable.

6.1.4 Double X Plot

Use a Double X plot to display two groups of data, each with its own horizontal scale. Each line in the plot
represents a separate data column. The data is displayed as a series of X-Y pairs, connected to the next point
by a line. The data does not have to be sorted, but it is important to note that the points are connected in the
order they appear in the data window.

The Double X plot gives you the same amount of control over the display of the data as the Line plot, but with
the added capability of having separate scales on the horizontal axes. This plot is useful when you are plotting
two groups of data that need to have separate independent (X) axes and share the same dependent (Y) axis.

6.1.5 Double XY Plot

Use a Double XY plot to display two groups of data, each with its own horizontal and vertical scale. Each line
in the plot represents a separate data column. The data is displayed as a series of X-Y pairs, connected to the
next point by a line. The data does not have to be sorted, but it is important to note that the points are connected
in the order they appear in the data window.

The Double XY plot gives you the same amount of control over the display of the data as the Line plot, but
with the added capability of having two separate scales on the horizontal and vertical axes. This plot is useful
when you are plotting two groups of data that need to have separate independent (X) and dependent (Y) axes

116 6.1 Types of Plots

 Creating Plots

Sin(ϑ) Cos(ϑ) Tan(ϑ) 0 5 10 15 20 0 10 20 30

6 1400 70 100
1.5
1200 60
1 4
1000
0.5 2 50
800
0 0 40 10
600
-0.5 -2 30
400
-1 -4 20
200
-1.5 -6 0 10 1
0o 90o 180o 270o 360o 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 100 200 300 400

Figure 6-3 Sample Double Y, Double X, and Double XY plots

6.1.6 High/Low Plot

This plot type is designed for many uses. The most common is to create High/Low/Close plots for the financial
industry. This plot normally contains a vertical bar, representing the range of values from low to high, and a
marker, representing the ending or closing value.

The order of the columns in the data window does not matter. However, this plot appears differently depending
on how many Y variables are plotted for a given X.
• One Y variable (Line plot) - A standard Line plot is generated. This is often useful when overlaying
a High/Low plot with some additional X-Y data.
• Two Y variables (Spike plot) - A vertical line is drawn between the two data points. The first plotted
variable controls the color, line style, width, and marker style.
• Three or more Y variables (High/Low/Close plot) - A vertical line is drawn between the maximum
and minimum data points. The first plotted variable controls the color, line style, width, and marker
style. All of the data points between the minimum and maximum are drawn as ticks to the right of
the vertical line. The size of the tick is controlled by the marker size of the first plotted variable.

1.2 Utility Stocks 10

217
1 216
5
0.8 215

0.6 214
0
213
0.4
212
0.2
211 -5
0
210
Jun 10
Jun 11
Jun 12
Jun 15

Jun 16
Jun 8
Jun 9

-0.2 -10
0 4 8 12 16 20 0 100 200 300 400

Figure 6-4 Sample High/Low plots

6.1 Types of Plots 117

KaleidaGraph

6.1.7 Step Plot

A Step plot is a variation of a Line plot. It can be used to compare data that does not show a trend. Each line
in the plot represents a separate data column. The data is plotted as a series of steps. The data does not have
to be sorted, but it is important to note that the points are connected in the order they appear in the data window

Note: It is not possible to display markers on a Step plot. The placement of the steps is controlled using the
Step Options command (Format menu).

8 150

6 125
a
4 100 b

2 75

c
0 50
0 5 10 15 J F MA M J J A S ON D

Figure 6-5 Sample Step plots

6.1.8 Probability Plot

Use a Probability plot to display the graph of a variable normalized to either a linear or normal probability
distribution. The X axis is scaled in probability (between 0 and 100%) and shows the percentage of the Y
variable whose value is less than the data point. The Y axis displays the range of the data variables.

The Probability plot gives rough information about the local density of the data and symmetry. The plotted
data points do not coincide, even if there are exact duplicates in the data. It is easy to read information from
the plot and it can accommodate a large number of observations. The Probability plot is not a summary but a
display of all the data.

Note: The Probability Options command (Format menu) controls whether a linear or normal distribution
is used.

6.1.9 X-Y Probability Plot

The X-Y Probability plot is similar to the Probability plot. The only difference is that in an X-Y Probability
plot, you enter the probability associated with each Y value. The data is entered as X-Y pairs, where X is the
probability (between 0 and 100%) and Y is the data value.
User Response by Age Group 25 99.99
99.9
32 20 99

95
90
15 80
28
Age

70
50
10 30
24 20
10
5 5
1
20
0 20 40 60 80 100 0 .1
Probability of Response 0 20 40 60 80 100
.01
6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Figure 6-6 Sample Probability and X-Y Probability plots

118 6.1 Types of Plots

 Creating Plots

6.1.10 Histogram Plot

A Histogram calculates the number of data points that fall within a specified bin size. The resulting plot
displays the range of the data on the X axis and the number of data points in each bin on the Y axis. If more
than one variable is plotted, the Y axis displays the total number of points in each bin.

You can use the Histogram Options command (Format menu) to specify the bin size, reference value, and
number of extra bins that get added to the plot. A maximum of 200 bins may be plotted.
10 20

300
8
15
6
200
10
4

100 5
2

0
0 0
0.92

0.94

0.96

0.98

1.00

1.02

1.04

1.06

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

Figure 6-7 Sample Histogram plots

6.1.11 Box Plot

A Box plot enables you to quickly examine a number of variables and extract their major characteristics. While
this does not provide detailed information about the data, it does give you a look at its global behavior. A Box
plot represents each variable as a separate box. The Y axis displays the range of the data and the X axis
displays the names of each variable. See Section D.1 for details on what the boxes represent and how they are
calculated.

Up to 20 additional variables may (optionally) be overlaid as markers on each plot. The markers are matched
one to one with the plotted variables. The first value in a marker column is matched with the first box, the
second value in a marker column is matched with the second box, and so on. When using markers, the boxes
do not have a fill pattern so that the markers can be clearly identified.

Note: You may not select more than a total of 20 variables and markers from a single data window. If your
needs exceed this limit, place the variables and markers in separate data windows.

13.6 Detection Range • Mean 10

8
13.4 A

6
13.2 B
4

13.0 2
C

12.8 40 60 8 0 100 120 140 160 0

A B C D
A B C D

Figure 6-8 Sample Box plots

6.1 Types of Plots 119

KaleidaGraph

6.1.12 Percentile Plot

A Percentile plot represents each variable as a separate box. The Y axis displays the range of the data and the
X axis displays the names of each variable. Each box encloses 90% of the data.

The bottom and top of each box represent 5% and 95% of the data. Three lines are drawn inside each box. The
middle line represents the median value of the data (50%), while the lower and upper dashed lines represent
25% and 75% of the data, respectively. Due to the importance of these lines, the boxes do not have fill patterns

Up to 20 additional variables may (optionally) be overlaid as markers on each plot. The markers are matched
one to one with the plotted variables. The first value in a marker column is matched with the first box, the
second value in a marker column is matched with the second box, and so on.

Note: It is not possible to display a fill pattern in the boxes. You may not select more than a total of 20
variables and markers from a single data window. If your needs exceed this limit, place the variables
and markers in separate data windows.
8 10

A
8
6

6
4 B
4
2
C 2

0
Test #1 Test #2 Test #3 0
40 60 8 0 100 120 140 160 A B C D

Figure 6-9 Sample Percentile plots

6.1.13 Horizontal Bar Plot

A Horizontal Bar plot is a graph of data selected from one window. The data is displayed as a series of
horizontal bars. The length of each bar represents the value of a variable. Multiple values for the same category
(row) are displayed as side-by-side bars. The horizontal axis displays the range of the dependent values and
the vertical axis displays the categories.

Note: A maximum of one independent (X) variable, with up to 32000 categories, and 20 dependent (Y)
variables may be plotted at once. Customizing Horizontal Bar plots is covered in Section 7.15.

100 Dec
90 1995 Nov
Oct
80
Sep
70
Aug
60 Jul
1996
50 Jun
40 May
Apr
30
Mar
20 1997
Feb
10 Jan
0 5 10 15 20 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

Figure 6-10 Sample Horizontal Bar plots

120 6.1 Types of Plots

 Creating Plots

6.1.14 Stack Bar Plot

A Stack Bar plot is a graph of data selected from one window. As in a Horizontal Bar plot, the data is
displayed as a series of horizontal bars. The difference between a Stack Bar plot and a Horizontal Bar plot
is that variables belonging to the same category (row) are displayed as bars stacked one on top of another.
The length of each bar represents the sum of the data points for a category. The horizontal axis displays
the range of sums for a category and the vertical axis displays the categories.

Note: A maximum of one independent (X) variable, with up to 32000 categories, and 20 dependent (Y)
variables may be plotted at once. Customizing Stack Bar plots is covered in Section 7.15.

New Sales
Apr A
1997
B
Mar
1996
C
Feb
1995
D

Jan 1994
E

0 5 10 15 20 25 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 0 200 400 600 800

Figure 6-11 Sample Stack Bar plots

6.1.15 Column Plot

A Column plot is a graph of data selected from one window. The data is displayed as a series of vertical
bars. The height of each bar represents the value of a variable. Multiple values for the same category (row)
are displayed as side-by-side columns. The horizontal axis displays the categories and the vertical axis
displays the range of the variables.

Note: A maximum of one independent (X) variable, with up to 32000 categories, and 20 dependent (Y)
variables may be plotted at once. Customizing Column plots is covered in Section 7.15.
12 20
30
10

8
15
20
6
10
4
10
2 5
0
0
Misc
815B

160A

223D

412U

105C

0
-1.5

-0.5

0.5

1.5
-2

-1

Jan Feb Mar April

Figure 6-12 Sample Column plots

6.1 Types of Plots 121

KaleidaGraph

6.1.16 Stack Column Plot

A Stack Column plot is a graph of data selected from one window. As in a Column plot, the data is displayed
as a series of vertical bars. The difference between a Stack Column plot and a Column plot is that variables
belonging to the same category (row) are displayed as columns stacked one on top of another. The height of
each bar represents the sum of the data points for a category. The horizontal axis displays the categories and
the vertical axis displays the range of sums for all variables in that category.

Note: A maximum of one independent (X) variable, with up to 32000 categories, and 20 dependent (Y)
variables may be plotted at once. Customizing Stack Column plots is covered in Section 7.15.
800 14 12
734.10 709.50
700 12
10
600 10
8
500 451.00 8
400 6 6

300 4 4
200 2
2
100 0

Misc
815B

160A

223D

412U

105C
0 0
1996 1997 1998 Jan Feb Mar Apr

Figure 6-13 Sample Stack Column plots

6.1.17 Polar Plot

In a Polar plot, the data is plotted on the polar coordinate system. Each point in this system is specified by an
angle (Ø) in degrees and a radius (R). As an option, an alternate data format can be used, where the data is
specified in X-Y format and then transformed to the polar coordinate system. In either case, an independent
variable (Ø or X) and one or more dependent variables (R or Y) are selected for plotting.

Using the Polar Options command (Format menu), you can specify the grid type, data format, reference
angle, and direction for Polar plots. Customizing Polar plots is covered in Section 7.16.
3 0°
10 cm 330° 30°
3 10
8 cm 1
3
6 cm 0.1 60°
3 0.01
4 cm 0.001
3
2 cm 0.0001
3 0.00001 90°
0 cm

240° 120°

210° 150°
180°

Figure 6-14 Sample Polar plots

6.1.18 Pie Chart

A Pie chart displays the value of up to 20 categories as a percentage of the total area of a circle. Each of the
categories is represented as a segment of the circle (or a wedge of the pie). Only two variables may be plotted
at one time in a Pie chart. The first is the independent (X) variable or category. This variable contains the name
of each category. The second variable (Y) contains the category values, which must be numeric.

122 6.1 Types of Plots

 Creating Plots

Note: If more than 20 categories are selected for plotting, only the first 20 appear on the plot. Customizing
Pie charts is covered in Section 7.17. Negative values cannot be plotted in a Pie chart. If the data
contains negative values, a dialog gives you the option of plotting the absolute value of the data or
canceling the plot.

Housing Starts
Jan
22.8% 19.3%
Feb

Mar
11%
Apr

May 13.8%
June
26.2% 6.9%

6.98%

Figure 6-15 Sample Pie charts

6.1.19 Function Plot

The Function plot can be used to display a mathematical function as a plot. Choosing this plot type displays a
dialog where you can enter the function, the minimum and maximum X values, and the number of points to
plot.

Once the plot is created, it behaves like a Line plot. You have full control over the line style, markers, and all
other components of the plot. Section 6.3 provides instructions for creating a Function plot.
Y = gaussfit(.5,5,1,10) 0.6 100
6

5 0.4 80

4 0.2 60
3
0 40
2

1 -0.2 20

0 -0.4 0
-50 -25 0 25 50 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 20 40 60 80 100

Figure 6-16 Sample Function plots

6.1.20 Text Plot

This plot type allows you to create a plot window whose intended use is text. Text plots are particularly useful
when you want to generate a plot that only contains text, lines, boxes, tables, or pictures.

Note: Certain tools in this window are unavailable, because they can only be used when data is plotted.

6.1.21 Template Plot

The Template plot is used to generate the same type of plot, using different data. It allows you to take any plot
and use it as a base for plotting new data. This works for both new plots and plots that have been saved. The
use of this plot is discussed in Section 6.4.2.

6.1 Types of Plots 123

KaleidaGraph

6.2 Creating a Plot

The Gallery menu contains the plot types available in KaleidaGraph. You can create a plot using any of the
open data windows. If a selection is made in the data you are plotting, only the selected data is used in making
the plot.

To create a plot:
1. Open the data to be plotted.
2. Make any selections in the data windows to plot a subset of the data.
3. Choose a plot type from the Gallery menu. A dialog similar to Figure 6-17 is displayed.

Figure 6-17 Variable Selection dialog

4. Click the appropriate buttons to select the columns to be plotted. You can clear all of the buttons at
once by clicking the check mark icon in this dialog.
5. Click New Plot to create the plot.

At this point, the plot is linked to the original data window. If another plot is opened, created, or brought to
the front, the data for the previous plot becomes embedded in the plot. If the plot is saved, a copy of the data
is embedded in the plot and saved as part of the plot file. Once data is embedded in a plot, it can be extracted
by choosing Plot > Extract Data or clicking the Find Data button ( ) in the plot window.

124 6.2 Creating a Plot

 Creating Plots

6.2.1 Plotting from Multiple Data Windows

Unless you are creating a Pie chart or one of the plots in the Bar submenu, you can plot data from multiple
data windows. This is accomplished by making variable selections for each data set to be used.

The Variable Selection dialog contains a pop-up menu listing the names of all open data windows. Using this
menu, you can select up to 20 independent and 20 dependent variables to be plotted. If a text column is used
as the independent variable, you may not select any other independent variables and you can only plot from
that particular data window.

To create a plot from multiple data sets:

1. Open the data to be plotted. To plot subsections of any data sets, select the appropriate rows in each
data window.
2. Choose a plot type from the Gallery menu. A Variable Selection dialog appears.
3. Make the independent and dependent variable selections for the active data window.
4. Click the data window’s name in this dialog to display a pop-up menu containing the name of each
data window. A check mark in front of the name indicates that variables are already selected from
that data window. If the data window contains a data selection, its name is underlined.

The dialog in the background of Figure 6-18 displays the variables selected from the first data set
and the pop-up menu used to switch between data windows.

Figure 6-18 Variable Selection dialogs

5. Select the name of a different data window and make the variable selections. Continue doing this
until all of the variables to be plotted are selected. The dialog in the foreground of Figure 6-18 shows
the selection made from the second data set.
6. Click New Plot to create a plot based on the selections.

6.2 Creating a Plot 125

KaleidaGraph

6.2.2 Plotting Multiple X-Y Pairs from the Same Data Window
The Linear, X-Y Probability, and Polar plots allow you to plot multiple independent variables from the same
data window. If the independent variable is a text column, you may only have one independent variable.

For the plot types mentioned above, the Variable Selection dialog contains a pop-up menu listing the
independent variables (X–X9). Using this pop-up menu, you can plot up to nine independent and 20 dependent
variables from one data window.

To create a plot from one data window, with different X variables:

1. Open the data to be plotted.
2. Choose a plot type from the Gallery menu. A Variable Selection dialog appears.
3. Make the first set of X and Y variable selections.
4. Click the X column’s shadow box to display a pop-up menu containing the list of X variables
(X–X9). If one of the variables already contains a selection, it is preceded by a check mark. The
dialog in the background of Figure 6-19 displays the pop-up menu used to select a different
independent variable.

Figure 6-19 Variable Selection dialogs

5. Select a different X variable and choose what is to be plotted against it. Continue doing this until all
of the selections are made. The dialog in the foreground of Figure 6-19 shows the selections for the
second independent variable.
6. Click New Plot to create a plot based on the selections.

126 6.2 Creating a Plot

 Creating Plots

6.3 Plotting a Function

KaleidaGraph provides a Function plot that can be used to plot any mathematical function. The function you
enter is evaluated between the specified limits and is displayed as a plot.

When defining your function, use x for the independent variable. The operators and math functions found in
Formula Entry can be used in defining your function. Constants and other shorthand references can be defined
in the library. You can also use any of the definitions included in the Curve Fits folder. The table below lists
some example definitions:

Example Function Definitions

5 * x^2
gaussfit(1, 5, 1, 10)
m1 + m2 * exp(–m3 * x); m1 = 5; m2 = 1; m3 = 0.5
a * exp(–b * x) * cos(c * x + d); a = 4; b = 0.7; c = 2.2; d = 15

To create a Function plot:

1. Choose Gallery > Function to display the Function Plot dialog, shown in Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 Function Plot dialog

2. Enter the function you want to plot. The File button can be used to load a saved function definition
3. If necessary, change the values for the minimum, maximum, and number of points.
4. Click New Plot to plot the function.

6.3 Plotting a Function 127

KaleidaGraph

Once the Function plot is created, it behaves like a Line plot. You have full control over the line style,
markers, and all other components of the plot. If you want to see the data generated by the function, choose
Plot > Extract Data or click the Find Data button ( ) in the plot window.

6.4 Generating Similar Plots

If you routinely create the same types of plots in KaleidaGraph, it helps to set some defaults or templates so
that most of the work can be done automatically. KaleidaGraph provides several features that can be used to
generate similar plots.

6.4.1 Using Style Files

One way to generate similar plots is through the use of Style files. KaleidaGraph stores most of your dialog
settings and program defaults into a Style file. The Style file also stores layouts for each of the various plot
types, in addition to any defaults you may have set for colors and text labels.

Each of the plots in the Gallery menu can have its own layout. The layout remembers the default style for the
legend, the position of the axis titles, plot title, axes, and legend, and the size of the axes, frame, and legend.

To define the layout for a plot:

1. Open an existing plot or create a plot of the type you want to define.
2. Modify the position and size of the titles, plot, and legend.
3. Choose Plot > Define Layout. The dialog in Figure 6-21 is displayed, asking if you want to save the
layout for this plot type.

Figure 6-21 Define Layout dialog

4. Click OK to save the layout.

Defining the layout of a plot only saves the position of the titles and legend. To change the defaults for text
labels, you must use the Text Options command (Format menu).

You need to save the Style file when quitting for these changes to be remembered the next time you start
KaleidaGraph. To create individual Style files for different projects, choose File > Export > Style. This way
you can save any number of different Style files which can be opened at a later time using the Open command

128 6.4 Generating Similar Plots

 Creating Plots

6.4.2 Using Template Plots

The Template plot is used to generate the same type of plot, using different data. It allows you to take any
graph and use it as a base for plotting new data. This works for new graphs and graphs that were saved.

The new data is autoscaled unless the limits are fixed in the Axis Options dialog. The legend reflects the new
variables being plotted, but all other text labels and objects remain the same. Any curve fits or error bars in
the original plot are applied and recalculated on the new plot.

Once a Template plot has been created, it can be modified like any other plot. If you need the ability to generate
multiple plots at once, use the Plot Script feature. This topic is covered in Section 6.4.3.

To use a plot as a template for creating other plots:

1. Open or create the data to be plotted.
2. Open or create the plot you want to use as a base for creating other plots.
3. Choose Gallery > Template to display a Variable Selection dialog. Figure 6-22 shows the dialog
when the original plot is a Line plot.

Figure 6-22 Variable Selection dialog

4. Click the appropriate buttons to select the variables to be plotted.
5. Click New Plot to generate a plot based on your selections.

Note: It is not necessary to use the Template plot if you are only modifying the original data used to create
the plot. Instead, you can extract the data from the plot, modify it, and update the plot. This process is
covered in Section 7.13.

6.4 Generating Similar Plots 129

KaleidaGraph

6.4.3 Using Plot Scripts

Another way to generate similar plots is the Plot Script command (Windows menu). This feature enables you
to choose any plot type or an existing plot and use it as a template for creating multiple plots at once.

When to Use Scripts

The script feature is intended for the user who has a Template plot and wants to plot different data sets and
view the resulting curves. Even if you only need to generate a simple plot, but you generate it all of the time
with different data, you will find plot scripts very useful.

The advantage of a script over a Template plot is that a script can generate multiple plots. Also, you can control
legend descriptions and plot titles using a script. In a Template plot, the legend descriptions come from the
column names of the plotted variables and the plot title remains unchanged.

Creating a Plot Script

The Plot Script command is similar to the Template plot but provides you with more options for creating plots.
Using plot scripts, you can create multiple plots at once, automatically print or save the plots, and set the plot
title or legend for each plot.

Choosing Windows > Plot Script displays the dialog in Figure 6-23. This dialog is used to make your
selections for the current script. The script selections include: plot type, variable selections, plot titles, legend
text, auto print, and auto save options.

Figure 6-23 Plot Script window

130 6.4 Generating Similar Plots

 Creating Plots

To create a plot script:

1. Choose Windows > Plot Script to display the Plot Script window.
2. If groups are already listed in this window, click Clear All to remove the groups and start a new
script.
3. Using the Graphic Template pop-up menu, choose either a Gallery plot type or an existing plot to
use as a template.
Note: Only one graphic template can be used in a script.
4. Click Add. A Variable Selection dialog similar to Figure 6-24 is displayed.

Figure 6-24 Variable Selection dialog

5. Select the variables to be plotted.
6. Click OK. Group 1 will be created in the Plot Script window, as shown in Figure 6-25. Continue
using the Add button to create new groups. Each group generates a separate plot.

6.4 Generating Similar Plots 131

KaleidaGraph

Figure 6-25 Plot Script window

7. When you are finished creating groups, click Run to execute the script.

Setting Titles and Legends

By default, the titles are the same as the template and the legend comes from the column names of the plotted
variables. You can set the plot titles and legends for each plot being created using the Set Titles and Set
Legends buttons in the Plot Script window. Clicking either of these buttons displays a text editor.

Each line in the editor corresponds to a different plot. Plot titles are entered on separate lines, followed by a
return. If you choose to set the titles, you must set them for all of the plots. If a specific plot is not to have a
title, create a blank line in the editor by pressing Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh). Each title appears
to the right of the corresponding data group in the Plot Script window.

To set the plot titles for a script:

1. Click Set Titles.
2. Enter plot titles as displayed in Figure 6-26.

Figure 6-26 Edit Script Titles dialog

132 6.4 Generating Similar Plots

 Creating Plots

3. Choose File > Exit. The titles are listed to the right of the groups, as shown in Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27 Plot Script window after setting titles

The legend information for each plot is also placed on separate lines, followed by a return. To indicate that the
labels belong to the same plot, each legend label should be separated with either a comma or a tab. For Double
Y or Double XY plots, enter the labels for the Y1 legend followed by the Y2 labels (on the same line). All
labels prior to a return belong to the same plot. Only use the Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) key to
separate legend titles associated with different plots.

6.4 Generating Similar Plots 133

KaleidaGraph

To set the legends for a script:

1. Click Set Legends.
2. Enter legend titles as displayed in Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28 Edit Script Legends dialog

3. Choose File > Exit.

Using Pattern Recognition to Create New Groups

The Plot Script window includes a pattern recognition feature. Once you add a third data group, KaleidaGraph
tries to identify a pattern in the way you are setting up the groups. If KaleidaGraph’s selections are correct,
you can replicate the pattern throughout the data window by clicking Repeat instead of OK. KaleidaGraph
continues the selection pattern across all of the columns in your data window, and creates the groups
automatically.

Note: The pattern recognition feature only works across the columns of a data window or across the columns
of a set of data windows. KaleidaGraph cannot identify a plotting pattern that jumps from one data
window to another.

Pointing Groups to Different Data Windows

The Data Windows pop-up menu can be used to select a different data window for each individual set of
variable selections. This pop-up menu contains up to 20 X Set menu items (X–X20). A set is defined as an X
variable and its associated Y variables (such as: X, Y1, Y2). The number of X Set menu items depends on the
number of independent variables selected for the current group.

The sets are listed in the pop-up menu in the order they were created. Selecting one of the sets displays a
submenu containing a list of the open data windows. They are listed in the order they are stacked on the screen,
from front to back. The data window currently associated with a particular set is preceded by a check mark.
Figure 6-29 shows the Plot Script window with the Data Windows pop-up menu and the X Set submenu.

134 6.4 Generating Similar Plots

 Creating Plots

Figure 6-29 Selecting different data windows

To change the data window associated with a particular set:

1. Click the group to be edited.
2. Click the Data Windows pop-up menu, select an X Set, and choose a different data window. The
selected data window is now used for that particular set of variable selections.

Note: The only other way to change the data window referenced by a set is to use the Change button after
selecting each individual group. This method must be used to select different columns for plotting.

Exporting Plots Automatically

You can automatically export script-generated plots to the printer or to disk using the Auto Print and Auto
Save options.

To automatically print plots:

1. Click the Auto Print check box.
2. Choose either Print Graphics or Print Layout from the pop-up menu immediately below Auto
Print.
3. Execute the script by clicking Run. The plots are automatically printed.

To automatically save plots:

1. Click the Auto Save check box.
2. Choose the type of graphic file to be created from the pop-up menu immediately below Auto Save
3. Enter a prefix to be used for the saved plot files. By default, the naming convention uses the word
Prefix followed by an underscore (_) and a number.

6.4 Generating Similar Plots 135

KaleidaGraph

4. Click Run to execute the script. KaleidaGraph displays a dialog allowing you to specify a location
for the saved plots.

Memory Considerations
If KaleidaGraph runs out of memory or you exceed the maximum number of open plot windows while
executing a script, the situation is handled based on the current state of the Automatically dispose of old plots
option in the Preferences dialog (File menu).

When this check box is selected, the oldest plot is discarded from memory, without asking for your approval.
If this check box is cleared, a dialog asks whether to save or dispose the oldest plot. If you choose not to
dispose of a plot to make memory available, the request that caused the out of memory condition is canceled

Saving and Loading Scripts

Once you have created a script, you can save it to disk by choosing either File > Export > Script or
File > Save Script.

If you used an existing plot for the Graphic Template, a plot file is created with the plot script document. In
the Windows version, the plot has the same name as the script, but with a .qpc file name extension. In the
Macintosh version, the plot’s file name is the first 25 characters of the script’s file name, followed by .plot.
Any future use of the script causes the plot file to open. Once a script and its template have been saved, the
plot must remain in the same folder as the script and it cannot be renamed. Otherwise, the script no longer
recognizes the plot document.

A default Script file is automatically opened each time KaleidaGraph is started. This way you can save your
plot script and have it opened the next time you use the program.

Custom Script files can be opened at any time from within KaleidaGraph by choosing File > Import > Script
or File > Open. The Plot Script window changes to reflect the contents of the new Script file.

6.4.4 Using Formula Scripts

The last feature that allows you to generate similar plots is a formula script. This feature has a command,
#SCRIPT, which has all of the same options as the Plot Script window. You can create a plot script from
scratch or you can use a command to open one that is saved.

The advantage of using a formula script is that you can open and modify data windows as part of the script.
You can also execute more than one plot script inside of a formula script.

The disadvantage of using this feature is that you cannot select a specific plot to be used as the template. It
must either be a Gallery plot type or a plot that is opened as part of a saved plot script.

For more information on formula scripts, refer to the following sections:

• Section 5.10.1 explains creating and entering formula scripts.
• Section 5.10.2 discusses the syntax for the #SCRIPT command and the rest of the formula script
commands.
• Section 5.10.3 contains some example formula scripts.

136 6.4 Generating Similar Plots

Working with Plots

Chapter 7

KaleidaGraph provides complete control over the appearance of your plots. This includes the legend, axes,
ticks, grid lines, and labels, in addition to how the data is represented on the plot.

This chapter explains how to:

• Edit the legend and legend text.
• Change the axis limits and scaling, as well as removing, exchanging, and linking axes.
• Control the display and number of tick marks.
• Control the display of grid lines.
• Control the display of axis labels.
• Change the marker, fill pattern, line style, line width, and variable color.
• Change the frame, grid, interior, and background colors of a plot.
• Resize the plot.
• Change the data in a plot.
• Customize Bar, Polar, and Pie plots.

7.1 Hiding, Displaying, and Closing Plots

The Windows menu contains four commands that can be used to hide and display plot windows. These
commands operate on either a single window or all of the plot windows at once.

7.1.1 Changing the Active Window

To make a plot window active, click anywhere in the desired plot window or choose Windows > Show Plot
and select its name.

7.1.2 Hiding Plot Windows

To hide a plot window, choose Windows > Hide Window and select its name. You can hide all open plots by
choosing Windows > Hide All Plots.

7.1 Hiding, Displaying, and Closing Plots 137

KaleidaGraph

7.1.3 Displaying Plot Windows

You can display a hidden plot window with the Show Plot command (Windows menu). The names of hidden
plot windows appear in italic. Select the name of the desired plot window and it is brought to the front. The
Show All Plots command can be used to display all of the plot windows at once.

7.1.4 Closing Plot Windows

You can use the Close All Plots command (Windows menu) to close all of the open plot windows at once.
Individual plot windows can be closed by choosing File > Close or clicking the close box of each window. A
dialog may be displayed, asking if you want to save the plot before closing.

Note: If you do not want to save the plot, this dialog can be avoided by pressing Shift while either clicking
the close box or choosing File > Close/NoSave.

You can have a maximum of 32 plots open at one time in KaleidaGraph. If you have 32 plots open and try to
create another plot, either the oldest plot is automatically disposed or the dialog in Figure 7-1 appears. The
Preferences dialog (File menu) contains an option that controls the automatic disposal of plots. If
Automatically dispose of old plots is selected, the oldest plot is discarded. If this check box is cleared, the
dialog is displayed.

Figure 7-1 Maximum Open Plots dialog

7.2 Changing the View of the Plot Window

KaleidaGraph provides several magnification levels for changing the view of the plot window. To change the
magnification of the plot, click the Zoom drop-down menu in the lower-left corner of the plot window and
choose the desired zoom level. The available zoom percentages are: 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 300, and
400%.

7.3 Displaying Rulers and Grids in the Plot Window

To turn the rulers and grids on and off in the plot window:
1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Ruler & Grids.
2. Click the appropriate check boxes to display the rulers, grids, or both.
3. Select the proper units that you want to use.
4. Click OK to return to the plot window.

138 7.2 Changing the View of the Plot Window

 Working with Plots

7.4 Modifying the Legend

The legend consists of a frame, the plot symbols, and the labels used to identify each variable in the plot. By
default, the labels are taken from the column names in the data window. The legend displays the variables in
the order they are selected for plotting.

7.4.1 Editing the Legend Frame and Color

Changing Foreground and Background Color
The Color icon on the toolbox consists of two sections: a foreground section (upper left) for setting the
foreground color and a background section (lower right) for setting the background color. When you select a
fill or pen pattern, the foreground color is applied to the black portion of the pattern and the background color
is applied to the white portion of the pattern.

To change the foreground or background color of the legend:

1. Click the legend to select it.
2. Click the foreground or background section of the Color icon. One of the following color palettes
appears with the current color choices.

Figure 7-2 Foreground Color palette Figure 7-3 Background Color palette
3. Select a different color from the palette.

Changing Fill and Pen Patterns

The Pattern icon on the toolbox consists of two sections: an inner section for setting the fill pattern and an outer
section for setting the pen pattern. The fill pattern controls the interior of the legend; the pen pattern controls
the legend frame.

You can change the fill or pen pattern by selecting a different pattern from the pop-up menu that appears when
you click the appropriate portion of the Pattern icon. Black portions of the pattern represent the foreground
color and white portions represent the background color.

7.4 Modifying the Legend 139

KaleidaGraph

To change the fill or pen pattern of the legend:

1. Click the legend to select it.
2. Click the interior or outer portion of the Pattern icon. One of the following pop-up menus appears
with the pattern choices.

Figure 7-4 Fill Pattern choices

Figure 7-5 Pen Pattern choices

3. Select a different pattern from the pop-up menu.

Changing Line Style and Width

The Style icon on the toolbox controls the line style and width of the legend frame. The left portion of the icon
controls the line style; the right portion controls the line width.

To change the line style or width of the legend frame:

1. Click the legend to select it.
2. Click the line style or line width portion of the Style icon. One of the following pop-up menus
appears with the available choices.

Figure 7-6 Line style pop-up menu Figure 7-7 Line width pop-up menu
3. Select a different line style or width from the pop-up menu. To completely remove the frame around
the legend, choose None from the Line Style pop-up menu.

140 7.4 Modifying the Legend

 Working with Plots

Setting Legend Frame Defaults

To make the current legend style the default, choose Plot > Define Layout. Choosing this command only
remembers the settings for this particular type of plot because each plot type in the Gallery menu can have its
own layout.

This information is saved as part of the Style file. You must save the Style file for the layout to be remembered
the next time you start KaleidaGraph.

7.4.2 Editing Legend Text

Editing Legend Text Attributes as a Group
The attributes of the legend text can be changed as a group by double-clicking any of the labels in the legend
with the Selection Arrow. A variation of the Edit String dialog, shown in Figure 7-8, appears which can only
be used to modify the attributes of the text labels. This dialog does not allow you to edit any of the text labels.
See Section 8.7.4 for more information on the commands available in this dialog.

Figure 7-8 Variation of Edit String dialog

Editing Individual Items in the Legend

The labels in the legend can be edited using the Text tool. Double-clicking a text label displays the Edit String
dialog. Edit the legend text as needed and click OK to return to the plot.

The labels in the legend can be moved to different locations using the Text tool. This is accomplished by
dragging a label to a new position with the Text tool. To delete an item in the legend, use the Eraser.

Changing Legend Text Color Independent of Variable Color

By default, the color of the legend text is linked to the variable color set in the Plot Style dialog. To make these
different colors, choose Format > Text Options and clear the Link Text To Variable Color check box. The
text and variable colors can now be set independently.

7.4 Modifying the Legend 141

KaleidaGraph

7.5 Modifying Axes

This section explains how to control the appearance of the axes. The Axis Options dialog, shown in Figure 7-9,
contains almost all of the options related to the display of the axes. Many of these settings are also available
directly from the toolbox. Section C.2 explains how to modify the axes using the toolbox.

Figure 7-9 Axis Options dialog

7.5.1 Setting the Axis Limits

The axis limits are based on the data used to create the plot. KaleidaGraph automatically calculates the
beginning and ending values and the placement of tick marks along the axes.

You can specify your own limits in the Axis Options dialog. The Min and Max fields determine the lowest
and highest values on the selected axis. The Anchor Tick field indicates the value from which all major tick
marks on a linear axis are calculated. The Anchor Tick field has no affect on axes with logarithmic scales.

To set the axis limits:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click Limits if it is not already selected. The Axis Options dialog changes to display the options
available for controlling axis limits.
4. Enter values for Min, Max, and Anchor Tick. To return to the original values calculated by
KaleidaGraph, click the Auto check boxes.
5. Click OK to return to the plot.

142 7.5 Modifying Axes

 Working with Plots

7.5.2 Selecting Linear or Log Scaling

The numeric axes in KaleidaGraph can have either linear or logarithmic scaling. When Linear scaling is
selected, the axis is divided into equal sections. When Log scaling is used, each increment of the axis is a
power of 10. Partial decades are allowed when using the log scale.

To change the scaling of an axis:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Choose Linear or Log from the pop-up menu beneath the menu used to select the axis.
Note: The Min value in the Axis Options dialog must be greater than zero to use log scaling. If you
try to use non-positive limits, a message appears and the axis scaling reverts to linear.
4. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.5.3 Hiding an Axis

It is possible to hide each of the four axes in a plot using the No Axis option in the Axis Options dialog.

To hide an axis:
1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click the No Axis check box.
4. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.5.4 Exchanging Axes

The Exchange X and Y option in the Axis Options dialog can be used to swap the X and Y axes of a plot.
When this check box is selected, the X and X2 axes switch position with the Y and Y2 axes.

Note: Using this option does not change the independent and dependent variables. It only changes their
position in the plot. This option has no affect on Double Y, Double X, Double XY, Bar, Polar, and Pie
plots.

To exchange the X and Y axes:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Click the Exchange X and Y check box.
3. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.5.5 Reversing the Variables on an Axis

You can control whether the variables are plotted in ascending or descending order along an axis. By selecting
the Reverse check box in the Axis Options dialog, variables are plotted in descending order along the selected
axis.

7.5 Modifying Axes 143

KaleidaGraph

To reverse an axis on the plot:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click the Reverse check box.
4. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.5.6 Linking a Second Axis

You can control the display of the tick marks and labels on the X2 and Y2 axes using the Link To pop-up
menu. This pop-up menu only appears in the Axis Options dialog when the X2 or Y2 axis is selected.

Note: The Link To pop-up menu is not displayed for certain axes in Double Y, Double X, and Double XY
plots because they are independent of the main axis.

To link the X2 or Y2 axis:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the X2 or Y2 axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. From the Link To pop-up menu, select how the axis should be linked. The options include:
• No Ticks, No Labels - The X2 or Y2 axis does not have any ticks or labels.
• Axis, No Labels - The X2 or Y2 axis has the same tick marks as the main axis, but does not
have any labels.
• Axis, Labels - The X2 or Y2 axis has the same tick marks and labels as the main axis.
• Custom Axis, Custom Labels - Depending on the scaling of the main axis, the X2 or Y2
axis is linked by either a linear or exponential equation. The equation is entered into one of the
dialogs shown in Figure 7-10. The tick marks and labels are calculated and displayed on the X2
or Y2 axis.

Figure 7-10 Define Axis Formula dialogs

4. Click OK to return to the plot.

144 7.5 Modifying Axes

 Working with Plots

7.5.7 Changing Axis Thickness

To change the thickness of the axes:
1. Choose Format > Plot Extras.
2. To increase the thickness, change the Frame Thickness to 200, 300, or 400%.

Note: Depending on the value entered, you may not notice the change on the screen; however, there
will be a difference when the plot is printed.
3. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.6 Modifying Tick Marks

This section explains how to change the appearance of the tick marks. The Axis Options dialog, shown in
Figure 7-11, contains almost all of the options related to the display of the tick marks. Many of these settings
are also available directly from the toolbox. Section C.2.4 explains how to modify the tick marks using the
toolbox.

Figure 7-11 Axis Options dialog

7.6.1 Changing the Display of Tick Marks

The major and minor ticks can be displayed inside, outside, or on both sides of the axis. You can also choose
not to display them at all.

To control how the major and minor ticks are displayed:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click Ticks. The Axis Options dialog changes to display the options available for controlling major
and minor ticks.

7.6 Modifying Tick Marks 145

KaleidaGraph

4. Choose In, Out, Both, or None from the pop-up menus below Major and Minor to specify how the
major and minor ticks should be displayed.
5. Click OK to return to the plot.

Figure 7-12 shows how the tick marks appear when you select (in order): In, Out, Both, and None for the X
and Y axes.

Figure 7-12 Tick mark display

7.6.2 Changing the Number of Tick Marks

When Linear scaling is selected for an axis, the number of major tick marks is controlled by the pop-up menu
to the right of Major in the Axis Options dialog. They can either be calculated automatically or set to a
specific number.

To change the number of major ticks:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click Ticks. The Axis Options dialog changes to display the options available for controlling major
and minor ticks.
4. Choose Auto or Fixed # from the pop-up menu to the right of Major.
5. If Fixed # is selected, enter the desired number of divisions in the field below the pop-up menu.
6. Click OK to return to the plot.

The number of minor tick marks is controlled in the same manner as major ticks. You can either specify a fixed
number or let KaleidaGraph calculate the number of minor ticks.

7.6.3 Changing the Tick Mark Interval

When Linear scaling is selected for an axis, KaleidaGraph automatically determines the number of major
tick marks. Using the Axis Options command, it is possible to place the tick marks at specific intervals along
an axis.

To change the interval between major tick marks:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click Limits if it is not already selected. The Axis Options dialog changes to display the options
available for controlling axis limits.
4. Enter a value in the Anchor Tick field. The intervals are calculated from the Anchor Tick value.
5. Click Ticks.

146 7.6 Modifying Tick Marks

 Working with Plots

6. Choose Interval from the pop-up menu to the right of Major and enter the desired interval in the
field below it. For dates, enter the desired number of days for the interval. For time data, use a
D:H:M:S.S format for entering the interval.
7. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.6.4 Changing Tick Mark Length or Thickness

To change the length or thickness of the tick marks:
1. Choose Format > Plot Extras.
2. To change the length, edit the Inside and Outside values for Major or Minor.
3. To increase the thickness, change the Tick Thickness to 200, 300, or 400%.

Note: Depending on the value entered, you may not notice the change on the screen; however, there
will be a difference when the plot is printed.
4. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.7 Modifying Grid Lines

This section explains how to control the appearance of the grid lines. The Axis Options dialog, shown in
Figure 7-13, contains most of the options related to the display of the grid lines. Many of these settings are
also available directly from the toolbox. Section C.2.5 explains how to modify the grid lines using the toolbox

Figure 7-13 Axis Options dialog

7.7.1 Controlling the Display of Grid Lines

Grid lines can be displayed at each of the major and minor tick marks. The lines can be solid, gray (dotted),
or not displayed at all. Section 7.10 explains how to change the color of the grid lines.

To control how the grid lines are displayed:

7.7 Modifying Grid Lines 147

KaleidaGraph

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click Grids. The Axis Options dialog changes to display the options available for controlling major
and minor grids.
4. Choose Solid, Gray, or None from the pop-up menus to the right of Major and Minor to specify
how the major and minor grids should be displayed.
5. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.7.2 Changing Grid Line Thickness

To change the thickness of the grid lines:
1. Choose Format > Plot Extras.
2. To increase the thickness, change the Grid Thickness to 200, 300, or 400%.

Note: Depending on the value entered, you may not notice the change on the screen; however, there
will be a difference when the plot is printed.
3. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.8 Modifying Axis Labels

This section explains how to control the frequency and format of the axis labels. The Axis Options dialog,
shown in Figure 7-14, contains almost all of the options related to the number and format of the axis labels.
Many of these settings are also available directly from the toolbox. Section C.2.6 explains how to modify the
axis labels using the toolbox.

Note: For information on changing the text attributes of the labels, see Section 8.7.2.

Figure 7-14 Axis Options dialog

148 7.8 Modifying Axis Labels

 Working with Plots

7.8.1 Controlling the Frequency of Axis Labels

KaleidaGraph automatically calculates the frequency of axis labels. The frequency depends on the number of
major tick marks. You can specify a different frequency or you can choose to remove the axis labels from the
plot.

To control the frequency of the axis labels:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Axis Options.
2. Choose the appropriate axis from the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the dialog.
3. Click Labels. The Axis Options dialog changes to display the options available for specifying label
frequency.
4. Choose Auto, Every Nth, or None from the pop-up menu to specify how often the labels should be
displayed. If you select Every Nth, enter a number in the field below the menu.
5. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.8.2 Formatting Axis Labels

The format of the axis labels can also be controlled using the Axis Options dialog. Clicking the Format button
(when Labels is selected) displays a dialog similar to Figure 7-15. The same dialog can be displayed using
any one of four commands from the Format menu: X Label Format, Y Label Format, Y2 Label Format,
and X2 Label Format.

Note: This dialog does not have any affect if the data has a Text format in the data window.

Figure 7-15 Label Format dialog

To change the format of the axis labels:

1. Click Labels and then click Format in the Axis Options dialog. You can also choose the appropriate
Label Format command (X, Y, X2, or Y2) from the Format menu. The Label Format dialog is
displayed using either method.

7.8 Modifying Axis Labels 149

KaleidaGraph

2. Make your selections in the dialog.

3. Click OK to return to the plot window.

7.9 Modifying Lines, Markers, and Fill Patterns

This section explains how to control the display of the data in the plot window. The Plot Style dialog, shown
in Figure 7-16, contains most of the options available for the display of the plot variables. Many of these
settings are also available directly from the toolbox. Section C.3 explains how to modify the plot style using
the toolbox.

Figure 7-16 Plot Style dialog

7.9.1 Selecting Variables in the Plot Style Dialog

Before variables can be modified, they need to be selected in the Plot Style dialog. Each variable is
independently controlled in this dialog.

To select variables for editing in the Plot Style dialog:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Plot Style.
2. Use the and buttons to locate the desired variable. The name of the current variable appears
to the right of these buttons.

150 7.9 Modifying Lines, Markers, and Fill Patterns

 Working with Plots

Note: The Tab and Down Arrow keys can be used to move to the next variable. You can go to the
previous variable using Shift+Tab or the Up Arrow key. The Left Arrow key takes you to
the first variable; the Right Arrow key takes you to the last variable.

7.9.2 Changing Marker Type, Size, or Number of Markers

Most of the plots have the ability to display markers on the plot. The exceptions are the Histogram, Stack Bar,
Stack Column, and Pie plots. The Plot Style dialog controls the type, size, and number of markers displayed
in the plot.

To change the marker type, size, or number of markers:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Plot Style.
2. Select the variable to be edited. See Section 7.9.1 if you are unsure of how to do this.
3. To change the marker type, click one of the symbols below Marker. The first six markers in the left
column are transparent; all of the others are opaque. The active marker has a box around it.
4. To change the size of the marker, edit the value in the Marker Size field.
5. To change the number of markers displayed, make a selection from the Show Markers pop-up
menu. You can choose whether all, a fixed number, a percentage, every Nth, or none of the markers
are displayed on the plot. The current setting is preceded by a check mark.
Note: Scatter plots always show all of the markers. Use a Line plot to show fewer markers.
6. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.9.3 Selecting Fill Patterns

All of the plots have the ability to have a fill pattern displayed for the variable. For some plots, like the Line
plot, this is only possible if Bar is selected as the marker type in the Plot Style dialog.

Note: It is not possible to assign a fill pattern to the markers.

To change the fill pattern:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Plot Style.
2. Select the variable to be edited. See Section 7.9.1 if you are unsure of how to do this.
3. Click one of the patterns below Fill Pattern. The active fill pattern has a box around it.
4. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.9.4 Changing Appearance of Variable and Curve Fit Lines

Line, Double Y, Double X, Double XY, High/Low, Step, Probability, X-Y Probability, Horizontal Bar,
Column, and Function plots can use a line to represent a plotted variable. Curve fits can be applied to all of
these plots as well as Scatter plots. The style, width, and color of the variable or curve fit lines can be set using
the Plot Style dialog.

Note: Variable and curve fit lines are controlled independently of each other. Changing the variable color
also changes the marker color. The associated legend text is also changed if Link Text To Variable
Color is selected in the Text Options dialog (Format menu).

7.9 Modifying Lines, Markers, and Fill Patterns 151

KaleidaGraph

To change the line style, width, or color of variable or curve fit lines:
1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Plot Style.
2. Select the variable to be edited. See Section 7.9.1 if you are unsure of how to do this.
3. If changes are being made to the variable line, proceed to the next step. Otherwise, click Curve Fit
to make changes to the curve fit line.
4. To change the line style, select a different option from the Style column. Choose None from this
list to hide the line. The current style is preceded by a check mark.
5. To change the line width, select a different option from the Width column. The current width is
preceded by a check mark.
6. To change the color, select a different color from the palette. The current color has a white square
around it.
7. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.10 Changing Plot Color

This section explains how to change the frame, grid, interior, and background colors for a plot. These settings
are also available directly from the toolbox. Section C.4 explains how to modify the colors using the toolbox

To change the plot colors:

1. Choose Format > Plot Color or click the Color button in the Axis Options dialog. The dialog in
Figure 7-17 appears using either method.

Figure 7-17 Plot Color dialog

2. Click one of the buttons and select a color from the palette for that item. If None is selected for the
interior or background, that particular portion of the plot is transparent.
3. Click OK to return to the plot.

152 7.10 Changing Plot Color

 Working with Plots

7.11 Resizing the Plot

There are two methods available for changing the size of the plot: the Set Plot Size command and the Selection
Arrow. Changing the size of the plot has no affect on the size of the plot window.

7.11.1 Set Plot Size Command

You can use the Set Plot Size command (Plot menu) to specify the exact dimensions for the axes and frame,
as well as the position of the axis origin.

To set the size of the plot:

1. Choose Plot > Set Plot Size. The dialog in Figure 7-18 appears.

Figure 7-18 Set Plot Size dialog

2. Click Axis Size, Frame Size, or both and enter the desired X and Y dimensions.
• If Axis Size is selected, the frame is scaled proportionally to the new dimensions.
• If Frame Size is selected, the axis is scaled proportionally to the new dimensions.
• If both are selected, the axis and frame sizes are set independently. Be careful; this can cause
parts of the plot to be placed outside of the plot frame.
Note: Typing the word auto allows a floating dimension, while specifying the size of the other
dimension. This allows the plot to remain proportional to its original size.
3. If necessary, click the Axis Origin check box and specify where to place the upper-left corner of the
axes.
4. Click OK. The plot is resized based on the new settings.

If the values in the Frame Size field are larger than the Paper dimensions, a dotted line is displayed to
represent the printable area of the paper. You can hide these lines by clearing the Show the plot paper
boundary check box in the Preferences dialog (File menu).

7.11 Resizing the Plot 153

KaleidaGraph

7.11.2 Using the Selection Arrow

The Selection Arrow can be used to manually resize the plot or plot frame.

To resize the plot:

1. Click one of the axes with the Selection Arrow. Object handles appear at each corner of the plot.
2. Drag one of the handles to a new position. As you drag, a dialog appears in the upper-left corner of
the plot window. This dialog (shown below) contains the current plot dimensions and axis origin
(offset).

Note: To resize the plot proportionally about its center, press Alt (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh) when dragging an object handle. By pressing Shift as you drag, you can
constrain the plot to a square.
3. Release the mouse button when the axes are the desired size.

To resize the plot frame:

1. Locate the lower-right corner of the plot frame. You can use the scroll bars or increase the size of the
plot window to find it.
2. Using the Selection Arrow, click the Size box ( ) in the lower-right corner.
3. Drag the box to resize the plot frame. As you drag, a dialog appears in the upper-left corner of the
plot window to display the current dimensions.
4. Release the mouse button when the plot frame is the desired size. The size of the plot changes
proportionally to the new size of the frame.

7.12 Extracting Data from a Plot

When you save a plot with data, the data windows used to create it are archived with the plot. This enables
you to save the graph and data in a single file instead of saving them separately. The data is not saved with the
plot if either of the following occurs:
• The data windows used to create the plot are closed before the plot is saved.
• The plot is saved by choosing File > Export > Plot w/o Data.
The next time the plot is opened, you can make any necessary changes to the plot. If you want to modify the
data, it needs to be extracted from the plot. This is accomplished by choosing Plot > Extract Data or clicking
the Find Data button ( ) in the plot window. Once the data is extracted, it can be modified, saved to disk, or
used to create new plots.

Note: The Extract Data command is unavailable if the plot does not have archived data associated with it,
the plot was just created, or the data has already been extracted.

154 7.12 Extracting Data from a Plot

 Working with Plots

To extract a data set:

1. Make a plot window the active window.

2. Choose Plot > Extract Data or click the Find Data button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the plot
window. The data used to create the plot is displayed. Figure 7-19 shows an example of an extracted
data set.

Figure 7-19 Extracted data window

The title of the extracted data window begins with the same name as the original data file. Additionally, a date
and time stamp is appended to the name, identifying when the data was archived in the plot.

Note: If you attempt to close an extracted data window, the message in Figure 7-20 appears. If you click OK,
the plot loses its link with the original data.

Figure 7-20 Warning dialog

7.13 Updating Plotted Data

The Plot menu contains two commands that can be used to update the data in a plot: Auto Link and Update
Plot. Both of these commands operate in a similar manner. They cause the current plot to be re-created to
reflect any changes in its data. Curve fits and error bars are also recalculated based on any changes in the data

The difference between the two commands is that Auto Link revises the plot after each individual change in
the data while Update Plot only causes an update when you choose the command. Clicking the Update Plot
button ( ) in the data window performs the same function as choosing the Update Plot command.

7.13 Updating Plotted Data 155

KaleidaGraph

These commands are useful if you have a saved plot and need to add or edit points. You can extract the data
from the plot (using either the Extract Data command or the Find Data button), modify the data, and use the
Auto Link or Update Plot commands to revise the plot.

To update plots using the Auto Link command:

1. Open or activate the plot to be updated.

2. Choose Plot > Extract Data or click the Find Data button ( ) to display the data used to create the
plot.
3. Turn on Auto Link in the Plot menu.
4. Modify the data and move to another cell. After each data value is modified, the plot is redrawn to
show the changes.

To update plots using the Update Plot command:

1. Open or activate the plot to be updated.

2. Choose Plot > Extract Data or click the Find Data button ( ) to display the data used to create the
plot.
3. Make any changes to the extracted data.
4. Choose Plot > Update Plot or click the Update Plot button ( ) in the data window to redraw the
plot.

7.14 Plotting Additional Data

There may be times when you want to add additional variables to an existing plot. Instead of creating the plot
from scratch, you can open a plot and add new data to it.

Note: If you just want to add a few points to an existing curve, refer to Section 7.13. The steps below are for
adding a new variable to the plot.

To add additional variables to a plot:

1. Open or activate the plot which will have the new data plotted.

2. Choose Plot > Extract Data or click the Find Data button ( ) to display the data used to create the
plot.
3. Open the new data or add it to an existing data window.
4. Switch back to the plot and choose Gallery > Template.
5. Select all of the data to be plotted (including the data from the original plot) and click New Plot.

A new plot will be created that includes the additional data. Any curve fits and error bars from the original plot
will be applied to the new plot.

156 7.14 Plotting Additional Data

 Working with Plots

7.15 Customizing Bar Plots

This section explains some of the special features associated with Bar plots. This includes changing the
spacing between bars, displaying value labels, and creating Line/Column plots.

7.15.1 Changing Bar Attributes

The Plot Extras command (Format menu) contains four options that affect the appearance of the bars. For
details on changing the fill pattern in the bars, see Section 7.9.3.

To change the attributes of the bars:

1. Choose Format > Plot Extras. The dialog in Figure 7-21 appears.

Figure 7-21 Plot Extras dialog

2. To change the spacing between the bars, edit the Column Offset percentage. Entering a value of 0%
removes all space between the bars; a value of 100% displays the bars as spikes.
3. To remove the frame surrounding each bar, clear the Draw Column Frame check box.
4. To make the frame the same color as the fill pattern, clear the Black Column Frame check box.
5. To use a baseline of 1.0 for log scales, select the Adjust Log Baseline check box. Otherwise, the
minimum axis limit is used for the baseline.
6. Click OK to return to the plot.

7.15 Customizing Bar Plots 157

KaleidaGraph

7.15.2 Adding Value Labels

Labels that display the value of each bar can be added to Bar plots. For Horizontal Bar and Column plots, the
label is placed at the end of each bar. For Stack Bar and Stack Column plots, labels are placed on each section
of the bar.

To add value labels to a Bar plot:

1. Select the plot which will have the value labels added.
2. Turn on Add Values in the Plot menu. The actual values of each bar are added to the plot.
Figure 7-22 shows a Bar plot that contains value labels. These labels can be moved individually with the Text
tool or as a group with the Selection Arrow. The Value Label Format command (Format menu) can be used
to change the numeric format of the labels.

Note: Any time the plot is redrawn, the value labels are placed back at their original position. If you are
displaying only a few of the labels, use the Text tool to add them to the plot. You can place them
exactly where you want and you do not have to worry about the label moving when the plot is redrawn

1966 (K) 1967 (K) 1968 (K)

78.5
Jan 57.7
79.8

74.8
Feb 60.2
82.8

116
March 89.2
124

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Figure 7-22 Bar plot with value labels

To change the text attributes of the value labels:

1. Double-click one of the text labels with the Selection Arrow. The Edit String dialog appears.
2. Make any changes to the label attributes. The options in this dialog are covered in Section 8.7.4.
Setting default attributes is covered in Section 8.7.5.
3. Click OK to update the value labels.

158 7.15 Customizing Bar Plots

 Working with Plots

7.15.3 Adding Lines to Bar and Column Plots

Horizontal Bar and Column plots can have lines added to create Line/Column plots.

To make a Line/Column plot:

1. Create a Horizontal Bar or Column plot, including the variable to be displayed as a line. Figure 7-23
shows a sample Column plot with two variables plotted.
2. Choose Plot > Plot Style. Use the and buttons to locate the variable to be displayed as a line
3. Select a Fill Pattern of Line, as well as the line style, line width, and number of markers to be
displayed.
4. Click OK and the plot updates to display a Line/Column plot. Figure 7-24 shows the sample plot
after displaying the second variable as a line.

1967 (K) 1968 (K) 1967 (K) 1968 (K)

160 160

120 120

80 80

40 40

0 0
Jan March May July Jan March May July

Figure 7-23 Sample Column plot Figure 7-24 Plot displaying variable as a line

7.16 Customizing Polar Plots

There are two commands that can be used to change the appearance of Polar plots: Axis Options (Plot menu)
and Polar Options (Format menu). Axis Options controls the display of tick marks, grid lines, and axis labels
while Polar Options controls the grid type, reference angle, and direction.

7.16.1 Changing the Display of Tick Marks, Grid Lines, and Axis Labels
The angular (Ø or X) and the radial (R or Y) axes can be modified using the Axis Options command. Choosing
Plot > Axis Options displays the dialog in Figure 7-25. The options for each of the axes are discussed in the
following paragraphs.

7.16 Customizing Polar Plots 159

KaleidaGraph

Figure 7-25 Axis Options dialog

The angular axis is controlled by the X axis settings in the Axis Options dialog. You can use the options for
Ticks, Grids, and Labels to modify this axis. You can also use the No Axis option to remove the angular axis

The radial axis is controlled by the Y axis settings in the Axis Options dialog. You can use the options for
Limits, Ticks, Grids, and Labels to modify the axis. You can also choose between Linear and Log scaling,
or remove the axis with the No Axis option.

7.16.2 Setting the Grid Type, Reference Angle, and Direction

Polar plots have several unique options that control their appearance. These options include the grid type, data
format, reference angle, and direction. All of these options are controlled using the Polar Options command
(Format menu).

To change the Polar plot options:

1. Choose Format > Polar Options. The dialog in Figure 7-26 is displayed.

160 7.16 Customizing Polar Plots

 Working with Plots

Figure 7-26 Polar Options dialog

2. Make any changes to the settings in this dialog.
3. Click OK to return to the plot.

Figure 7-27 shows a Polar plot displayed in a Clockwise direction, with a circular grid and a 45o Reference
Angle. Figure 7-28 shows a Polar plot displayed on a square grid.

Radius Radius
3
300 330
10 m
3 0
8m 8 m3
6 m3
4 m3 4m
3
3 30
2m
3
0m 0 m3
210 60 3
4m

180 90 8 m3

150 120 8 m3 4 m3 0 m3 4 m3 8 m3

Figure 7-27 Polar plot on circular grid Figure 7-28 Polar plot on square grid

7.16 Customizing Polar Plots 161

KaleidaGraph

7.17 Customizing Pie Charts

This section explains some of the special features associated with Pie charts. This includes exploding a
segment of the chart, removing the frame, and displaying value labels.

7.17.1 Exploding a Pie Chart

A common method of emphasizing one segment of a Pie chart is to drag that segment away from the chart.
This is called an exploded Pie chart.

To move a pie segment:

1. Using the Selection Arrow, click twice on the segment to be moved. The first click selects the entire
pie. The second click selects the individual segment.
2. Drag the segment away from the rest of the pie. Do not worry about what direction you drag, the
segment only moves along its radius. Figure 7-29 shows an example of an exploded Pie chart.

1968 (K) Jan

Feb
March
April
May
June
July
Aug
Sept
Oct
Nov
Dec

Figure 7-29 Exploded Pie chart

7.17.2 Removing the Frame Surrounding each Slice

There are two methods available to remove the frame that surrounds each piece of the pie. The first is to set
the Frame color to None in the Plot Color dialog (Format menu). The second method is to make the change
directly from the toolbox.

When the entire Pie is selected, the toolbox displays the icons shown to the right. Click the last
icon to display the pop-up menu shown below. Turn on No Frame in the menu to remove the
frame.

162 7.17 Customizing Pie Charts

 Working with Plots

7.17.3 Adding Value Labels

Labels that display the percentage of each slice relative to the entire pie can be added to Pie charts.

To add value labels to a Pie chart:

1. Select the Pie chart which will have the value labels added.
2. Turn on Add Values in the Plot menu. The percentage values of each pie slice are added to the plot

Figure 7-30 shows a Pie chart that contains value labels. These labels can be moved individually with the Text
tool or as a group with the Selection Arrow. The Value Label Format command (Format menu) can be used
to change the numeric format of the labels.

Note: Any time the plot is redrawn, the value labels are placed back at their original position. If you are
displaying only a few of the labels, use the Text tool to add them to the plot. You can place them
exactly where you want and do not have to worry about the label moving when the plot is redrawn.

6.44% 5.38% Jan

5.58% Feb
8.43%
8.35% March
April
9.31% May
June
10.7% July
8.92% Aug
Sept
9.37% Oct
9.07% Nov
9.26% 9.17% Dec

Figure 7-30 Pie chart with value labels

To change the attributes of the value labels:

1. Double-click one of the text labels with the Selection Arrow. The Edit String dialog appears.
2. Make any changes to the label attributes. The options in this dialog are covered in Section 8.7.4.
Setting default attributes is covered in Section 8.7.5.
3. Click OK to update the value labels.

7.17 Customizing Pie Charts 163

KaleidaGraph

164 7.17 Customizing Pie Charts

Working with Plot Tools and
Objects
Chapter 8

This chapter covers:

• Using the tools and icons displayed on the toolbox.
• Selecting, moving, resizing, and deleting objects.
• Aligning objects.
• Grouping and ungrouping objects.
• Sending objects up, down, to the front, and to the back.
• Creating and editing text labels.
• Creating and editing lines, arrows, rectangles, ovals, polygons, arcs, and Bezier curves.

8.1 The KaleidaGraph Toolbox

The toolbox, shown in Figure 8-1, is displayed whenever a plot or layout window is
active. It contains all of the plot tools, as well as a number of icons that can be used to
quickly make changes in the plot or layout window. When switching between plot and
layout windows, the toolbox remembers the last tool selected for each window.

You can place the toolbox anywhere on the desktop or you can hide it by clicking its
close box. Once the toolbox is hidden, pressing a key on the keyboard makes the
toolbox visible.

8.1.1 Plot Tools

Selection Arrow
The Selection Arrow is used to select tools, commands, and objects in the plot or layout
window. Sections 8.6.1–8.6.3 discuss editing objects with the Selection Arrow.
Resizing the plot with this tool is covered in Section 7.11.2. Figure 8-1 Toolbox
The Selection Arrow is the default tool in the toolbox. It is automatically selected whenever a new plot is
created. Also, most tool selections revert to the Selection Arrow after being used. This tool is used to select,
move, and resize objects in the plot or layout window. Once an object is selected, you can copy, duplicate, or
delete it.

8.1 The KaleidaGraph Toolbox 165

KaleidaGraph

Text Tool
This tool is used to add and modify plot labels. Clicking this tool and holding down the mouse button displays
a pop-up menu that can be used to edit selected text labels. Using the Text tool is covered in Section 8.7.

Line/Arrow Tool
This tool is used to draw lines or arrows. Clicking this tool and holding down the mouse button displays a
pop-up menu that contains the lines and arrows that can be drawn. Creating lines and arrows is discussed in
Section 8.8.1.

Object Tool
Clicking the object tool (to the right of the Line/Arrow tool) displays the pop-up menu shown below. This
menu contains six drawing tools that can be used to create various shapes. Creating and editing shapes is
covered in Section 8.8.

Box Tool
This tool is used to draw square and rectangular boxes. Creating boxes is discussed in Section 8.8.2.

Rounded Rectangle Tool

This tool is used to draw squares and rectangles with rounded corners. Creating rectangles with round corners
is discussed in Section 8.8.2.

Oval Tool
This tool is used to draw ovals and circles. Creating ovals and circles is discussed in Section 8.8.2.

Polygon Tool
This tool is used to draw polygons (multi-sided objects). Creating polygons is discussed in Section 8.8.3.

Arc Tool
This tool is used to create arcs. Creating arcs is discussed in Section 8.8.2.

Bezier Curve Tool

This tool is used to draw Bezier curves. Creating Bezier curves is covered in Section 8.8.4.

Table Tool
This tool is used to create tables of data. The use of this tool is covered in Section 8.2.

166 8.1 The KaleidaGraph Toolbox

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

Eraser Tool
The Eraser is used to delete labels and objects from the plot or layout window. Grouped items, such as the
legend and axis labels, can also be removed using this tool. The Eraser cannot remove any markers or lines
that represent plotted data.

Identify Tool
This tool is used to display the coordinates of points on a plot. The use of this tool is discussed in Section 8.3

Align Tool
This tool is used to align a group of selected objects. Aligning objects is covered in Section 8.6.9.

Data Selection Tool

This tool is used to select a portion of the data on the plot for further plotting and analysis. The use of this tool
is discussed in Section 8.4.

Zoom Selection Tool

This tool is used to quickly change the axis limits. The use of this tool is covered in Section 8.5.

8.1.2 Toolbox Icons

The bottom portion of the toolbox contains icons that vary according to what is currently selected. Clicking
any of the icons displays a pop-up menu that can be used to quickly edit an item’s attributes, without having
to choose a command or display a dialog.

When a Shape or the Legend Is Selected

The Color icon controls the foreground and background color of the selected object. The Pattern icon controls
the fill and pen patterns. The Style icon sets the line style and width for selected objects. For more information
on using these icons, see Section 8.9.

Color Icon

Pattern Icon
Style Icon

When the Plot Frame Is Selected

The Color icon controls the interior and background colors for the plot. The Transparent icon allows you to
leave the interior or background transparent. For more information on using these icons, see Section C.4.

Color Icon
No Color Icon

8.1 The KaleidaGraph Toolbox 167

KaleidaGraph

When an Axis Is Selected

The Color icon determines the frame and grid colors. The first of the two Axis Options icons allows you to
hide the selected axis or exchange the X and Y axes. The second Axis Options icon controls axis scaling, tick
mark display, grid line display, and the format of the axis labels. If the X2 or Y2 axis is selected, you can also
link the axes. The interior of the icon displays which axis is currently selected. The Color icon is covered in
Section C.4; the Axis Options icons are covered in Section C.2.

Color Icon

Axis Options Icons

When a Marker Is Selected in the Legend

The Variable Color icon controls the color of the variable. The two icons in the middle control the variable
markers and fill patterns. The Marker icon determines the marker type, size, and number of markers displayed.
The Fill Pattern icon controls the fill pattern. The Style icon determines the variable’s line style and width. For
more information on using these icons, see Section C.3.

Variable Color Icon

Marker Icon Fill Pattern Icon

Style Icon

168 8.1 The KaleidaGraph Toolbox

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

8.2 Using the Table Tool

The Table tool is used to create tables that have up to 16 columns and 64 rows. Clicking in the plot or layout
window after selecting this tool displays the dialog in Figure 8-2. Use this dialog to create and edit tables of
data within your plots.

Figure 8-2 Edit Table dialog

8.2.1 Creating and Editing Tables

Tables can be added to any plot or layout window in KaleidaGraph. Tables can be created by either using the
Table tool or by pasting text from the Clipboard. Tables are also created to display the results of General and
Polynomial curve fits when Display Equation is turned on in the Plot menu.

To create a table:
1. Select the Table tool from the toolbox.
2. Click anywhere in the plot or layout window to display the Edit Table dialog.
3. Customize the appearance of the table by adding rows, adding columns, or applying style changes,
using the commands covered in Section 8.2.2. Then, type data into the cells.
4. Click OK to return to the plot or layout window. Figure 8-3 shows a sample table created with the
Table tool.

8.2 Using the Table Tool 169

KaleidaGraph

Statistics for the Example #1 data set

Test #1 Test #2 Test #3
Minimum 0.5 0.55000001 2.05
Maximum 6.8000002 6.1999998 7.6999998
Sum 87.43 59.07 96.57
Points 25 25 25
Mean 3.4972 2.3628 3.8628
Median 3.5 1.84 3.3400002
RMS 3.9020287 2.8699568 4.192261
Std Deviation 1.7664171 1.6626498 1.6626498
Variance 3.1202294 2.7644043 2.7644043
Std Error 0.35328342 0.33252996 0.33252996
Skewness -0.013367556 0.84262208 0.84262208
Kurtosis -1.1877315 -0.402795 -0.40279496
Figure 8-3 Sample table
To edit a table:
1. Double-click the table with the Selection Arrow. The Edit Table dialog appears, displaying the
contents of the table.
2. Make the necessary changes to the table, using the commands covered in Section 8.2.2.
3. Click OK to return to the plot or layout window.

8.2.2 Table Tool Commands

File Menu
• New - This command deletes any existing cells and creates a new table.
• Open - This command loads a text file into the table. A tab in the text forces the data into the next
cell. A return in the text forces the data into the next row of the table.
• Set Defaults - This command saves the current table settings as the default. For information on
setting the defaults, see Section 8.2.3.
• Exit - This command closes the dialog. Clicking OK performs the same function.
Edit Menu
• Cut - This command deletes the contents of the selected cells and places them on the Clipboard.
• Copy - This command copies the selection to the Clipboard, replacing the previous contents, if any
• Paste - This command places the Clipboard’s contents into the selected cell positions. If necessary,
this command adds cells to the table. A tab in the text forces the data following it into the next cell.
A return in the text causes the data following it into the next row of the table.
• Clear - This command deletes the contents of the selected cells. This command operates similar to
Cut, except that the contents of the Clipboard are not disturbed.

170 8.2 Using the Table Tool

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

• Copy Table - This command copies the table to the Clipboard as an image, for inclusion in another
program.
• Copy Style - This command copies the style of the current selection. This allows you to quickly
apply a particular style to sections of the table. If necessary, this command adds cells to the table
when the style is pasted.
• Select All - This command selects the entire contents of the table.
• Insert Rows - This command inserts a row above the current selection.
• Insert Columns - This command inserts a column to the left of the current selection.
• Delete Rows - This command deletes any selected rows. The entire row is deleted using this
command.
• Delete Columns - This command deletes any selected columns. The entire column is deleted using
this command.
Format Menu
• Left, Right, or Center Justification - These commands control the alignment of the cell’s contents
• Cell Horizontal Line - This command sets the line width and color of the line on the bottom of any
selected cells.
• Cell Vertical Line - This command sets the line width and color of the line on the right side of any
selected cells.
Note: If None is selected for the line width, a vertical line is not displayed between adjacent cells.
The cells are treated as a single unit. Type the string in the leftmost cell and choose the
justification. The contents appear across all cells in the unit. This technique is used to
generate labels that span multiple cells.
• Cell Background - This command sets a background pattern and color within selected cells. If you
want a solid color, choose 100% Fill.
• Frame Style - This command sets the style of the table’s frame.
• Frame Color - This command sets the color of the table’s frame.

8.2 Using the Table Tool 171

KaleidaGraph

• Options - This command displays the dialog in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Format Options dialog

- Minimum Row Size, Minimum Column Size - The values entered in these fields determine
the minimum row height and column width (one pixel equals 1/72 inch).
- Pack Rows, Pack Columns - Packing minimizes the white space within cells (horizontally with
Pack Rows and vertically with Pack Columns).
- Fixed Row Height, Fixed Column Width - These options control how much white space exists
within cells. When these check boxes are selected, the row or column sizes are the same
throughout the table.
Font Menu
The Font menu contains all of the fonts that are currently installed. Choosing a different font from this menu
changes the font for the entire cell, even if only a portion of the cell is selected. If you need to use a second
font in the cell, use the Alt. Font command in the Style menu.

Size Menu
This menu contains the sizes that are available for displaying fonts. You can specify a size that is not listed
using the Other command in this menu. The font size is applied to the entire cell, even if only a portion of the
cell is selected.

Style Menu
The Style menu is divided into three sections. The commands in the first section control the style of the entire
cell, even if only a portion of the cell is selected. The color of the text is controlled using the command in the
second section. The commands in the third section allow you to display selected characters in an alternate font,
as subscripts, or as superscripts. The Normal, Superscript, Subscript, and Alt. Font commands are the only
commands in the Edit Table dialog that have an affect on selected portions of a cell.

172 8.2 Using the Table Tool

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

8.2.3 Setting Defaults for Tables

The Edit Table dialog initially displays four cells. In addition to being part of the table, they are used to set the
default layout for generating new tables. They control the layout as follows:
• cell 1 (upper left): This cell controls itself and does not affect the defaults for the rest of the table.
• cell 2 (upper right): This cell controls the default settings for the top row of the table (excluding
cell 1).
• cell 3 (lower left): This cell controls the default settings for column one of the table (excluding
cell 1).
• cell 4 (lower right): This cell controls the default settings for the body of the table (everything except
row one and column one).
Change the attributes (font, size, style, justification, and so on) in each of the four cells. Then, choose
File > Set Defaults to remember the settings. Your default settings are saved as part of the Style file.

8.3 Using the Identify Tool

Use the Identify tool to find the coordinates of any point in the plot window. It can also be used to place the
coordinates directly on the plot or the Clipboard.

To use the Identify tool:

1. Select the Identify tool from the toolbox.
2. Click anywhere in the plot. The coordinates are displayed in the upper-left corner of the plot window
3. To leave the coordinates on the plot, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) when releasing the
mouse button. A tag is placed at the current location. The appearance of the X and Y coordinate
labels is based on the current settings in the X and Y Label Format dialogs (Format menu), with the
exception of adding one extra digit of accuracy.
4. To place the coordinates on the Clipboard, press Shift when releasing the mouse button. The first
time you do this, the Clipboard is cleared and the first set of coordinates is copied. Any additional
coordinates are appended to the information already stored on the Clipboard.

8.4 Using the Data Selection Tool

Use the Data Selection tool to select a portion of the displayed data for further plotting and analysis. This is
accomplished by enclosing a region of the plot in a polygon.

This tool is particularly useful for eliminating outliers from a plot during a regression analysis. After the Data
Selection tool is used, all curve fits are automatically recalculated based on the remaining data. This allows
arbitrary data points to be removed from a plot in a very selective, graphical manner.

To enclose the data points in a polygon:

1. Select the Data Selection tool from the toolbox.
2. Position the crosshair at the point where you want to begin forming line segments. Then, click the
mouse button to begin. A small square marks the starting point.

8.3 Using the Identify Tool 173

KaleidaGraph

3. Move the mouse to the point where you want the first segment of the polygon to end.
Note: Pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) when creating the polygon removes the
points that lie within it. This feature enables you to select the points you want to remove
instead of the points you want to keep.
4. Move the mouse and click again to create the second segment.
5. Continue moving and clicking the mouse until the desired data is enclosed in a polygon. You can
complete the polygon by clicking the hollow square, double-clicking the mouse, pressing Enter
(Windows) or Return (Macintosh), or clicking when the crosshair is positioned over the toolbox.
Figure 8-5 shows a sample plot that has a region of data selected.

Figure 8-5 Using the Data Selection tool

The plot is then redrawn and only the points that lie within the polygon (or outside when using the Alt or
Option key) are replotted. The points that are removed become masked in the data window. Figure 8-6 shows
the plot after being redrawn to only include the points within the polygon.

174 8.4 Using the Data Selection Tool

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

y = 5.4066 + -0.32318x R= 0.84924

6

5 Test #1

4
Range

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time
Figure 8-6 Resulting plot after using the Data Selection tool

Note: Any polygon bounding a selection region can have a maximum of 100 bounding points. To return to
the original plot and unmask the data, double-click the Data Selection tool.

8.5 Using the Zoom Selection Tool

Use the Zoom Selection tool to quickly change the axis limits. This is accomplished by creating a zoom box,
which defines the new limits for the plot. This tool produces an effect similar to specifying axis limits in the
Axis Options dialog (Plot menu).

To use the Zoom Selection tool:

1. Select the Zoom Selection tool from the toolbox.
2. Drag over a region of the graph. The upper-left and lower-right corners of the box define the new
limits for the plot. For Double Y, Double X, and Double XY plots, you can rescale the X2 and Y2
axes by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or (Macintosh) when creating the zoom box. Figure 8-7 shows
a sample plot with new limits being selected.

8.5 Using the Zoom Selection Tool 175

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-7 Using the Zoom Selection tool

3. Release the mouse button when the box extends to the desired limits. The plot is redrawn to the new
set of limits. Figure 8-8 shows the plot after being redrawn using the new axis limits.

7
Test #1
6

5
Range

2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time
Figure 8-8 Resulting plot after using the Zoom Selection tool

Note: Double-click the Zoom Selection tool to return to the original plot.
When the plot is zoomed, you can adjust the position by pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and
clicking on an area of the plot. For Double Y, Double X, and Double XY plots, you can adjust the X2 and Y2
axes by pressing Ctrl+Alt (Windows) or +Option (Macintosh) and clicking. The point you click is placed
in the center of the redrawn plot.

176 8.5 Using the Zoom Selection Tool

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

8.6 Working with Objects

8.6.1 Selecting and Deselecting Objects
To modify an object, it must first be selected. To select an object, position the pointer over the object and click.
Object handles appear around the object.

There are three methods for selecting multiple objects:

• Press Shift and use the Selection Arrow to click the objects one at a time. Figure 8-9 shows an
example of selecting objects one at a time.
• Use the Selection Arrow to drag a dotted box around the objects to be selected. Figure 8-10 shows
objects being selected in this manner.
• Choose Edit > Select All to select all of the objects.
Note: When multiple objects are selected, changes affect each of the selected objects. For example, if you
change the fill pattern, it changes in all of the selected objects.

Figure 8-9 Clicking objects individually Figure 8-10 Dragging the Selection Arrow

To deselect objects:
• To deselect all selected objects, click a blank portion of the window.
• To deselect objects one at a time, press Shift while clicking the object. The object you click is
deselected. All other objects remain selected.

8.6.2 Moving Objects

After objects are created in the plot or layout window, it may be necessary to reposition them. The plot, legend,
and any text labels can also be moved using the method described below.

To move objects:
1. Select the object to be moved.
2. Position the pointer over the selected object and drag it to a new position. As you drag, an outline of
the object is displayed. If you drag to the edge of the window, the window scrolls.
3. Release the mouse button when the object is in the desired location. Figure 8-11 shows an example
of an object being moved.

8.6 Working with Objects 177

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-11 Moving an object

Note: You can also move selected objects vertically or horizontally using the arrow keys. If the arrow keys
are used, the objects move one pixel in the specified direction (10 pixels if you press Shift at the same
time).

8.6.3 Resizing Objects

Any object can be resized in the plot or layout window. This includes the plot axes, legend, and any shapes
created with the drawing tools.

Note: The legend cannot be resized if it only contains a single item.

To resize an object:
1. Select the object to be resized.
2. Drag any one of the handles until the object reaches the desired size. Figure 8-12 shows an object
being resized.

Figure 8-12 Resizing an object

Note: To resize the object proportionally about its center, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) when
dragging the handle. By pressing Shift as you drag, you can constrain the shape to a square or circle.

8.6.4 Duplicating Objects

To duplicate an object:
1. Select the object to be duplicated.
2. Choose Edit > Duplicate. A copy of the object is placed slightly below and to the right of the
original. Its handles are visible to indicate that it is selected. An example of a duplicated object
appears in Figure 8-13.

178 8.6 Working with Objects

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

Figure 8-13 Duplicating objects

Note: You can also duplicate an object by pressing Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and dragging the
object.

8.6.5 Copying Objects

To copy one or more objects:
1. Select the objects to be copied.
2. Choose Edit > Copy Selection. The objects are copied to the Clipboard, replacing the previous
contents, if any.

Note: If you copy anything associated with the original plot (legend, plot title, axis title, and so on),
the entire plot is copied to the Clipboard.

8.6.6 Pasting Objects

To paste objects from the Clipboard:
1. Open the plot or layout window which will receive the object on the Clipboard.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. The object is placed in the active window.

8.6.7 Deleting Objects

To delete an object in the plot or layout window:
1. Select the object to be deleted.
2. Press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh), or choose Cut or Clear from the Edit menu.
Cut places the object on the Clipboard; the other methods remove the object from the window.

Note: You can also use the Eraser tool to delete individual objects.

8.6.8 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

Grouping allows you to combine several objects into a single object. This is useful if you want to move several
objects and maintain their relative spacing or if you want to apply the same changes to multiple objects.

To group objects:
1. Select the objects to be grouped. Object handles appear around each object that is selected, as shown
in Figure 8-14.
2. Choose Object > Group. Each object’s handles disappear and are replaced by a single set of object
handles around the grouped object, as shown in Figure 8-15.

8.6 Working with Objects 179

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-14 Before grouping Figure 8-15 After grouping

Once you have grouped objects together, you can no longer select or modify the objects individually. The
UnGroup command can be used to separate a grouped object into its original components.

To ungroup an object:
1. Select the object to be ungrouped.
2. Choose Object > UnGroup. Object handles appear for each individual object.

8.6.9 Aligning Objects

KaleidaGraph has two ways to align objects: the Align tool from the toolbox and the Align command (Object
menu). Selecting either displays the pop-up menu in Figure 8-16. The icons in this menu indicate the type of
alignment applied to the objects.

Figure 8-16 Alignment pop-up menu

To align objects:
1. Select the objects to be aligned. Figure 8-17 shows some sample objects that are selected, along with
a reference line.
2. Choose Object > Align or select the Align tool from the toolbox to display the alignment options.
3. Select one of the icons from the menu. The objects are aligned based on your selection. Figure 8-18
shows the objects after aligning them by their left edges.

180 8.6 Working with Objects

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

Figure 8-17 Objects before being aligned Figure 8-18 Objects after being aligned

8.6.10 Sending Objects Up or Down

Each time you create an object in the plot or layout window, it is placed on top of all other objects in the object
stacking order. This order is important because objects near the bottom of the stack may be hidden or difficult
to modify.

There are four commands in the Object menu that enable you to change the ordering of objects. These
commands are: Up, Bring To Front, Down, and Send To Back. These commands are useful when objects
overlap in a plot or layout.

To change the ordering of an object:

1. Select the object to be modified.
2. Choose the appropriate command from the Object menu. The selected object is repositioned in the
window.
• Up - Moves the selected object forward one level in the object order.
• Bring To Front - Moves the selected object in front of all other objects.
• Down - Moves the selected object backward one level in the object order.
• Send To Back - Moves the selected object behind all other objects.

8.6 Working with Objects 181

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-19 shows five stacked objects with the middle object (the oval) selected. The four figures below it
show how the original objects appear after choosing each of the four commands.

Figure 8-19 Original set of objects

After choosing Up After choosing Bring To Front

After choosing Down After choosing Send To Back

182 8.6 Working with Objects

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

8.7 Creating and Editing Text Labels

The Text tool is used to create and edit text labels. Clicking within the plot or layout window after selecting
this tool displays the dialog in Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-20 Edit String dialog

8.7.1 Creating a Text Label

Text labels can be created anywhere in the plot or layout window. The initial position of the label is not
important because once it is created, you can use the Selection Arrow to reposition it.

To create a text label in the plot or layout window:

1. Select the Text tool from the toolbox.
2. Position the text cursor, , anywhere in the window and click once. The Edit String dialog appears
3. Type text and modify the attributes using the menus in the dialog. This dialog supports fully-stylized
text, so you can use multiple fonts, styles, and colors in a text label. A maximum of 2000 characters
can be entered for a single text label. Figure 8-21 shows the Edit String dialog containing a sample
text string.

8.7 Creating and Editing Text Labels 183

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-21 Sample string in the Edit String dialog

4. Click OK to return to the plot or layout window.

8.7.2 Editing Plot Labels

Legend Text
The legend text can be edited using the Text tool. Double-clicking a text label displays the Edit String dialog.
Change the legend text as needed and click OK to return to the plot.

It is also possible to move items in the legend to different locations using the Text tool. This is accomplished
by dragging a label to a new position with the Text tool.

Plot and Axis Titles

Plot and axis titles can be edited by double-clicking them with either the Text tool or the Selection Arrow. The
Edit String dialog appears, containing the current text string. Change the text as needed and click OK to return
to the plot.

Value and Axis Labels

Value and axis labels are unique because they can be edited individually or as a group.

To edit value or axis labels individually:

1. Select the Text tool from the toolbox.
2. Double-click the label to be modified. The label appears in the Edit String dialog.
3. Change the label text and formatting.
4. Click OK to return to the plot.

Note: Be careful when editing value and axis labels in this manner. If the plot is redrawn, the labels
revert to their original state.

184 8.7 Creating and Editing Text Labels

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

To edit value or axis labels as a group:

1. Select the Selection Arrow from the toolbox.
2. Double-click one of the labels in the group. The label appears in the Edit String dialog, but the label
text cannot be edited because the labels are selected as a group.
3. Make the necessary formatting changes to the label.
4. Click OK to return to the plot. The entire group is redrawn to reflect the changes.

Individual Text Labels

Any text label created with the Text tool can be edited by double-clicking it with either the Text tool or the
Selection Arrow. The Edit String dialog appears, containing the current text string. Change the text as needed
and click OK to return to the plot.

8.7.3 Adding Subscripts or Superscripts to a Text Label

To add subscripts or superscripts to a label:
1. Using the Text tool, double-click an existing label or click within the plot or layout window to create
a new label.
2. Select the text to be converted.
3. Choose Subscript or Superscript from the Style menu.
4. Click OK.

Note: The Edit String dialog does not display characters as subscripts or superscripts. Instead, KaleidaGraph
inserts either \d (subscript) or \u (superscript) before the characters and \n (normal) after the characters.
These extra characters are only displayed in the Edit String dialog. As soon as you return to the plot,
the subscripts or superscripts are displayed correctly.

The Text Options dialog (Format menu) contains four settings (Superscript Offset, Subscript Offset, Sub/
Super Size, and Only use built-in sizes) that affect the appearance of subscripts and superscripts. These
settings can be modified to control the offset and size of these characters.

8.7.4 Text Tool Commands

Edit Menu
• Cut - This command removes the selection and places it on the Clipboard.
• Copy - This command copies the selection to the Clipboard, replacing the previous contents, if any
• Paste - This command places the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point.
• Clear - This command deletes the selection. This command operates similar to Cut, except that the
contents of the Clipboard are not disturbed.
• Select All - This command selects all of the text in the dialog.

8.7 Creating and Editing Text Labels 185

KaleidaGraph

Format Menu
• Left, Right, or Center Justification - The justification of text labels can be set to either Left, Right,
or Center. This setting determines the label placement in relation to where you clicked in the plot or
layout window with the Text tool.

• 0, 90, 180, and 270o Rotation - These commands set the orientation of the text label to one of four
positions, moving counter-clockwise from horizontal. You will not see any changes to the text until
you return to the plot or layout window.
• Erase Background - When this command is turned on, anything behind the text label is erased.
Font Menu
The Font menu contains all of the fonts that are currently installed. It is possible to use multiple fonts in the
same text label by choosing a different font for selected portions of the label.

Size Menu
This menu contains the sizes that are available for displaying fonts. You can specify a size that is not listed
using the Other command in this menu. Multiple font sizes can be used in the same text label by choosing a
different font size for selected portions of the label.

Style Menu
This menu lists the different styles that can be applied to the text. It also includes commands for displaying
characters as subscripts or superscripts.

Color Menu
This menu displays the current color choices available for the text label. Multiple colors can be used in the
same text label by choosing a different color for selected portions of the label.

8.7.5 Setting Defaults for Text Labels

You can set defaults for a number of different text labels in the Text Options dialog (Format menu). The
attributes that you select are saved as part of the Style file. This enables you to set your preferences and have
KaleidaGraph remember them the next time you start the program.

To set defaults for text labels:

1. Choose Format > Text Options to display the dialog in Figure 8-22.

186 8.7 Creating and Editing Text Labels

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

Figure 8-22 Text Options dialog

2. Click the labels for which you want to set new defaults. The different text labels are described below
• Standard Labels - Axis titles and any text created with the Text tool.
• Legends - Any text that appears in the legend.
• Plot Titles - The text representing the plot’s title.
• Equation Labels - Text that appears when displaying the equation calculated by a curve fit.
• Value Labels - Text that appears when Add Values is turned on or text error bars are applied.
• X, Y, X2, or Y2 Axis Labels - The labels placed at major tick marks to display their value.
• Y2 Legend - Text that appears in the Y2 legend of a Double Y or Double XY plot.
3. Select your new defaults from the pop-up menus.
4. Click OK to return to the plot window. Any labels that had their attributes changed are updated.
5. To make these settings permanent, make sure you save changes to the Style when quitting
KaleidaGraph.

8.7 Creating and Editing Text Labels 187

KaleidaGraph

8.8 Creating and Editing Shapes

You can create lines, arrows, rectangles, rounded rectangles, ovals, polygons, arcs, and Bezier curves in the
plot or layout window. Once a shape is created, you can use the icons in the toolbox to change the object’s
attributes. This topic is covered in Section 8.9.

8.8.1 Lines and Arrows

To create a line or arrow:
1. Click the Line tool on the toolbox.
2. Click the Line tool again and hold down the mouse button to
display the pop-up menu in Figure 8-23. Choose the first item
in this menu to draw a line or select the type of arrow you want
to create.
3. Position the crosshair at the point where you want to begin
drawing the line. When creating an arrow, the arrowhead is
placed at this position.
4. Drag to draw the line. By pressing Shift as you drag, you can
constrain the line to rotate in 45o increments.
5. Release the mouse button when the line is the desired length.
The line appears with object handles to indicate that it is
selected.
Figure 8-23 Line tool menu

Figure 8-24 Drawing a line

188 8.8 Creating and Editing Shapes

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

To edit a line or arrow:

1. Select the line or arrow with the Selection Arrow. Object handles appear at the ends of the line.
2. Position the pointer over one of the handles.
3. Drag the handle to adjust the length or angle of the line.
4. You can change the arrowhead type by selecting a different arrow from the pop-up menu. You can
switch the ends of the arrow by choosing Reverse from the menu.
5. When you are finished, click away from the line to deselect it.

To edit an arrowhead:
1. Double-click the arrow (or click once and choose Object > Edit Object) to display the dialog in
Figure 8-25.

Figure 8-25 Arrow Head dialog

2. Edit the values in the dialog until the arrowhead in the preview window looks the way you want it.
3. Click OK to update the arrow.

Note: If you want to modify the default set of arrowheads, use the Edit Arrow Heads command (Object
menu).

8.8.2 Rectangles, Rounded Rectangles, Ovals, and Arcs

To create a rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, or arc:
1. Select the Box, Rounded Rectangle, Oval, or Arc tool from the toolbox.
2. Position the crosshair at the point where you want to begin drawing.
3. Drag to draw the shape. Depending on the object being created, you can constrain its shape to a
square, circle, or quarter-circle by pressing Shift as you drag.
4. Release the mouse button when the dotted outline of the object is the desired size. The shape appears
with object handles to indicate that it is selected.

8.8 Creating and Editing Shapes 189

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-26 Drawing a rectangle Figure 8-27 Drawing a square

To edit a rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, or arc:

1. Select the shape with the Selection Arrow. Object handles appear at the corners of the area occupied
by the shape.
2. Drag any one of the handles until the object reaches the desired size.
3. When you are finished, click away from the shape to deselect it.

8.8.3 Polygons
The Polygon tool is used to create polygons. Polygons consist of multiple line segments connected at the
segment end points. They can either be closed (the first and last segments connect) or open (the first and last
segments do not connect).

To create a polygon:
1. Select the Polygon tool from the toolbox.
2. Position the crosshair at the point where you want to begin drawing. Then, click the mouse button to
begin drawing. A small square marks the starting point.
3. Move the mouse to where you want the first segment of the polygon to end. By pressing Shift as you
click, you can constrain the segment to rotate in 45o increments.
4. Move the mouse and click again to create the second segment.
5. Continue moving and clicking the mouse until the desired number of segments are created. You can
close the polygon by clicking the hollow square. To leave the polygon open, double-click the mouse,
press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh), or position the crosshair over the toolbox and click

Figure 8-28 Creating a polygon

To edit the segment points of the polygon:

1. Double-click the polygon (or click once and choose Object > Edit Object). The four object handles
disappear and are replaced by handles at each segment point of the polygon.
2. Drag any one of the segment points until the polygon reaches the desired size.
3. When you are finished editing, click outside of the polygon to deselect it.

190 8.8 Creating and Editing Shapes

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

8.8.4 Bezier Curves

The Bezier curve tool can be used to draw complex objects. Bezier curves are irregularly shaped, multi-sided
objects that can have curved line segments. They can either be closed (the first and last segments connect) or
open (the first and last segments do not connect).

Each segment in a Bezier curve is defined by four points: two anchor points and two direction points. The
anchor points determine where the segments begin and end. The direction points, along with the tangent lines
that connect them to the anchor points, determine the size and positioning of the curve segments.

Tangent Line

Anchor Point

Direction Point

Figure 8-29 Bezier curve definition

Creating a Bezier Curve
To create a Bezier curve:
1. Select the Bezier curve tool from the toolbox.
2. Position the crosshair at the point where you want to begin drawing and click the mouse.
3. Move the mouse until the crosshair is where you want the first segment to end.
4. Click and hold the mouse button down. If you release the button, a straight line appears between the
points. If you hold down the button and drag, a tangent line appears that allows you to drag the curve
into the position you want.
5. Release the mouse button when the segment is the desired shape. The tangent line disappears and
handles appear at the anchor points.
6. Continue creating more segments and setting the angle and shape of the curve with the tangent lines.
The segments are automatically connected.
7. You can close the curve by clicking the hollow square. To leave the curve open, double-click the
mouse, press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh), or position the crosshair over the toolbox
and click.

8.8 Creating and Editing Shapes 191

KaleidaGraph

Figure 8-30 Creating a Bezier curve

Editing a Bezier Curve

You can change the position of each anchor point and the shape of each curve. If a segment is straight, there
is no tangent line and you can only change its position. Segments can be deleted by selecting an anchor point
and pressing Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh).

To edit a Bezier curve:

1. Double-click the curve (or click once and choose Object > Edit Object). The four object handles
disappear and are replaced by handles at each anchor point of the curve.
2. Position the arrow over each anchor point you want to move and drag until the point is in the desired
position.
3. Release the mouse button. The tangent line is displayed with round handles at each direction point.
You can drag these handles to control the size and shape of the curves.
4. Select either of the direction points and drag to edit the shape of the curve. The curve is reshaped in
the direction you move the handle.
5. Continue moving anchor points and reshaping curves until the curve is the desired shape.
6. When you are finished editing, click outside of the curve to deselect it.

192 8.8 Creating and Editing Shapes

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

Figure 8-31 Editing a Bezier curve

8.9 Adding Colors and Patterns to Shapes

The area beneath the tools on the toolbox contains several icons that are used to set and modify the attributes
of an object. These attributes include: foreground color, background color, fill pattern, pen pattern, line style,
and line width. Using these icons, you can control the appearance of any object in the plot or layout window

8.9.1 Setting Default Attributes for Shapes

Attributes for objects drawn in the plot or layout window are controlled using the icons shown in Figure 8-32.
If no objects are selected in the window, you can set default attributes. These attributes are applied to any new
shapes created in KaleidaGraph.

Color Icon
Pattern Icon
Style Icon

Figure 8-32 Object attribute icons

To set the default attributes:

1. Verify that no items are selected in the plot or layout window.
2. Make selections for the foreground color, background color, fill pattern, pen pattern, line style, and
line width. The following sections explain how to make selections for each.

The attributes that you select are saved as part of the Style file. This enables you to set your preferences and
have KaleidaGraph remember them the next time you start the program.

8.9 Adding Colors and Patterns to Shapes 193

KaleidaGraph

8.9.2 Changing Foreground and Background Colors

The Color icon consists of two sections: a foreground section (upper left) for setting the foreground color and
a background section (lower right) for setting the background color. When you select a fill or pen pattern, the
foreground color is applied to the black portion of the pattern and the background color is applied to the white
portion of the pattern.

Note: To edit the colors that appear in the color palettes, use the Edit Colors command (Object menu).

To change the foreground or background color of an object:

1. Select the object to be edited.
2. Click the foreground or background section of the Color icon. One of the following color palettes
appears with the current color choices.

Figure 8-33 Foreground Color palette Figure 8-34 Background Color palette
3. Select a different color from the palette.

8.9.3 Changing Fill and Pen Patterns

The fill pattern is used to represent the interior of an object. The pen pattern is used to represent object lines.
You can change the fill or pen pattern by selecting a different pattern from the pop-up menu that appears when
you click the appropriate portion of the Pattern icon. Black portions of the pattern represent the foreground
color and white portions represent the background color.

To change the fill or pen pattern of an object:

1. Select the object to be edited.
2. Click the interior or outer portion of the Pattern icon. One of the following pop-up menus appears
with the pattern choices.

Figure 8-35 Fill pattern choices

194 8.9 Adding Colors and Patterns to Shapes

 Working with Plot Tools and Objects

Figure 8-36 Pen pattern choices

3. Select a different pattern from the pop-up menu.

8.9.4 Changing Line Styles and Widths

The Style icon controls the line styles and widths used for objects. The left portion of the icon controls the line
style; the right portion controls the line width.

To change the line style or line width of an object:

1. Select the object to be edited.
2. Click the line style or line width section of the Style icon. One of the following pop-up menus
appears with the available choices.

Figure 8-37 Line style menu Figure 8-38 Line width menu
3. Select a different line style or thickness from the pop-up menu.

8.9 Adding Colors and Patterns to Shapes 195

KaleidaGraph

196 8.9 Adding Colors and Patterns to Shapes

Working with Curve Fits and
Error Bars
Chapter 9

This chapter covers:

• The types of curve fits available in KaleidaGraph.
• Applying a Least Squares curve fit.
• Applying a smoothing curve fit.
• Defining and applying a General (user-defined) curve fit.
• Displaying the results of a curve fit.
• Removing a curve fit from a plot.
• Extrapolating curve fits to the axis limits.
• Adding error bars to a plot.

9.1 Types of Curve Fits

This section provides a brief description and lists the data restrictions for each of the curve fits supported by
KaleidaGraph. Refer to Section D.4 for reference information for each of the curve fits.

9.1.1 General
This is the most powerful curve fit in KaleidaGraph. It takes a user-defined equation and uses it to fit a set of
plotted data. Any function of x or m0, where either x or m0 is the independent variable, can be defined using
up to nine parameters (m1–m9).

Examples:
m1 * m0
m1 + m2 * m0
m1 * exp(–m2 * m0)

When a General curve fit is selected, a curve, defined by the equation in the Curve Fit Definition dialog, is
fitted to the data using the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm. There are no data restrictions associated with this
curve fit.

Section 2.5.3 provides a guided tour of defining and applying a General curve fit. For more information on the
General curve fit, refer to Sections 9.4–9.5. These sections include details about equation structure, initial
guesses, and weighting data.

9.1 Types of Curve Fits 197

KaleidaGraph

9.1.2 Linear
This function fits a straight line through your data, of the form y = m0 + m1 * x. There are no data restrictions
associated with this curve fit.

Note: On a semi-log or log-log plot, this fit appears as a curved line.

9.1.3 Polynomial
This function fits a curve through your data, of the form y = m0 + m1 * x + m2 * x2 + m3 * x3 +...+ m9 * x9.
The more complex the curvature of the data, the higher the polynomial order required to fit it. There are no
data restrictions associated with this curve fit.

9.1.4 Exponential
This function fits a curve through your data, of the form y = m0 * em1 * x. It is generally used to fit data that
increases or decreases at a high rate. This curve fit cannot fit negative data or data equal to zero.

Note: On a semi-log plot with a linear X axis, the curve appears as a straight line.

9.1.5 Logarithmic
This function fits a curve through your data, of the form y = m0 + m1 * log(x). A logarithmic curve fit is
generally used with data that spans decades (100, 101, 102, and so on). This curve fit cannot be used to fit
negative data or data equal to zero.

Note: On a semi-log plot with a linear Y axis, the curve appears as a straight line.

9.1.6 Power
This function fits a curve through your data, of the form y = m0 * xm1. This curve fit cannot be used to fit
negative data or data equal to zero.

Note: On a log-log plot, the curve appears as a straight line.

9.1.7 Smooth
This function fits a smoothed curve to the data. KaleidaGraph starts by applying a Stineman function to the
data. The output of this function then has a geometric weight applied to the current point and ±10% of the data
range, to arrive at the smoothed curve.

The only data restriction associated with this curve fit is that the independent (X) variable must be in ascending
order in the data window. There is no single expression that represents this curve; therefore, there are no
parameters to view or copy.

198 9.1 Types of Curve Fits

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.1.8 Weighted
This function fits a curve to the data, using the locally weighted Least Squared error method. The result of this
curve fit is to plot a best fit smooth curve through the center of the data. This is an extremely robust fitting
technique. Unlike the standard Least Squared error method, this technique is nearly insensitive to outliers.
However, this does not come for free. The Weighted curve fit is computationally complex and can take a very
long time for a large data set.

The only data restriction associated with this curve fit is that the independent (X) variable must be in ascending
order in the data window. There is no single expression that represents this curve; therefore, there are no
parameters to view or copy.

9.1.9 Cubic Spline

Moving left to right along the curve in increasing X, every group of four consecutive data points defines a
cubic polynomial equation. A series of these cubic polynomials connected together define a cubic spline
curve. Using this curve fit is similar to using a French curve to connect all of the data points.

The only data restriction associated with this curve fit is that the independent (X) variable must be in ascending
order in the data window. There is no single expression that represents this curve; therefore, there are no
parameters to view or copy.

9.1.10 Interpolate
This function fits a curve that passes through the data points and matches the slopes at those points. The
advantage of this curve fit is that it does not produce wild results near an abrupt change of slope, as can happen
with the Cubic Spline curve fit.

The only data restriction associated with this curve fit is that the independent (X) variable must be in ascending
order in the data window. There is no single expression that represents this curve; therefore, there are no
parameters to view or copy.

9.2 Applying a Least Squares Fit

Least Squares is a method of curve fitting that has been popular for a long time. Least Squares minimizes the
square of the error between the original data and the values predicted by the equation. While this technique
may not be the most statistically robust method of fitting a function to a data set, it has the advantage of being
relatively simple (in terms of required computing power) and of being well understood.

The major weakness of the Least Squared method is its sensitivity to outliers in the data. If a data point is
widely different from the majority of the data, it can skew the results of the regression. For this reason, the
data should always be examined for reasonableness before fitting. The Data Selection tool provides a simple
method of removing outliers from a plot. The use of this tool is covered in Section 8.4.

The Curve Fit menu contains several curve fits that use the Least Squares method. These curve fits are:
Linear, Polynomial, Exponential, Logarithmic, and Power. For descriptions and any data restrictions
associated with these curve fits, see Sections 9.1.2–9.1.6.

The following steps explain how to apply a Least Squares fit, using the Polynomial curve fit as an example.
The procedure is basically the same for applying the other Least Square fits. Section 2.2.4 in the guided tour
includes an example of applying a Linear curve fit.

9.2 Applying a Least Squares Fit 199

KaleidaGraph

To apply a Polynomial curve fit:

1. Open the plot window which will have the curve fit applied. Figure 9-1 shows a sample plot.

Sinc(5x)
1
0.8
0.6
Sinc(5x)

0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
-π/2 to π/2
Figure 9-1 Sample plot
2. Choose Curve Fit > Polynomial. A Curve Fit Selections dialog similar to Figure 9-2 appears. All
dependent variables are listed under Column Names.

Figure 9-2 Curve Fit Selections dialog

3. Click the check box for each variable to be fit. A keyboard shortcut (Ctrl+A under Windows or
+A on a Macintosh) is available to select all of the variables at once. Each time a variable is
selected, a second dialog appears (Figure 9-3). Use this dialog to specify the order of the polynomial
to be fit. The maximum value that can be selected is nine.

Note: This extra dialog is only displayed when using the Polynomial fit.

200 9.2 Applying a Least Squares Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

Figure 9-3 Polynomial Order dialog

4. Click OK to exit each dialog and return to the plot. The dialog in Figure 9-4 is displayed to inform
you that the fit is being applied.

Figure 9-4 Polynomial fit status dialog

The curve fit line is displayed on the plot. Once the curve fit is applied, you can display its equation
or extrapolate the fit to the axis limits. These are a few of the features covered in Sections 9.6–9.8.
Figure 9-5 shows the sample plot after applying a Polynomial curve fit and displaying the equation

Sinc(5x) 8 9
Y = M0 + M1*x + ... M8*x + M9*x
1
M0 0.74498
0.8
M1 -2.2335e-06
0.6
Sinc(5x)

M2 -1.5263
0.4 M3 5.3462e-06
0.2 M4 0.57926
0 M5 -2.3478e-06
-0.2 R 0.89451

-0.4
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
-π/2 to π/2
Figure 9-5 Sample plot with Polynomial curve fit applied

9.3 Applying a Smoothing Fit

The Curve Fit menu contains four commands designed to fit a smooth curve to the data. These curve fits are:
Smooth, Weighted, Cubic Spline, and Interpolate. For descriptions and any data restrictions associated with
these curve fits, see Sections 9.1.7–9.1.10.

The following steps explain how to apply a smoothing fit, using the Cubic Spline curve fit as an example. The
procedure is basically the same for applying the other smoothing fits.

9.3 Applying a Smoothing Fit 201

KaleidaGraph

To apply a Cubic Spline curve fit:

1. Open the plot window which will have the curve fit applied. Figure 9-6 shows a sample plot.

example #1
7
6 Test #1
Test #2
5
Range

4
3
2
1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time
Figure 9-6 Sample plot
2. Choose Curve Fit > Cubic Spline. A Curve Fit Selections dialog similar to Figure 9-7 appears. All
dependent variables are listed under Column Names.

Figure 9-7 Curve Fit Selections dialog

3. Click the check box for each variable to be fit. A keyboard shortcut (Ctrl+A under Windows or
+A on a Macintosh) is available to select all of the variables at once.

Note: When applying a Weighted fit, a second dialog appears each time a variable is selected. Use
this dialog to specify the smoothing factor.
4. Click OK. The dialog in Figure 9-8 is displayed to inform you that the fit is being applied.

Figure 9-8 Cubic Spline fit status dialog

202 9.3 Applying a Smoothing Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

The curve fit line is displayed on the plot. Once the curve fit is applied, you can increase the number
of curve fit points or hide the original data to only display the curve fit. These are a few of the features
covered in Sections 9.6–9.8. Figure 9-9 shows the sample plot after applying a Cubic Spline curve
fit.

example #1
7
6 Test #1
Test #2
5
Range

4
3
2
1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time
Figure 9-9 Sample plot with Cubic Spline curve fit applied

9.4 General Curve Fit Basics

Nonlinear curve fitting is accommodated in KaleidaGraph through the General curve fit function. The General
curve fit can be used to define your own equation and apply a fit to the data, using the Levenberg-Marquardt
algorithm. This is the most powerful curve fit in KaleidaGraph because you can specify virtually any equation
to be fitted to the data.

This section explains the structure of the curve fit equation, setting initial conditions for the parameters, the
Curve Fit Definition dialog, and the use of the commands in the General submenu.

9.4.1 Curve Fit Definition

The curve fit definition is the equation that is fitted to the data. Curve fit definitions are composed of the same
items as formulas in Formula Entry: operators, parameters, functions, and constants, in addition to an
independent variable.

The independent variable in an equation is represented by m0. The parameters being calculated by the fit are
represented by m1–m9. Parameters should be entered wherever you have an unknown quantity and you want
KaleidaGraph to calculate the best value.

Constants and other shorthand references can be defined in the library for use in a curve fit definition. Some
definitions in the default library are used to substitute x for m0, and a, b, c, and d for m1, m2, m3, and m4,
respectively. Section 9.5.6 provides an example of defining a curve fit equation in the library.

To include a column number as part of the curve fit definition, the table function must be used. Section 9.5.4
shows how to use the table function in a General curve fit definition. This method also enables you to fit
equations containing multiple independent variables.

9.4 General Curve Fit Basics 203

KaleidaGraph

The following table lists some equations and how they appear as curve fit definitions in KaleidaGraph.

Original Equations Curve Fit Definitions

a*x+b m1 * m0 + m2
a + b * x^c m1 + m2 * m0^m3
a + b * exp(–c * x) m1 + m2 * exp(–m3 * m0)
a * exp(–b * x) * cos(c * x + d) m1 * exp(–m2 * m0) * cos(m3 * m0 + m4)

9.4.2 Initial conditions

Even though KaleidaGraph calculates values for unknown parameters, you must supply an initial value for
each parameter. The algorithm used to calculate the final results requires a reasonable guess to point it in the
right direction. KaleidaGraph improves upon these values during each iteration of the fit.

Note: Since the fit starts with initial guesses and improves upon them with each iteration, the final values
may be different for a separate set of initial guesses.

Do not get carried away trying to find good guesses; the initial conditions are just that, guesses. If you are not
sure what the guesses should be, keep the initial conditions non-zero, and at the correct order of magnitude
that you might expect (be it 0.001, 1, or 1000).

The initial conditions are entered immediately following the curve fit definition. Place a semicolon at the end
of the definition and begin entering the initial guesses, separating each with a semicolon. The table below
shows the definitions from the previous section with some sample initial guesses.

Curve Fit Definitions with Initial Guesses

m1 * m0 + m2; m1 = 0.5; m2 = 23
m1 + m2 * m0^m3; m1 = –2; m2 = 3; m3 = 2
m1 + m2 * exp(–m3 * m0); m1 = 5; m2 = 1; m3 = 0.5
m1 * exp(–m2 * m0) * cos(m3 * m0 + m4); m1 = 4; m2 = 0.7; m3 = 2.2; m4 = 15

9.4.3 Curve Fit Definition Dialog

The Curve Fit Definition dialog is used to enter the equation, initial guesses, and allowable error to be used in
the curve fit. You can also choose to specify partial derivatives or to weight the data.

This dialog can be displayed using either of the following methods:

• Choose a curve fit from the General submenu (Curve Fit menu). In the dialog that is displayed, click
Define.
• Choose Curve Fit > Edit General. In the dialog that is displayed, select the name of a curve fit and
click Edit.

204 9.4 General Curve Fit Basics

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

The various features of the Curve Fit Definition dialog are discussed below.

2
5
3
6

7
Figure 9-10 Curve Fit Definition dialog
1. Text Field
Curve fit definitions and initial guesses are entered in this area of the dialog.
2. File...
Clicking this button displays a text editor that can be used to create, open, or save a curve fit definition.
The definition appears on the first line and any partial derivatives appear on the lines below it.
3. Help...
Click this button to display the Help dialog.
4. Degrees/Radians Buttons
These buttons determine whether the results of trigonometric functions are in degrees or radians.
5. Allowable Error:
The value entered in this field helps KaleidaGraph determine when to stop iterating. Iterations stop if
either of the following occurs:
• Chi Square does not change for a certain number of iterations.
• The percent change in the normalized Chi Square is less than the Allowable Error.
6. Weight Data
When selected, you can specify a data column that contains weights for the variable you are fitting. These
weights should represent the individual errors of the data values. Each weight is used internally as:
1/(weight^2). The smaller the error value, the larger the internal weight. If this check box is not selected,
a weight value of 1.0 is used for all data points.
7. Specify Partials
The algorithm that KaleidaGraph uses in calculating each iteration of the General curve fit requires
evaluating the partial derivative of the function with respect to each parameter. If Specify Partials is
not selected, KaleidaGraph numerically approximates the derivative. If this option is selected, the dialog
expands, as shown in Figure 9-11.

9.4 General Curve Fit Basics 205

KaleidaGraph

Figure 9-11 Expanded Curve Fit Definition dialog

The nine buttons at the bottom of the dialog allow each partial derivative to be entered in the text field
above the buttons. The biggest advantage of specifying the partial derivatives is accuracy. The curve fit
algorithm uses these partial derivatives to direct itself where to move after each iteration to find the best
solution. In general, sharp deviations in the surface may not be accurately approximated, so the actual
partial derivatives are preferred.

You can choose to specify only some of the partial derivatives, but not all of them. It is better to let
KaleidaGraph approximate the partial instead of specifying the wrong derivative. If a partial derivative is
missing, KaleidaGraph numerically approximates that partial derivative.

206 9.4 General Curve Fit Basics

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.4.4 The General Submenu

The General submenu always lists the Edit General and Library commands. This menu also lists up
to 16 user-defined equations that can be applied to the data. The following sections explain how to edit and
save changes to the General submenu.

Master Curve Fit List

KaleidaGraph maintains a master list of curve fits that are displayed in the General submenu whenever a new
plot is created. The only way to edit the master list is to create a new plot and use the Edit General command.
The master list is not affected if you do either of the following:
• Use a saved plot (or any plot that had its data archived).
• Choose a curve fit from the General submenu and click Define to edit the definition.

Adding a Curve Fit to the Master List

To add a curve fit to the master curve fit list:
1. Create a new plot.
2. Choose Curve Fit > General > Edit General.
3. Select a fit in the current list.
4. Click Add and a New Fit appears below the selected fit in the list. The name of the fit can be changed
by selecting it and editing the name in the text field.
5. Click Edit to enter the definition in the Curve Fit Definition dialog.
6. Click OK when you are finished. Now you can use this fit in the active plot or any new plots that are
created. Remember to save changes to the Macros file to make the changes permanent.

Rearranging the Master Curve Fit List

To rearrange the curve fit list:
1. Create a new plot.
2. Choose Curve Fit > General > Edit General.
3. Select the curve fit to be repositioned.
4. Click Copy to copy the fit to the trash bin.
5. Click Remove to delete the name from the listing.
6. Select a curve fit in the current list.
7. Select the name of the curve fit that was copied to the trash bin.
8. Click Add and the curve fit appears below the selected fit in the list.

Note: When rearranging curve fits, do not leave the Edit General dialog until you are completely finished.
As soon as you click OK or Cancel in this dialog, anything in the trash bin is deleted. The only
permanent trash bin item is New Fit.

9.4 General Curve Fit Basics 207

KaleidaGraph

Removing a Curve Fit from the Master List

To remove a curve fit from the master list:
1. Create a new plot.
2. Choose Curve Fit > General > Edit General.
3. Select the curve fit to be deleted.
4. Click Remove to delete the curve fit from the listing.
5. Click OK.

Adding Curve Fits from the Master List to Saved Plots

When a saved plot is opened, the General submenu displays the curve fits that were available when the plot
was originally created, regardless of what is currently in the master list. To add curve fits from the master curve
fit list to a saved plot:
1. Open a saved plot.
2. Choose Curve Fit > General > Edit General. The curve fits stored in the master list appear
below the dotted line in the trash bin.
3. Select the name of the curve fit to be added from the trash bin listing.
4. Select a fit in the current list.
5. Click Add and the curve fit appears below the selected fit in the list.
6. Click OK when you are finished. Now you can use this fit in the saved plot.

Saving Changes to the Curve Fit Menu

The curve fits in the General submenu are saved, by default, in a file called KGMacros (Windows) or KG
Macros (Macintosh). This file is loaded each time you start KaleidaGraph.

To save any changes made to the Curve Fit menu, it is necessary to save the changes to the default Macros
file using one of the following methods:
• Choose File > Preferences and select Prompt from the Macros pop-up menu. When exiting
KaleidaGraph, a dialog asks whether or not to overwrite the Macros file that was opened at launch.
• Choose File > Preferences and select Always from the Macros pop-up menu. When exiting
KaleidaGraph, the Macros file that was opened at launch is automatically overwritten.
• Choose File > Export > Macros and overwrite the default Macros file.
Note: Only changes made to a new plot using the Edit General command are saved as part of the macros
file. Any changes made to a saved plot or by choosing a curve fit from the General submenu and
clicking Define apply solely to that particular plot.

208 9.4 General Curve Fit Basics

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.5 Using the General Curve Fit

This section explains how to define and apply a General curve fit equation. Other topics include weighting
data, limiting parameters, and defining equations in the library. If you are new to using the General curve fit,
refer to Section 9.4 which covers some basic concepts, including equation structure, initial conditions, the
Curve Fit Definition dialog, and the contents of the General submenu. You may also want to take the guided
tour in Section 2.5.3 to define and apply a General curve fit.

9.5.1 Entering the Curve Fit Definition

There are three methods that can be used to define the curve fit equation. It can be entered directly into the
Curve Fit Definition dialog, loaded from a text file, or defined in the library.

Note: If you want this equation to be available for all future plots, you must be working with a new plot and
the equation must be defined using the Edit General command.

The following sections explain each of these methods. The equation for a Gaussian (bell-shaped) curve is used
as an example. This curve can be expressed by the formula:

a + be ( – ( x – c ) ⁄ d )
2 2

Directly Entering the Definition

The most common way to define an equation is to enter the entire equation in the Curve Fit Definition dialog.
Figure 9-12 shows how the Gaussian equation should appear in this dialog.

Figure 9-12 Directly entering equation

Using Text Files

The second method for defining an equation is to load a text file containing a curve fit definition. This is
accomplished using the File button in the Curve Fit Definition dialog. Clicking this button displays a text
editor which can be used to open, edit, and save text files containing the curve fit definition and any specified
partial derivatives.

KaleidaGraph comes with a Curve Fits folder (in the Examples folder) which contains an assortment of
function definitions. The process of loading a curve fit definition from a text file is relatively easy. The
Gaussian formula from the Curve Fits folder will be used as an example.

9.5 Using the General Curve Fit 209

KaleidaGraph

To load a text file containing a curve fit definition:

1. Click File in the Curve Fit Definition dialog. A text editor appears.
2. Choose File > Open.
3. Locate and open the gaussfit file. This file is in the Peaks folder (in the Curve Fits folder). The
definition and initial guesses for the parameters will be displayed in the editor.
4. Choose File > Exit to display the curve fit equation in the Curve Fit Definition dialog, as shown in
Figure 9-13. You can edit the initial guesses as necessary to try and fit your data.

Figure 9-13 Result of loading text file

Note: The process of saving a set of definitions is similar, except you choose Save As instead of Open in the
text editor.

Using Library Definitions

The library provides another method of defining a curve fit equation. This is commonly used when the curve
fit equation is extremely long. You can use the library to define sections of an equation and tie them all
together to form a formula. Section 9.5.6 contains two examples of defining a curve fit equation in the library

The default library contains several curve fit definitions that can be used to apply a curve fit. One of these
definitions, gaussfit, represents a Gaussian equation. Figure 9-14 shows how this definition is used in the
Curve Fit Definition dialog. The four values in the expression represent the initial guesses for the parameters

Note: The library containing the gaussfit definition must be open for this function to work. If it is not open,
a syntax error occurs.

Figure 9-14 Using library definition

210 9.5 Using the General Curve Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.5.2 Applying a General Curve Fit

To apply a General curve fit:
1. Open the plot window which will have the curve fit applied. Figure 9-15 shows a sample plot.

B Data 1
16

14

12

10

4
-80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80

Figure 9-15 Sample plot

2. Choose a curve fit from the General submenu (Curve Fit menu). A Curve Fit Selections dialog
similar to Figure 9-16 appears. All dependent variables are listed under Column Names.

Figure 9-16 Curve Fit Selections dialog

3. If the equation has not been entered, click Define to enter the equation or shorthand reference to be
applied to the data. Figure 9-17 shows the Curve Fit Definition dialog containing a curve fit
definition. When you are finished, click OK.

Note: For information on including this fit in your master curve fit list, refer to Section 9.4.4.

9.5 Using the General Curve Fit 211

KaleidaGraph

Figure 9-17 Curve Fit Definition dialog

4. Click the check box of each variable to be fit. Typing Ctrl+A (Windows) or +A (Macintosh)
selects all of the variables at once.
5. Click OK. The status dialog in Figure 9-18 is displayed to indicate the current status of the fit. It is
updated after each iteration.

Figure 9-18 Status dialog

Note: Typing Ctrl+Period (Windows) or +Period (Macintosh) cancels a General curve fit. The
current state of the fit is calculated and the resulting curve is drawn.

When the curve fitting process is complete, the curve is drawn on the plot. Once the curve fit is
applied, you can display its equation or extrapolate the fit to the axis limits. These are a few of the
features covered in Sections 9.6–9.8. Figure 9-19 shows the sample plot after applying a General
curve fit and displaying the equation.

212 9.5 Using the General Curve Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

B Data 1
y = m1 + m2*exp(-(m0-m3)*(m0...
16 Value Error
m1 5 2.5606e-08
14
m2 10 4.9058e-08
12 m3 3.3389e-11 7.1266e-08
m4 20 1.2765e-07
10 Chisq 4.2923e-12 NA
R 1 NA
8

4
-80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80

Figure 9-19 Sample plot with General curve fit applied

9.5.3 Weighting Data

The General curve fit provides an option to weight the data. When Weight Data is selected in the Curve Fit
Definition dialog, the data is weighted during the curve fit. These weights are taken from a specified column
in the data window. The weights should represent the individual error values of the fitted data.

Each weight is used internally as: 1/(weight^2). Specifying a weight less than 1.0 for a data point increases the
internal weight of that point and can make the total error much larger. Weight values larger than 1.0 reduce
the internal weights. When Weight Data is not selected, a weight value of 1.0 is used for all data points.

When the Weight Data option is selected and you choose a variable to fit, the dialog in Figure 9-20 appears.
Use this dialog to select the column containing the weights for your data.

Figure 9-20 Selecting column of weights

9.5.4 Fitting Equations with Multiple Independent Variables

Through the use of the table function, KaleidaGraph can fit equations containing multiple independent
variables. For example, to fit an equation like y = a*x + b*x2 +c, you would enter the following curve fit
definition: a*x + b*table(m0, x col, x2 col) + c. You need to replace x col and x2 col with the
appropriate column numbers from the data window (for example, table(m0, c0, c2)). The result of using the
table function is that for each value of x, the corresponding value from the x2 column is evaluated as part of
the curve fit.

9.5 Using the General Curve Fit 213

KaleidaGraph

9.5.5 Setting Limits for Curve Fit Parameters

Limits on curve fit parameters can be set in one of two ways. The first method is to use conditional testing on
the parameter. The second method is to use the limit function from the default library.

Suppose that a General curve fit is being defined to fit a straight line to a set of data. The equation is of the
form: a+b*x. In this example, you want to limit the value of b so that it is not a negative number.

In the Curve Fit Definition dialog, enter either of the following definitions:
a + (b=(b<0) ? 0 : b) *x; a=1; b=1 or a + (b=limit(0, 1000, b))*x; a=1; b=1

In the first definition, a conditional test is performed to see if b is less than zero. If true, b is set to zero; if false,
b is set equal to itself.

In the second definition, the limit function is used. The limit function requires that a lower and upper boundary
be set for the parameter. In this case, zero and 1000 are used to bound the extremes of b.

Whenever a parameter is bound in a General curve fit definition, you must specify partial derivatives.
Otherwise, a Singular Coefficient Matrix error may occur if the parameter being limited gets pegged
at a bounding point for multiple iterations.

9.5.6 Defining Curve Fits in the Library

This section explains how to define two equations in the library and call them from a General curve fit. For
information on the syntax used, see Section 5.8.

Creating a Basic General Curve Fit Definition

This example defines the equation (a*x)/(b+a*x) in the library.

To add the definition to the library:

1. Choose Macros > Library or Curve Fit > General > Library to open the library. The text editor
is displayed containing the contents of the library.
2. Scroll to the end of the library to include the definition with the other curve fit definitions already
present. The definition can be placed anywhere in the library, but it makes it easier to find if all of
the definitions are grouped together.
3. Position the cursor on a new line after the last definition and type the following:
sample1(a0,b0) = (a*x)/(b+a*x)\; a=a0\; b=b0;

4. Once the definition is entered, choose File > Exit to leave the library. The definition is now available
for use in the Curve Fit Definition dialog.

Figure 9-21 shows how to call the library definition from within the Curve Fit Definition dialog. Because of
the two commands (a=a0 and b=b0) that follow the main definition in the library, initial guesses can be entered
directly into the curve fit definition.

214 9.5 Using the General Curve Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

Figure 9-21 Curve Fit Definition dialog

Creating a Complex General Curve Fit Definition

Now that a basic curve fit definition has been defined, let’s create a more complex curve fit definition. This
example creates a definition for the following equation:

a*exp(–(x–b)^2/(c*c)) + d*exp(–(x–f)^2/(g*g)) + h*exp(–(x–i)^2/(j*j))

To add this definition to the library:

1. Open the library again so that the definition can be added. The following commands should be added
to the existing Variable Definitions. These commands are necessary to define a formula that uses all
of the parameters available (m1–m9).

f=m5;
g=m6;
h=m7;
i=m8;
j=m9;
2. Add the following commands to the existing Curve Fit Definitions.

form1() = a*exp(–(x–b)^2/(c*c));
;
form2() = d*exp(–(x–f)^2/(g*g));
;
form3() = h*exp(–(x–i)^2/(j*j));
;
sample2(a0, b0, c0, d0, f0, g0, h0, i0, j0) = form1() + form2() + form3()\;
a=a0\; b=b0\; c=c0\; d=d0\; f=f0\; g=g0\; h=h0\; i=i0\; j=j0;

Notice the original equation has been split into three smaller parts and all three parts are tied together into one
formula. This makes it possible to use curve fit definitions that are longer than the 256 character limit in the
Curve Fit Definition dialog.

Figure 9-22 shows how to call the library definition from within the Curve Fit Definition dialog. The name of
the definition is entered, followed by all of the initial guesses.

9.5 Using the General Curve Fit 215

KaleidaGraph

Figure 9-22 Curve Fit Definition dialog

9.5.7 The General Curve Fit and the Macro Calculator

Calculations for the General curve fit are performed in the Macro Calculator. After performing a General
curve fit, the memory registers in the Macro Calculator store information about the fit. The memory registers
and their contents are listed below:

m0 R value
m1–m9 The values of the parameters.
m22 Chi Square value
m23 % error term
m24 Chi Square of the last iteration.
m25 Number of iterations completed.
m26 Number of parameters in the fit.

Note: Almost all memory registers, alpha registers, and program space are overwritten during the execution
of a General curve fit.

216 9.5 Using the General Curve Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.6 Working with Curve Fit Results

This section explains how to view the results of a curve fit, interpret the values that are reported by
KaleidaGraph, and export the curve fit results for further analysis.

9.6.1 Viewing Curve Fit Results

KaleidaGraph provides two methods to view the results of a curve fit. You can either display the equation on
the plot or view the coefficients in a dialog.

Displaying the Curve Fit Equation

The curve fit equation can be displayed by turning on Display Equation in the Plot menu. The results from
any General, Linear, Polynomial, Exponential, Logarithmic, or Power curve fits are displayed in the plot
window. Not only is the resulting equation displayed, but if any updates occur to the curve fit, the equation
updates automatically.

Depending on the type of curve fit, the equation is displayed in a table or as a text label. The General and
Polynomial curve fits display equations in a table because the equations for these fits can be much longer than
the others. The appearance of the equation can be edited by double-clicking it with the Selection Arrow.

The numeric format of the equation can be controlled using the Equation Label Format command (Format
menu). Some of the options available include number format, number of significant digits, and trailing zeros

Viewing Coefficients
The other method of displaying curve fit results is to view the curve fit’s coefficients in a dialog.

To view the coefficients from the curve fit:

1. Reselect the curve fit from the Curve Fit menu. A Curve Fit Selections dialog similar to Figure 9-23
appears with a drop-down arrow under View for each variable that has a curve fit applied.

Figure 9-23 Curve Fit Selections dialog

2. Click one of the drop-down arrows and choose View Results from the pop-up menu that appears. A
dialog similar to Figure 9-24 will be displayed containing the coefficients from the curve fit.

9.6 Working with Curve Fit Results 217

KaleidaGraph

Figure 9-24 Viewing coefficients

3. To copy the coefficients to the Clipboard, click Clipboard. This enables you to paste the results as
a table in the plot window.
4. To copy the coefficients to the Calculator, click Calculator. This enables you to use the results in a
Formula Entry function.
5. Click OK until you return to the plot window.

9.6.2 Interpreting Curve Fit Results

This section explains some of the values that are calculated when using the General, Linear, Polynomial,
Exponential, Logarithmic, and Power curve fits. The correlation coefficient is calculated for each of these fits,
but only the General curve fit displays the parameter errors and Chi Square value.

Correlation Coefficients
A correlation coefficient (R or R2) is displayed with the curve fit’s equation and coefficients. The correlation
coefficient indicates how well the calculated curve fits the original data.

This value ranges from zero to one. The closer to one, the better the fit. The equation used to calculate the
correlation coefficient is listed in Section D.5.

You can choose to display the Linear Correlation Coefficient (R) or the Coefficient of Determination (R2) as
part of the results. The Display R^2 instead of R check box in the Curve Fit Options dialog (Format menu)
controls which is displayed.

Parameter Errors
The General curve fit displays a column of errors to the right of the parameter values. The errors represent the
standard error values of the parameters. These values should be read as: parameter value ± error.

Chi Square Value

The General curve fit reports a Chi Square value as part of the results. This value is the sum of the squared
error between the original data and the calculated curve fit. In general, the lower the Chi Square value, the
better the fit. The equation used to calculate Chi Square is listed in Section D.5.

218 9.6 Working with Curve Fit Results

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.6.3 Exporting Curve Fit Results

Once a curve fit has been applied, the results of the fit can be exported for further analysis. The export options
include copying the parameter values to the Clipboard or the Calculator, copying the values of the curve fit
line into the data window, and copying the residual values into the data window.

Copying the Parameters to the Clipboard or Calculator

To copy the parameter values to the Clipboard or Calculator:
1. Reselect the curve fit from the Curve Fit menu. A Curve Fit Selections dialog similar to Figure 9-25
appears with a drop-down arrow under View for each variable that has a curve fit applied.

Figure 9-25 Curve Fit Selections dialog

2. To copy the coefficients to the Clipboard, click one of the drop-down arrows and choose Copy
Parameters to Clipboard from the pop-up menu that appears. This enables you to paste the results
as a table in the plot window.

Note: If you paste the results into the plot window, the coefficients in the table do not change if the
curve fit is updated. For this reason, we recommend that you use the Display Equation
command instead.
3. To copy the coefficients to the Calculator, click one of the drop-down arrows and choose Copy
Parameters to Calculator from the pop-up menu that appears. This enables you to use the results
in a Formula Entry function.
4. Click OK to return to the plot window.

Note: It is also possible to copy the parameters by choosing View Results from the pop-up menu and clicking
the Clipboard or Calculator button.

Copying the Curve Fit Values to the Data Window

To copy the values of the curve fit line to the data window:
1. Reselect the curve fit from the Curve Fit menu. A Curve Fit Selections dialog similar to Figure 9-25
appears with a drop-down arrow under View for each variable that has a curve fit applied.
2. Click one of the drop-down arrows and choose Copy Curve Fit to Data Window from the pop-up
menu that appears.
3. Click OK to return to the plot window.

9.6 Working with Curve Fit Results 219

KaleidaGraph

KaleidaGraph will append the results after any existing data in your data window. The first column will be a
series of X values. The number of X values will be equal to the number of curve fit points specified in the
Curve Fit Options dialog (Format menu). The second column will contain the values from the curve fit at each
of these locations.

Note: If you want to use the original X values or supply your own X values, you need to use Formula Entry
to calculate the curve fit values. Section 5.6 provides instructions for using the curve fit functions in
Formula Entry to obtain values from the curve fit.

Copying the Residuals to the Data Window

To copy the residual values to the data window:
1. Reselect the curve fit from the Curve Fit menu. A Curve Fit Selections dialog similar to Figure 9-25
appears with a drop-down arrow under View for each variable that has a curve fit applied.
2. Click one of the drop-down arrows and choose Copy Residuals to Data Window from the pop-up
menu that appears.
3. Click OK to return to the plot window.

KaleidaGraph will append the residual values after any existing data in the data window. These values
represent the difference between the original Y values and the values calculated by the curve fit.

9.7 Removing a Curve Fit

Curve fits can be removed from a plot in the same way that they are added. After applying a curve fit, a check
mark appears next to that type of fit in the Curve Fit menu to indicate that a curve fit is applied.

To remove a curve fit from the plot:

1. From the Curve Fit menu, choose the type of curve fit to be removed. A dialog similar to Figure 9-26
is displayed containing the list of variables. The check box of each fitted variable is selected.

Figure 9-26 Curve Fit Selections dialog

2. Clear any check boxes for the fits to be removed. Clicking Deselect clears all of the check boxes at
once.
3. Click OK to return to the plot and remove the curve fits and any associated equations.

220 9.7 Removing a Curve Fit

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.8 Other Curve Fit Features

The following sections show how to use some of the options available for curve fits. Some of these options
include extrapolating to the axis limits and increasing the number of curve fit points.

The line style, width, and color of the curve fit are controlled using the Plot Style command (Plot menu). The
method for changing these settings is described in Section 7.9.4.

9.8.1 Extrapolating to the Axis Limits

Curve fits are normally displayed between the minimum and maximum data values plotted on the independent
axis. However, you can choose to extrapolate the curve fits to the axis limits. The extrapolated portion of the
fit is based on the calculated equation.

Note: It is not possible to extrapolate the Smoothing fits (Smooth, Weighted, Cubic Spline, and Interpolate)
because they cannot be represented by a single equation.

To extrapolate a curve fit:

1. Choose Format > Curve Fit Options. The dialog in Figure 9-27 appears.

Figure 9-27 Curve Fit Options dialog

2. Select the Extrapolate Fit to Axis Limits check box.
3. Click OK to return to the plot. After recalculating the curve fits, the plot is redrawn to extend the
curve fits to the axis limits.

9.8 Other Curve Fit Features 221

KaleidaGraph

9.8.2 Forcing a Linear Fit Through the Origin

By default, the slope and intercept are calculated when applying a Linear curve fit. KaleidaGraph provides an
option that forces the curve fit to pass through the origin (0,0), so that only the slope of the line is calculated

To force a Linear curve fit through the origin:

1. Choose Format > Curve Fit Options.
2. Select the Force Line fit through zero check box.
3. Click OK to return to the plot. Any Linear curve fits are recalculated with a Y-intercept of zero.

9.8.3 Increasing the Number of Curve Fit Points

Any time a curve fit is applied (except for the Weighted fit), KaleidaGraph calculates a predetermined number
of points along the fit. These points are used to draw the curve fit and calculate values from the fit. You may
find it useful to increase the number of curve fit points when using Formula Entry to place values from the fit
into the data window. This increases the accuracy of these values.

To increase the number of curve fit points:

1. Choose Format > Curve Fit Options.
2. Enter a different value in the Curve Fit Points field. A good starting point is to enter the number of
points that were plotted. You may want to make this value even higher if there are a number of peaks
and valleys in the data.
3. Click OK to return to the plot window and recalculate the fits.

9.8.4 Displaying Only the Curve Fit

There may be times when you are only interested in displaying the curve fit on the plot without the original
data points. This can be accomplished using the Plot Style dialog, provided the plot is not a Scatter plot.

To display only the curve fit:

1. With the plot window active, choose Plot > Plot Style. The Plot Style dialog appears.
2. Use the and buttons to locate the variable to be hidden. The name of the current variable
appears to the right of these buttons.
3. Choose None from the Show Markers pop-up menu and None for the Line Style. This hides the
markers and line used to represent the original data.
4. Click OK to return to the plot. The variable is hidden and only the curve fit is displayed.

222 9.8 Other Curve Fit Features

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.9 Working with Error Bars

Error bars illustrate the amount of error for the plotted data. Error bars normally appear as lines extending from
the data points, with caps on either end to represent the upper and lower values of the spread. KaleidaGraph
supports the use of error bars in all of the plots in the Linear submenu, as well as Probability, X-Y Probability,
Horizontal Bar, Column, and Function plots.

9.9.1 Adding Error Bars

To add error bars to a graph:
1. Select the plot which will have the error bars added.
2. Choose Plot > Error Bars. A dialog similar to Figure 9-28 appears. Each plotted variable is listed,
with two check boxes preceding it.
Note: If you are adding error bars to a Probability, Horizontal Bar, or Column plot, the X Err check
boxes are unavailable .

Figure 9-28 Error Bar Variables dialog

3. Click one of the check boxes for the variable to which you want to add error bars. A dialog similar
to Figure 9-29 appears so that you can specify the options for this particular set of error bars.

9.9 Working with Error Bars 223

KaleidaGraph

Figure 9-29 Error Bar Settings dialog

4. Make your selections, including the color and thickness for the error bars, and click OK.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until error bars have been selected for all of the desired variables.
6. Click Plot to add error bars to the variables in the plot. The plot is redrawn and the error bars are
displayed. Figure 9-30 shows a sample plot containing error bars.

Lot 14003 Daily Sample

28

24

20

16
Jan/1 Jan/5 Jan/10 Jan/15 Jan/19 Jan/24

Figure 9-30 Sample plot with error bars

224 9.9 Working with Error Bars

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.9.2 Plotting Error Values from a Data Column

If you do not want to use one of the available error types, you can supply your own set of error values and plot
them as error bars.

To plot error values from a data column:

1. In the data window, create a column containing the error values.
2. Select the plot which will have the error bars added.
3. Choose Plot > Error Bars to display the Error Bar Variables dialog.
4. Click one of the check boxes to display the Error Bar Settings dialog.
5. Choose Data Column for the error type and select the name of the data column containing the error
values.
6. Click OK. Then, click Plot to add the error bars to the plot.

828

Mean

824

820

816
A B C D E F G H I J
Figure 9-31 Plot with error bars from a data column

9.9.3 Adding Text Error Bars

Error bars can also be used to annotate specific markers or columns in the plot with text labels. When a Text
data column is used for the error type, the data in the column is displayed as text labels at the corresponding
points on the plot. Only data points that have errors associated with them have text labels displayed.

The direction of the labels is the same as the error type selected (horizontal for X Err or vertical for Y Err). If
the Center Text check box is selected, the labels are centered on the markers. Otherwise, they are justified
and placed on the side of the marker which has the error selected. The text labels can be moved individually
with the Text tool or as a group with the Selection Arrow.

Note: Text error bars use the same default attributes as value labels. These labels can also include subscripts
or superscripts. For more information on adding these features to text labels, see Section 8.7.3.

9.9 Working with Error Bars 225

KaleidaGraph

To add text error bars to a plot:

1. In the data window, place the data to be displayed as labels into a Text column. Figure 9-32 shows
a sample data set containing a Text column with error values.

Figure 9-32 Sample data set with text errors

2. Select the plot which will have the error bars added.
3. Choose Plot > Error Bars to display the Error Bar Variables dialog.
4. Click one of the check boxes to display the Error Bar Settings dialog, shown in Figure 9-33.

Figure 9-33 Error Bar Settings dialog

5. Clear the Link Error Bars check box.

226 9.9 Working with Error Bars

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

6. Choose None for one of the portions of the bar. For the other, choose Data Column and select the
text column containing the labels (in this case Errors).
7. To center the labels on the marker, select the Center Text check box. Otherwise, the labels are
justified.
Note: If the Link Error Bars check box is selected and the Center Text check box is cleared, text
labels are placed on both sides of the marker.
8. Click OK. Then, click Plot to add the labels to the plot. Figure 9-34 shows a sample plot with text
error bars added.

6.8
5.35 Test #1

5.25
6
6
4.5

5
Range

3.2
3.1

3.1
4

1.74
1.57
1.48
1.4

0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time
Figure 9-34 Plot with text error bars added

9.9 Working with Error Bars 227

KaleidaGraph

9.9.4 Creating Single-Sided Error Bars

Single-sided error bars are useful when you only want to display the bar on one side of the data point. You can
choose a single error type and decide whether to display the positive or negative portion of the bar.

A special case of these error bars results when the errors are taken from a data column. Here the direction of
the error bar is controlled by the sign of the data and whether positive or negative error types have been
selected. For positive data, bars are displayed in the same direction as the error type. For negative data, the
bars are displayed in the opposite direction.

To create single-sided error bars:

1. Select the plot which will have the error bars added.
2. Choose Plot > Error Bars to display the Error Bar Variables dialog.
3. Click one of the check boxes to display the Error Bar Settings dialog.
4. Clear the Link Error Bars check box.
5. Choose None for either the positive or negative error type.
6. Choose the type of error to be displayed for the other portion of the bar.
7. Click OK. Then, click Plot to add the error bars to the plot. Figure 9-35 shows a sample plot with
single-sided error bars added.

0.8 Sinc(5x)
0.6
Sinc(5x)

0.4

0.2

-0.2

-0.4
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
-π/2 to π/2
Figure 9-35 Plot with single-sided error bars

9.9.5 Adding Error Arcs

Error arcs can be displayed instead of error bars. This is done by selecting the Draw Error Arc check box in
the Error Bar Settings dialog. An arc is displayed when one of the error types is set to None. If both positive
and negative errors are selected for X Err and Y Err, an ellipse is displayed.

All four quadrants of the ellipse can be controlled independently. The vertical distance is determined by the Y
Err and the horizontal distance is determined by the X Err. This gives you a number of possibilities for
displaying error arcs and ellipses.

228 9.9 Working with Error Bars

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

To add error arcs:

1. Select the plot which will have the error arcs added.
2. Choose Plot > Error Bars to display the Error Bar Variables dialog.
3. Click the X Err check box for one of the variables to display the Error Bar Settings dialog.
4. Select the Draw Error Arc check box.
5. Choose the positive and negative error types. Then, click OK. Figure 9-37 shows the dialog
containing selections for the X error.
6. Click the Y Err check box for that same variable to define the vertical dimension of the arc. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 to set up all of the errors of interest. Figure 9-36 shows the Error Bar Settings dialog
containing selections for the Y error.

Figure 9-36 X error selections

9.9 Working with Error Bars 229

KaleidaGraph

Figure 9-37 Y error selections

7. Click Plot to add the error arcs to the plot. Figure 9-38 shows a sample plot with error arcs added,
using the settings for the X and Y Error shown above.

8
7 Test #1

6
5
Range

4
3
2
1
0
0 2 4 6 Time 8 10 12 14

Figure 9-38 Plot with error arcs added

230 9.9 Working with Error Bars

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

9.9.6 Displaying Only the Cap

You have the option to remove the line that connects the data point with the error cap. This is accomplished
by selecting the Draw Cap Only check box in the Error Bar Settings dialog.

This option can help remove a number of unnecessary lines from the plot and make it easier to see the data.
This feature is useful when the Standard Deviation error type is selected. Because all of the error bars are
drawn from the mean, the lines connecting the point and the cap are not needed. By removing the lines and
adjusting the length of the caps, you can have a dashed or solid error line across the entire plot. See
Section 9.9.7 for controlling the cap length.

To display only the error cap:

1. Select the plot which will have the error bars added.
2. Choose Plot > Error Bars to display the Error Bar Variables dialog.
3. Click one of the check boxes to display the Error Bar Settings dialog.
4. Select the Draw Cap Only check box.
5. Choose the positive and negative error types.
6. Click OK. Then, click Plot to add error bars to the plot. Figure 9-39 shows a sample plot with only
the caps displayed and a Standard Deviation error type.

8
Test #1

6
Range

0
0 2 4 6 Time 8 10 12 14

Figure 9-39 Plot displaying only the error caps

9.9 Working with Error Bars 231

KaleidaGraph

9.9.7 Changing the Cap Length

To change the cap length of error bars:
1. Choose Format > Plot Extras. The dialog in Figure 9-40 is displayed.

Figure 9-40 Plot Extras dialog

2. Edit the value in the Error Bar Length field. A cap is not displayed if zero is entered in this field.
3. Click OK to return to the plot.

9.9.8 Removing Error Bars

You can easily remove error bars from individual variables or from all the variables at once.

To remove error bars:

1. Choose Plot > Error Bars. A dialog similar to Figure 9-41 is displayed.

Figure 9-41 Error Bar Variables dialog

232 9.9 Working with Error Bars

 Working with Curve Fits and Error Bars

2. Clear the check boxes of the error bars to be removed. Clicking Deselect clears all of the check boxes
at once.
3. Click Plot to return to the plot window. The plot is redrawn without any error bars.

9.9 Working with Error Bars 233

KaleidaGraph

234 9.9 Working with Error Bars

0 Importing and Exporting
Graphics
Chapter 10

This chapter explains how to:

• Import graphics files from other programs into the plot window.
• Print plots.
• Save plots.
• Copy plots to the Clipboard.
• Export plots for use in another program.
• Use Object Linking and Embedding for exporting plots in the Windows version.
• Use Publish and Subscribe in the plot window of the Macintosh version.

10.1 Importing Graphics

KaleidaGraph is able to import a variety of graphic files created in other programs. Choosing File > Import
displays a submenu which contains the file formats supported by KaleidaGraph.

When you import a graphic file, the picture is placed in the active plot or layout window. You cannot edit any
parts of the imported picture. However, you can move and resize the image, and modify its frame.

Note: A plot or layout window must be the frontmost window on the screen. Otherwise, the graphics options
are unavailable in the Import submenu.

To import a graphic file:

1. Make the desired plot or layout window the active window.
2. From the File menu, choose Open or the appropriate file type from the Import submenu.
3. Locate and open the file to be imported. The imported image appears as an object in the plot or layout
window, with four object handles around it.

10.2 Pasting Graphics

You can paste graphics cut or copied from other programs into the plot and layout windows. When you paste
a graphic, it is placed in the active plot or layout window. You cannot edit any parts of the graphic. However,
you can move and resize the image, and modify its frame.

10.1 Importing Graphics 235

KaleidaGraph

To paste a graphic from the Clipboard:

1. Make the desired plot or layout window the active window.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. The graphic appears as an object in the plot or layout window, with four object
handles around it.

10.3 Printing Plots

KaleidaGraph supports laser printers, plotters, ink jet printers, and any other device that has the appropriate
printer driver installed.

To export a plot to a printer:

1. Make sure the plot window to be printed is active.
2. To change page options, such as page orientation or paper size, use the Print Setup (Windows) or
Page Setup (Macintosh) command from the File menu.
3. Choose File > Print Graphics.
4. Review your printing options and click Print.

Note: The options in the Print Setup, Page Setup, and Print dialogs vary depending on the printer and
operating system.

10.4 Saving Plots

KaleidaGraph can save the plots with or without the data used to create the plot. By default, when you save a
plot, a copy of the data is saved as part of the plot file. This allows you to open a saved plot and make changes
to the plot and the data associated with it (see Section 7.13).

The advantage of saving the plot without the data is that it saves space on the hard disk, especially if you create
plots from large data sets. The drawback is that you cannot make any changes that require the plot to be rebuilt
from the original data. This includes resizing axes, scaling to a new set of limits, editing markers, and
modifying error bars or curve fits.

Note: If the data window used to create a plot is closed before saving the plot, it is saved without the data.

To save a plot with its data:

1. Make sure the plot to be saved is active.
2. Choose Save Graph, Save Graph As, or Export > Plot w/ Data from the File menu.
3. Name the file and select where it should be stored. Then, click Save to export the file to disk.

To save a plot without the data:

1. Make sure the plot to be saved is active.
2. Choose File > Export > Plot w/o Data.
3. Name the file and select where it should be stored. Then, click Save to export the file to disk.

236 10.3 Printing Plots

 Importing and Exporting Graphics

10.5 Copying Plots to the Clipboard

Using the Copy Graph command (Edit menu), plots can be copied to the Clipboard for inclusion in
another program. The Copy Graph command is available when a plot window is active and does not contain
a selection. This command copies the entire plot to the Clipboard. You can then paste the image into another
plot window or into a different program.

To copy a plot to the Clipboard:

1. Make sure the plot window to be exported is active.
2. Choose Edit > Copy Graph. One of the following dialogs is displayed.

Note: If the Copy Selection command is displayed in the Edit menu, something is currently
selected in the plot window. Do not use this command because it causes the image to have
lower resolution.

Figure 10-1 Copy Graph dialog (Windows) Figure 10-2 Copy Graph dialog (Macintosh)

3. Make your selections in the dialog and click OK.

4. The entire plot is now on the Clipboard in a Metafile (Windows) or PICT (Macintosh) format and
can be inserted into another program using the Paste or Paste Special command.

Note: In the Windows version, a normal Metafile and an enhanced Metafile are copied to the
Clipboard at the same time. You may be able to choose which one gets inserted into your
document using the Paste Special command.

10.5 Copying Plots to the Clipboard 237

KaleidaGraph

10.6 Exporting Graphics

KaleidaGraph is able to save plots in a variety of different formats for inclusion in another program. If one of
these files is loaded back into KaleidaGraph, it is treated as a picture. You cannot edit any parts of the picture.
However, you can move and resize the image within the plot or layout window.

To export a plot for use in another program:

1. Make sure the plot window to be exported is active.
2. Choose File > Export and select the desired file format. A dialog similar to Figure 10-3 is displayed
to set the size and scaling of the exported file.

Figure 10-3 Set Graphic Size dialog

3. Click OK after making your selections.
4. Name the file and select where it should be stored. Then, click Save to export the file to disk.

10.7 Exporting EPS Files

Although KaleidaGraph does not directly have the ability to export plots in an EPS format, it is possible to
generate EPS files using PostScript printer drivers. The steps to do this vary between the Windows and
Macintosh platforms.

10.7.1 Windows Version

The following steps explain how to generate an EPS file under Windows 95 and 98. Under Windows NT, an
Adobe PostScript printer driver must be selected in the Print dialog. Other drivers may not allow you to select
EPS for the Output Format.
1. Choose File > Print Graphics.
2. Select the Print to File check box.

238 10.6 Exporting Graphics

 Importing and Exporting Graphics

3. Choose a PostScript driver and click Properties.

4. Click the PostScript tab and choose EPS for the Output Format.
5. Click OK until the Save dialog is displayed. Once you enter a file name, an EPS file is created on
your hard disk that can be imported into another program. You cannot preview the image in the
destination program, but it will print correctly.

10.7.2 Macintosh Version

To export a plot as an EPS file:
1. Make sure v8.0 or later of the Apple LaserWriter driver is selected in the Chooser.
2. Choose File > Print Graphics.
3. The remaining steps depend on the version of the printer driver.
• LaserWriter drivers 8.4 and newer:
- Using the pop-up menus in the Print dialog, change the Destination to File, change
General to Save as File, and change the Format to EPS Mac Enhanced Preview.
- Click Save. Once you enter a file name and click Save, an EPS file is created on your hard
disk.
• LaserWriter drivers 8.0–8.3:
- Change the Destination from Printer to File and click Save.
- Change the Format from PostScript Job to EPS Mac Enhanced Preview. Once you enter
a file name and click Save, an EPS file is created on your hard disk.

10.8 Using Object Linking and Embedding

Note: This section only pertains to the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

Through the use of Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), it is possible to embed a KaleidaGraph plot into
another program. The embedded plot, called an object, becomes part of the source document. The object
maintains a link with KaleidaGraph, allowing you to double-click the object and make changes to the plot from
within KaleidaGraph. When you are finished modifying the object, the changes are reflected in the source
document.

Note: KaleidaGraph acts only as an OLE server, not a client.

10.8.1 Embedding an OLE Object

There are two methods available for embedding a KaleidaGraph plot. The first method is to copy the plot to
the Clipboard and paste it into the source document. The other method is to create and embed a new object
from within the source document.

Copying and Pasting

To embed a KaleidaGraph plot into a document via the Clipboard:
1. Make sure the plot to be exported is active.

10.8 Using Object Linking and Embedding 239

KaleidaGraph

2. Choose Edit > Copy Graph. The dialog in Figure 10-4 is displayed.

Note: If the Copy Selection command is displayed in the Edit menu, something is currently
selected in the plot window. This command cannot be used to embed an OLE object.

Figure 10-4 Copy Graph dialog

3. Make your selections in the dialog and click OK. The Export OLE Data check box must be selected
to include the OLE information with the image.
4. Switch to the destination program and choose Paste or Paste Special. The plot is inserted into the
document as an embedded object.

Creating and Embedding a New OLE Object

To create and embed a new KaleidaGraph plot into a document:
1. Open the document which will receive the embedded plot.
2. Choose the Insert Object command within your program. The name and location of this command
may vary from one program to another.
3. Select the KaleidaGraph Plot check box from the list of object types and click OK. This opens
KaleidaGraph and displays a blank plot window.
4. Import or open the data to be plotted.
5. Switch back to the blank plot window and choose the type of plot you want to create from the
Gallery menu.
6. Make your variable selections and click Replot.
7. When you are finished, choose Update or Update & Return from the File menu to embed the plot
in the document.

240 10.8 Using Object Linking and Embedding

 Importing and Exporting Graphics

10.8.2 Editing OLE Objects

To edit an embedded OLE object:
1. Open the document that contains the embedded KaleidaGraph plot.
2. Double-click the embedded image to open the plot in KaleidaGraph.
3. Make the necessary changes to the plot. The OLE Options command (Edit menu) can be used to
change some of the options (size, scaling, and resolution) of the embedded object.
4. When you are finished, choose Update or Update & Return from the File menu. You can also click
the close box to close the plot and update the object.

Note: To undo the changes that were made to the object, use the Undo or Undo Object command in the
destination program.

10.9 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Plot Window

Note: This section only pertains to the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph.

10.9.1 Creating a Publisher

When you create a publisher, an edition is created which contains a copy of the plot. Editions are separate files
that are saved to disk. When changes are made in the publisher, the changes are automatically reflected in the
edition and any documents subscribing to the edition. You can specify how often changes are sent from the
publisher to the edition and how often subscribers receive changes from the edition.

Note: Only one publisher may be created in a plot window.

To create a publisher from the plot window:

1. Make the plot window to be published active.
2. Choose Edit > Create Publisher. The dialog in Figure 10-5 is displayed.

10.9 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Plot Window 241

KaleidaGraph

Figure 10-5 Create Publisher dialog

3. Specify where to store the edition.
4. Enter a name for the edition in the Name of new edition field.
5. Click Publish.

The published plot is surrounded by a dark border in the plot window. This border indicates that the plot is
published. To hide the border, choose Edit > Hide Borders.

10.9.2 Updating a Publisher

Once the publisher and edition are created, the Publisher Options command (Edit menu) controls how often
changes made to the publisher are sent to the edition. The default is to update the edition as soon as changes
to the publisher are saved. Whenever a new edition is sent, the previous copy of the edition is replaced with
the latest version from the publisher.

10.9.3 Canceling a Publisher

You can cancel the publisher if you no longer want to publish the edition in your document. The contents of
the publisher remain, but the border is removed and the edition is no longer updated.

To cancel a publisher:
1. Click any portion of the published edition.
2. Choose Edit > Publisher Options.
3. Click Cancel Publisher to stop updating the edition. A dialog verifies that you want to remove the
publisher.
4. Click OK to return to the plot window.

242 10.9 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Plot Window

 Importing and Exporting Graphics

10.9.4 Subscribing to an Edition

Use the Subscribe To command (Edit menu) to insert a copy of an edition into your document. This copy is
called a subscriber. Once the subscriber is inserted into the document, any changes received by the edition are
sent to the subscriber.

To subscribe to an edition from the plot window:

1. Open the desired plot window.
2. Choose Edit > Subscribe To. The dialog in Figure 10-6 is displayed.

Figure 10-6 Subscribe To dialog

3. From the list of files, select the name of a published edition.
4. Click Subscribe.

The subscribed edition appears as an object in the plot window. A dark border surrounds the picture, indicating
that it is a subscriber. To hide the border, choose Edit > Hide Borders. You cannot edit any parts of the
picture, however, you can move and resize it within the plot window.

10.9.5 Updating a Subscriber

Once you have subscribed to an edition, the Subscriber Options command (Edit menu) controls how often
updates to the edition are made. By default, the subscriber is updated when the edition receives new
information from the publisher. Whenever a new edition is sent, the previous copy of the subscriber is replaced
with the latest version of the edition.

10.9.6 Canceling a Subscriber

You can cancel the subscriber if you no longer want to receive updates from the edition. The contents of the
subscriber remain, but the border is removed.

To cancel a subscriber:
1. Click any portion of the subscriber.
2. Choose Edit > Subscriber Options.

10.9 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Plot Window 243

KaleidaGraph

3. Click Cancel Subscriber to stop receiving updates from the edition. A dialog verifies that you want
to remove the subscriber.
4. Click OK to return to the plot window.

244 10.9 Using Publish and Subscribe in the Plot Window

1 Working with the Layout
Window
Chapter 11

The layout window can be used to place multiple plots on a single page. It can also be used to add text labels,
graphics, or tables to a single plot or to multiple plots on a page. The layout window replaces the Show Page
feature that was available in earlier versions of KaleidaGraph.

This chapter explains how to:

• Display the layout window.
• Place plots into the layout window.
• Change the size and position of plots in the layout.
• Arrange the plots in the layout window.
• Overlay multiple plots.
• Add a background to the layout.
• Save layout files.
• Export the contents of the layout window.

11.1 Displaying the Layout Window

The layout window can be displayed using the Show Layout (Windows menu) and New Layout (File menu)
commands. The Show Layout command lists any layouts that have been opened or created since the program
was started. If a default layout has been saved (in the KG Layout settings file), this submenu will always
contain an item called KG Layout.

The New Layout command creates an empty layout window. If any changes were made to the current layout,
a dialog asks if you want to save the changes before displaying the new layout window.

When the layout window is active, a Layout menu is added to the menu bar. You can use the commands in
this menu to place plots in the layout, arrange the plots, and add a background or frame to the layout.

11.1 Displaying the Layout Window 245

KaleidaGraph

11.2 Placing Plots in the Layout Window

You can place up to 32 different plots in the layout window. Plots are added to the layout window using the
Select Plot command (Layout menu). Choosing this command displays a submenu that lists the plots that are
currently open, from newest to oldest. When you choose a plot from the list, it is placed in the layout window

The name of the plot appears in the lower-left corner of the plot, as shown in Figure 11-2. This is for
identification purposes only; it is not included when you print or export the layout.

Figure 11-1 Select Plot submenu Figure 11-2 Imported plot

As plots are added to the layout window, KaleidaGraph maintains a link between the cell in the layout and the
position of the plot in the Select Plot submenu. If a particular cell contains the first plot in the list, opening or
creating another plot will cause the cell to display this new plot.

Any time you open, create, or close a plot, it is possible for the plots in the layout to change positions because
the location of the plots in the Select Plot submenu has changed. For this reason, it is best if you open or create
all of your plots before arranging them in the layout window.

It is also possible to use empty cells, shown in Figure 11-3, to organize the layout. These can be added to the
layout window by choosing Layout > New Position. The empty cells can be replaced at a later time by
clicking the cell and choosing a plot from the Select Plot submenu.

Figure 11-3 Empty cell position

Note: If you open several plots in the Macintosh version but find that some of them are not listed in the Show
Layout submenu, you need to allocate more memory to the KaleidaGraph program.

246 11.2 Placing Plots in the Layout Window

 Working with the Layout Window

11.3 Setting Plot Size and Position

There are two methods available for setting the size and position of plots in the layout window. The first
method is to manually drag the plot to resize it or move it to a new position. The second method is to double-
click the plot to specify the size and position via the Plot Size dialog.

11.3.1 Manually Resizing the Plot

The plot size and position can be set directly in the layout window by clicking a plot and dragging. When
resizing a plot, the Axis and Frame buttons in the Plot Size dialog determine whether to resize relative to the
axis or the frame.

When a plot is selected, object handles appear in one of two places. When Axis is selected in the Plot Size
dialog, object handles are displayed at the end of each axis. When Frame is selected, object handles are placed
at the corners of the plot frame. Figure 11-4 shows a plot with Axis selected; Figure 11-5 shows a plot with
Frame selected (in the Plot Size dialog).

Figure 11-4 Plot with Axis selected Figure 11-5 Plot with Frame selected
To manually resize the plot, drag one of the object handles. As you drag, a dialog appears in the upper-left
corner of the layout window. This dialog (shown below) contains the current plot dimensions and axis origin
(offset).

The aspect ratio of the plot is maintained as you resize the plot. By pressing Shift as you drag, it is possible to
resize the plot without maintaining the aspect ratio.

11.3 Setting Plot Size and Position 247

KaleidaGraph

11.3.2 Using the Plot Size Dialog

The size and position of the plots in the layout can also be controlled using the Plot Size dialog. This dialog,
shown in Figure 11-6, is displayed whenever you double-click a plot in the layout window. The settings in this
dialog determine the size and location of the plot, as well as whether or not the aspect ratio of the plot is
maintained.

Figure 11-6 Plot Size dialog

The settings in the Plot Size dialog are discussed below:

• Same as Plot Window - This setting forces the plot in the layout window to be the same size as the
original plot. The location of the plot is controlled using the Origin settings.
• Fix Size - This setting lets you specify the exact size and placement of the plot in the layout.
- The Paper values, listed for X and Y, are the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the printable
space on a sheet of paper.
- The Origin specifies the distance, from the upper-left corner of the print area to the upper-left
corner of either the axis or the frame of the plot (depending on which button is selected).
- The Axis settings, when selected, indicate the length of the axes. If the Axis values are changed,
the Frame values change proportionately.
- The Frame settings, when selected, indicate the length of the frame. If the Frame values are
changed, the Axis values change proportionately.
Note: Typing the word auto allows a floating dimension, while you specify the size of the
other dimension. This maintains the plot’s aspect ratio. When both X and Y values are
entered, without using auto for one of them, the aspect ratio is distorted, resulting in
ellipses rather than circles for the markers.
- The Units being used must be identified as either inches or centimeters.

248 11.3 Setting Plot Size and Position

 Working with the Layout Window

11.4 Arranging Plots

The Arrange Layout command (Layout menu) provides a fast and easy way to take the plots and
organize them in the layout window. The plots are arranged in the order they were added to the layout window,
starting at the top of the page and working down from left to right. When you choose Arrange Layout, the
dialog in Figure 11-7 is displayed.

Note: This command can only be used to arrange plots in the layout window. It does not have any affect on
any other objects in the layout window.

Figure 11-7 Arrange Layout dialog

To arrange the plots in the layout window:

1. Place all of the plots in the layout window.
2. Choose Layout > Arrange Layout.
3. Enter the desired number of rows and columns into the Arrange Layout dialog. You can also specify
the size of the margin around each of the positions in the layout.
4. Click OK. The layout window is divided equally, based on the number of rows and columns entered.
The plots are automatically resized and placed into the positions.

11.4 Arranging Plots 249

KaleidaGraph

Figure 11-8 shows a layout window containing five plots in a random pattern. Figure 11-9 shows the same
layout window after dividing the window into three rows and two columns using the Arrange Layout
command.

Pressure Radius
8 90 8 Pressure
8 cm 3
160 0
4 140 4 cm 3 4
120

100 0 cm 3
0
0 8 0

6 0
180
4 0
1966 (K) 1967 (K) 1968 (K)
-4
-4 270
0
o
5
o
10
o
15
o
20
o
25
o

0o 5o 1 0o 1 5o 2 0o 2 5o
3
140
2 Norm(p)
3 120
1
140 2 Norm(p) 100
0
120 80
1
100 -1 60
80 0
60
-2 40
40
-1
-3 20

99.9
.01

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
9

99.99
1
5
20

.1
-2 0

1
2
3
5
7
8
9
9
9
0 Percent Jan Feb March
Jan Feb March
-3
.01
.1

10
20
30
50
70
80
90
95
99

99.99
99.9
1
5

Percent

160
Radius
90 140
8 cm3
0 120
3
4 cm
100
0 cm3
80

180 60
40
270 1966 (K) 1967 (K) 1968 (K)

Figure 11-8 Before choosing Arrange Layout Figure 11-9 After choosing Arrange Layout

11.5 Overlaying Plots

You can use the layout window to position two or more plots on top of each other. These plots must have the
same frame and axis dimensions. This is useful if you need to display a single plot with more than the
maximum number of variables allowed. By creating separate plots, you can overlay them to get the appearance
of a single plot.

To overlay two or more plots:

1. Open or create all of the plots that you need to overlay. The plots must be identical in size for them
to overlay properly. To ensure that the plots are of equal size, either choose Plot > Define Layout
after creating the first plot or use the first plot as a template for creating any remaining plots. You
can also use the Set Plot Size command (Plot menu) for each plot to make sure the origin, axis, and
frame settings are identical.
2. Remove the text labels from all but one of the plots. The following two plots are used in this example.
Figure 11-10 shows a normal plot with all of its labels intact. Figure 11-11 shows a similar plot with
everything but the legend deleted.

250 11.5 Overlaying Plots

 Working with the Layout Window

example #1
Test #1 Test #2
7
6
5
Range

4
3
2
1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time

Figure 11-10 Sample plot Figure 11-11 Second plot with labels removed

3. Switch to the layout window.

4. Use the Select Plot command (Layout menu) to import the plots into the layout window.
5. Provided that all of the plots are identical in size, you can use the Align tool to overlay the plots. This
is done by selecting the plots and using the Align tool to align either the edges or centers in both the
horizontal and vertical directions. Figure 11-12 shows the result of overlaying the two sample plots
6. The layout window can then be printed, copied to the Clipboard, or saved in a variety of formats.
You can also save this layout for future use.

example #1
Test #1 Test #2
7
6
5
Range

4
3
2
1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time

Figure 11-12 Result of overlaying two plots

11.5 Overlaying Plots 251

KaleidaGraph

11.6 Adding a Background or Border

A background or border can be added to the layout window or to the plots in the layout window. The following
sections explain how to add backgrounds and borders in the layout window.

11.6.1 Adding to the Layout Window

A background can be added to the layout window using the Set Background command (Layout menu). This
allows you to select a fill pattern for any part of the page not covered by a plot. It also lets you have a frame
around the entire layout.

Note: Text labels may or may not have the background displayed behind the text. The Erase Background
command (in the Format menu of the Edit String dialog) controls what happens. When this command
is turned on, the background is erased.

To add a background or border to the layout:

1. Choose Layout > Set Background. The dialog in Figure 11-13 appears.

Figure 11-13 Set Background dialog

2. Make your selections by clicking the appropriate section of each icon. The background is controlled
by the Color icon and the Fill Pattern portion of the Pattern icon. The border is controlled by the Style
icon and the Pen Pattern portion of the Pattern icon. Section 8.9 explains the use of these icons.
3. Click OK to apply the background or border to the layout window. Figure 11-14 shows a layout with
a background applied. The text label at the top has Erase Background turned on and the text labels
below each plot do not.

252 11.6 Adding a Background or Border

 Working with the Layout Window

Test Results
Test #2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time

Lot 1437-98

Test #3
8

4
3

2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Time

Lot 1437-99

Figure 11-14 Sample layout with background

11.6.2 Adding to a Plot in the Layout

It is possible for each plot in the layout window to have its own background and border. This is accomplished
by selecting the plot in the layout and using the Color, Pattern, and Style icons from the bottom of the toolbox

The background is controlled by the Color icon and the Fill Pattern portion of the Pattern icon. If a background
color is specified in the original plot window, these settings do not have any affect on the appearance of the
plot. The border is controlled by the Style icon and the Pen Pattern portion of the Pattern icon.

Note: Any background applied to the layout is also applied to any plots which have None selected for the
Fill Pattern and do not have a background color selected in the original plot window.

11.6 Adding a Background or Border 253

KaleidaGraph

11.7 Exporting the Layout

The contents of the layout window can be exported by copying the layout to the Clipboard, exporting the
layout to a file, or printing the layout.

11.7.1 Copying Layouts

To export a layout to the Clipboard:
1. Make sure the layout window to be exported is active.
2. Choose Edit > Copy Layout. A dialog is displayed to set the size and scaling of the exported image

Note: If the Copy Selection command is displayed in the Edit menu, something is currently
selected in the layout window. Do not use this command because it causes the image to have
lower resolution.
3. Make your selections in the dialog and click OK.
4. The entire layout is now on the Clipboard in a Metafile (Windows) or PICT (Macintosh) format and
can be inserted into another program using the Paste or Paste Special command.

11.7.2 Exporting the Layout to a File

KaleidaGraph is able to save layouts in a variety of different formats for inclusion in another program. If one
of these files is loaded into KaleidaGraph, it is treated as a picture. You cannot edit any parts of the picture.
However, you can move and resize the image within the plot or layout window.

Note: For information on saving the layout in an EPS format, refer to Section 10.7.

To export a layout for use in another application:

1. Make sure the layout window to be exported is active.
2. Choose File > Export and select the desired file format. A dialog is displayed to set the size and
scaling of the exported file.
3. Click OK after making your selections.
4. Name the file and select where it should be stored. Then, click Save to export the file to disk.

11.7.3 Printing Layouts

To print a layout:
1. Make sure the layout window to be printed is active.
2. To change page options, such as page orientation or paper size, use the Print Setup (Windows) or
Page Setup (Macintosh) command from the File menu.
3. Choose File > Print Layout.
4. Review your printing options and click Print.

Note: The options in the Print Setup, Page Setup, and Print dialogs vary depending on the printer and
operating system.

254 11.7 Exporting the Layout

 Working with the Layout Window

11.8 Opening and Saving Layout Files

Once you have created a layout, you can save the organization of the layout for future use. The layout file
stores the following information: size and position of the cells, the contents and location of any text labels or
objects, and the background settings.

The plots are not saved as part of the layout file; however, the cells are assigned position numbers based on
the order of the plots in the Select Plot submenu. For example, if a cell contains the second plot listed in the
Select Plot submenu, the next time you open this layout file, the second plot in the Select Plot submenu will
automatically be loaded into this cell.

Note: To see the position numbers for each of the cells, open the layout file before opening or creating any
plots. Any cells that show Position #0 are empty cells and will not automatically have plots loaded into
them.

To save a layout file:

1. With the desired layout as the active window, choose Save Layout, Save Layout As, or
Export > Layout from the File menu.
2. Give the file an appropriate name and click Save.

To open a saved layout file:

1. Open or create the plots you want to display. There is a precedence for loading plots into the layout
window, as discussed earlier in this section.
2. Use the Open or Import > Layout command (File menu) to open the layout file you saved
previously. The plots are automatically positioned according to the layout. The background and any
text or graphic elements are also displayed in the layout window.

11.9 Other Layout Window Features

11.9.1 Changing the View of the Layout Window
KaleidaGraph provides several magnification levels for changing the view of the layout window. To change
the magnification of the layout, click the Zoom drop-down menu in the lower-left corner of the layout window
and choose the desired zoom level. The available zoom percentages are: 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 300,
and 400%.

11.9.2 Displaying Rulers and Grids in the Layout Window

To turn the rulers and grids on and off in the layout window:
1. With the layout window active, choose Plot > Ruler & Grids.
2. Click the appropriate check boxes to display the rulers, grids, or both.
3. Select the proper units that you want to use.
4. Click OK to return to the layout window.

11.8 Opening and Saving Layout Files 255

KaleidaGraph

11.9.3 Switching Between Layouts

KaleidaGraph provides a Show Layout command in the Windows menu which can be used to switch between
the default KG Layout and any other layouts that have been opened or created since the program was started.
The active layout is listed first in the submenu. Older layouts are listed below the dotted line.

11.9.4 Deleting Items from the Layout

You can delete any unwanted items from the layout window in one of two ways. You can either select the item
and press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh), or select the Eraser from the toolbox and click the
unwanted item. These methods work for plots or any other objects you want to delete.

11.9.5 Refreshing the Layout

The layout window utilizes the Auto Refresh command from the Plot menu. When this command is turned
on, the plots are updated whenever a change is made in the layout window. When Auto Refresh is turned off,
the plots are not updated and are replaced by placeholders in the layout. The plots are not redrawn until the
Auto Refresh command is turned on again.

Turning this command off allows you to make several changes in the layout window without having to wait
for the window to update after each change. This is particularly useful when arranging several plots on a page
or when working with large data sets.

256 11.9 Other Layout Window Features

Command Reference

Appendix A

This chapter provides an overview of the commands available in KaleidaGraph. For more detailed
information, including the options in the various dialogs, refer to the online help.

A.1 File Menu

New
This command creates a blank data window for entering data. By default, new data windows are created 10
columns by 100 rows in size and are named Data 1, Data 2, and so on. To change any of the attributes of
the data window, use the Column Format command (Data menu).

Open
This command opens any KaleidaGraph file that has been previously saved. You can also open text and
Microsoft Excel files. If a plot or layout window is active, this command can import a variety of graphics into
the window.

Merge
You can use this command to combine data from another file with the active data window. This command
opens the data file and places it at the current row and column position. Files may be either KaleidaGraph data
files, Microsoft Excel files, or text files.

Note: If you exceed the 1000 column limit while merging files, only the number of columns needed to reach
the limit is added.

Close
This command closes the active window. Clicking the close box performs the same function.

Note: If you want to close the window without saving any changes, press Shift while either clicking the close
box or choosing File > Close/NoSave.

Update & Return

Note: This command is only available in the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

This command is displayed when editing an embedded OLE object. Choosing this command updates the
embedded plot and returns to the source document. If KaleidaGraph was open prior to editing the OLE object
or if other files were opened before choosing this command, the source document is not automatically
displayed.

A.1 File Menu 257

KaleidaGraph

Save
This command saves the active data, plot, layout, or plot script window. Depending on which window is
active, a Save Data, Save Graph, Save Layout, or Save Script command is displayed.
• Save Data - This command saves the data as a KaleidaGraph data file. If text format is desired, use
the Export command.
• Save Graph - This command saves the plot with its data, provided the data window is still open. If
you want to save the plot using a different format, use the Export command.
• Save Layout - This command saves the cell positions and background, as well as any text or graphic
objects in the active layout window. This command does not save the plots as part of the layout file.
Only the positions of the cells are saved.
• Save Script - This command saves the active plot script. If a plot is used as the graphic template, it
is saved at the same time as the plot script file. In the Windows version, the plot has the same name
as the script, but with a .qpc file name extension. In the Macintosh version, the plot’s file name
contains the first 25 characters of the script’s file name, followed by .plot.

Update
Note: This command is only available in the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

This command is displayed when editing an embedded OLE object. Choosing this command sends the updated
object to the source document.

Save As
This command saves a copy of the current data, plot, layout, or plot script window. Depending on which
window is active, a Save Data As, Save Graph As, Save Layout As, or Save Script As command is
displayed.
• Save Data As - This command saves a copy of the data as a KaleidaGraph data file. If text format
is desired, use the Export command.
• Save Graph As - This command saves a copy of the plot with its data, provided the data window is
still open. If you want to save the plot using a different format, use the Export command.
• Save Layout As - This command saves a copy of the cell positions and background, as well as any
text or graphic objects in the active layout window. This command does not save the plots as part of
the layout file. Only the positions of the cells are saved.
• Save Script As - This command saves a copy of the active plot script. If a plot is used as the graphic
template, it is saved at the same time as the plot script file. In the Windows version, the plot has the
same name as the script, but with a .qpc file name extension. In the Macintosh version, the plot’s file
name contains the first 25 characters of the script’s file name, followed by .plot.

Import
You can use this command to open a variety of files from within KaleidaGraph. Use the submenu to select the
type of document to be imported. The Open dialog is displayed, no matter which type of file you specify. Only
files that are the same type as what you choose from the submenu are displayed.

258 A.1 File Menu

 Command Reference

Export
You can use this command to save a variety of files from within KaleidaGraph. Use the submenu to select the
type of document to be saved. The Save dialog is displayed, no matter which type of file you specify.

Preferences
You can use this command to control how various files are handled when you quit the program. This command
also controls some other general settings for the program.

Note: The settings for this dialog are saved as part of the Style file. If you choose Never for the Style, you
must manually overwrite the default Style file by choosing File > Export > Style.

Print Setup/Page Setup

This command controls printing options such as paper size and page orientation. The options available in this
dialog vary depending on which printer is selected and what operating system you are using. Under Windows,
the Print Setup command is displayed; on a Macintosh, the Page Setup command is displayed.

New Layout
You can use this command to create new layouts from scratch. Choosing this command displays an empty
layout window. For more information on using the layout window, see Chapter 11.

Print
This command prints the contents of the active data, plot, or layout window. If the Macro Calculator or
Formula Entry window is active, you can print the active macro in the Calculator. Depending on which
window is active, a Print Data, Print Graphics, Print Layout, or Print Program command is displayed.
• Print Data - This command prints the entire data set, if a selection does not exist. A maximum of
15 columns may be printed on a single page.
• Print Graphics - This command prints the contents of the active plot window.
• Print Layout - This command prints the contents of the active layout window.
• Print Bitmap - This command is only available in the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph. This
command prints a bitmapped version of the graph. To print a bitmap, press Shift while choosing the
Print Bitmap command from the File menu.
• Print Program - This command prints the active program in the Macro Calculator.

Recent Files
This command displays a submenu that lists the last eight data or plot files that have been opened or saved in
KaleidaGraph. You can open a listed file by choosing its file name from the submenu.

Exit/Quit
This command closes the KaleidaGraph program and returns to the desktop. Under Windows, the Exit
command is displayed; on a Macintosh, the Quit command is displayed.

KaleidaGraph saves any changes to the default Style, Macros, Script, and Layout files, depending on what is
specified in the Preferences dialog. If Prompt is selected for any of the items in the Preferences dialog and
changes have occurred to those particular items, a dialog is displayed.

A.1 File Menu 259

KaleidaGraph

A.2 Edit Menu

Undo/Redo
The Undo command causes the data, plot, or layout window to revert to its state prior to issuing the last
command or operation. If a command or operation cannot be undone, this command is unavailable and is
named Can’t Undo. If it is possible to redo an operation, the Undo command changes to Redo.

Cut
In the data window, the Cut command removes a data selection and places it on the Clipboard. In the plot and
layout windows, the Cut command removes objects, equations, and text labels that have been added to the
original plot. If you cut any part of the original plot, including the labels, titles, or legend, the entire plot is
placed on the Clipboard.
• Cut w/Titles - If Shift is pressed, Cut is replaced by Cut w/Titles. This command includes the
column titles when you cut a data selection.

Copy
If the data window is active, the Copy command places a copy of the data selection on the Clipboard. If a plot
or layout window is active, the Copy Graph, Copy Selection, or Copy Layout command is displayed.
• Copy w/Titles - If Shift is pressed, Copy is replaced by Copy w/Titles. This command includes the
column titles when copying a data selection.
• Copy Graph - This command is available when the plot window is active and nothing is selected.
This command copies the contents of the plot window to the Clipboard as a Metafile (Windows) or
PICT (Macintosh) image. You can then paste the plot into another program.
• Copy Selection - This command is displayed when any object is selected in the plot or layout
window. This command copies the selected object to the Clipboard. If you copy any part of the
original plot, including the labels, titles, or legend, a copy of the entire plot is placed on the
Clipboard.
• Copy Layout - This command is available when a layout window is active and nothing is selected.
This command copies the contents of the layout window to the Clipboard as a Metafile (Windows)
or PICT (Macintosh) image.

Paste
This command places the contents of the Clipboard into a data, plot, or layout window. When data is pasted
into a data window, the data in the first row determines the column’s format. When data is pasted into a plot
or layout window, the data is placed in a table.
• Paste w/Titles - If Shift is pressed, Paste is replaced by Paste w/Titles. This command includes the
column titles when you paste a selection from the Clipboard into a data window.

Note: There is no difference between the Paste and Paste w/ Titles commands when selections are cut or
copied from KaleidaGraph’s data windows (using the Cut, Copy, Cut w/Titles, or Copy w/ Titles
command). If the data on the Clipboard is not from a KaleidaGraph data window, Paste and Paste w/
Titles operate as described above.

260 A.2 Edit Menu

 Command Reference

Clear
In the data window, choose Clear to delete all selected data cells. The cells below the selection shift up to fill
the void.
• Clear w/Titles - If Shift is pressed, Clear is replaced by Clear w/Titles. This command deletes the
column titles along with the data.
In a plot or layout window, Clear removes the selected item from the window. This command does not affect
the contents of the Clipboard. You can also use the Backspace (Windows) or Delete key (Macintosh) to
perform the same function.

Binary Mode/Text Mode

This command controls whether the Cut and Copy commands use binary or text format to copy large amounts
of data to the Clipboard. When copying 1000 cells or less, both a binary and text representation of the data are
copied to the Clipboard. This occurs regardless of the Binary Mode/Text Mode setting.

Binary Mode is much faster and allows you to quickly move large amounts of data between data windows.
Text Mode should be used if you need to copy more than 1000 cells and paste them into a plot window or
another program.

The active mode is listed in the Edit menu and has a check mark in front of it. To switch between modes,
choose the mode that is currently active.

Select All
This command selects all objects in the current window. If a data window is active, Select All makes a data
selection that includes all cells containing data. Any empty cells embedded in the data are also included.

Duplicate
This command makes a copy of selected text or objects in a plot or layout window. The copy is placed slightly
below and to the right of the original. If you duplicate any part of the original plot, including the labels, titles,
or legend, the entire plot is duplicated.

Clear Data
This command clears the contents of an entire data selection. Only the data is removed; the cells are not deleted
as they are with the Clear command. You can also use the Backspace (Windows) or Delete key (Macintosh)
to perform the same function.

Create Publisher
Note: This command is only available in the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph.

This command makes part of the data window or the entire plot window available to other documents by
creating a publisher for the appropriate window. When you create a publisher, a copy of the information is
placed in a new file, called an edition. Editions are separate files that can be saved to disk. When changes are
made in the publisher, the changes are automatically reflected in the edition.

A.2 Edit Menu 261

KaleidaGraph

Subscribe To
Note: This command is only available in the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph.

This command places a copy of an edition, called a subscriber, into your document. Once the subscriber is
inserted, any changes received by the edition are sent to the subscriber. The data and plot windows can both
subscribe to editions.

Publisher Options/Subscriber Options

Note: These commands are only available in the Macintosh version of KaleidaGraph.

These commands determine how often changes are sent from a publisher to an edition and from the edition to
the subscriber. If a publisher is selected, the Publisher Options command is displayed. If a subscriber is
selected, Subscriber Options is displayed.

Paste Link
Note: This command is only available in the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

This command pastes the contents of the Clipboard in the data window as a linked DDE object. The data
pasted into KaleidaGraph maintains a reference to the source document so that when the original file changes,
the changes are reflected in the KaleidaGraph data file.

Create Link
Note: This command is only available in the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

This command creates a DDE link to data in a source document. The linked data maintains a reference to the
source document so that when the original file changes, the changes are reflected in the KaleidaGraph data file

Link Options
Note: This command is only available in the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

This command controls whether the linked data is updated automatically or manually. By default, new links
are set to update automatically. This command can also be used to cancel a DDE link.

OLE Options
Note: This command is only available in the Windows version of KaleidaGraph.

This command is only displayed when editing an embedded OLE object. This command controls some of the
settings (size, scaling, and resolution) of the embedded object.

Hide Borders/Show Borders

The Hide Borders command hides the borders surrounding linked data under Windows, and publishers and
subscribers in the Macintosh version. Once you hide the borders, the command changes to Show Borders.
Use the Show Borders command to redisplay the borders.

Edit Text
This command displays KaleidaGraph’s text editing facility. The text editor is useful for editing the contents
of the Clipboard and other small editing tasks.

262 A.2 Edit Menu

 Command Reference

A.3 Gallery Menu

The Gallery menu lists the types of plots that can be created in KaleidaGraph. For more information on a
specific plot type, see Section 6.1 or refer to the online help.

A.4 Plot Menu

Axis Options
This command controls the limits, ticks, grids, and labels for the horizontal and vertical axes in the active plot

Plot Style
This command controls the markers, fill patterns, line styles, and colors which are used in various plots to
represent the plotted variables.

Auto Link
When this command is turned on, the plot automatically updates whenever a value is changed in the data
window. After changing a data value, moving to another cell causes the update to occur. All curve fits and
error bars are automatically recalculated. When Auto Link is turned off, the plot is not updated.

Update Plot
This command forces an immediate regeneration of the plot from the original data set. Clicking the Update
Plot button ( ) in the data window performs the same function.

Auto Refresh
When this command is turned on, the plot or layout window is redrawn whenever a change is made. When
Auto Refresh is turned off, the plot or layout window is not redrawn until this command is turned on again.

Display Legend
When this command is turned on, the legend is displayed in the plot window. The legend can be removed by
turning off this command or using the Backspace (Windows) or Delete key (Macintosh) when the legend is
selected (which also turns off the Display Legend command). The Eraser tool removes the legend
permanently, without turning off this command.

Display Title
When this command is turned on, the plot title is displayed in the plot window. The plot title can be removed
by turning off this command or using the Backspace (Windows) or Delete key (Macintosh) when the title is
selected (which also turns off the Display Title command). The Eraser tool removes the plot title permanently,
without turning off this command.

Display Equation
When this command is turned on, the results from curve fits that have closed form solutions (equations) are
displayed in the plot window. This includes the General, Linear, Polynomial, Exponential, Logarithmic, and
Power curve fits. To change the precision of the results, use the Equation Label Format command (Format
menu).

A.3 Gallery Menu 263

KaleidaGraph

Error Bars
You can use this command to add horizontal and vertical error bars to all of the Linear plots, as well as
Probability, X-Y Probability, Horizontal Bar, and Column plots. Error bars illustrate the amount of error for
the plotted data. They normally appear as lines extending from the data points, with caps on either end to
represent the upper and lower values of the spread.

Add Values
When this command is turned on, the numerical values of bars or columns, or the percentage value of pie slices
are automatically placed on the plot. This command affects Pie, Horizontal Bar, Stack Bar, Column, and Stack
Column plots. The values can be removed by turning off this command or using the Backspace (Windows)
or Delete key (Macintosh) when the labels are selected as a group. The Eraser tool can be used to remove
individual labels.

The values may be moved as a group with the Selection Arrow, or individually with the Text tool. To change
the format of the values displayed, choose Format > Value Label Format.

Extract Data
This command displays the data used to create a saved plot. The Find Data button ( ) in the plot window can
also be used to extract this data. The Extract Data command is unavailable if the data was not saved with the
plot or if it was already extracted.

Define Layout
This command is used to save the basic characteristics of the current plot as a mini-template. Any new plots
of that type have the same layout as the original. The layout saves the position of the legend, axes, and titles,
the default style for the legend, and the size of the axes, frame, and legend.

Each plot type has its own layout. All layouts are saved in the Style file.

Set Plot Size

You can use this command to specify the exact size and position of the axes or frame for the active plot.

Ruler & Grids

You can use this command to display a ruler and a grid in the plot and layout windows.

A.5 Data Menu

Overwrite Mode
When this command is selected, cells are automatically selected when you use the mouse or keyboard to move
to a cell. Typing data into the current cell replaces any existing data.

Insert Mode
When this command is selected, clicking a cell does not automatically select the cell. Instead, a cursor is placed
in the cell to edit the current value. To select a cell in Insert Mode, you must double-click the active cell.

264 A.5 Data Menu

 Command Reference

Append Columns
This command appends the specified number of columns to the data window. If the current cell is in the last
column of the data window, pressing Right Arrow automatically adds a new column.

Insert Column
This command inserts an empty column to the left of the column currently selected.

Delete Column
This command removes selected columns from the data window. You can remove a single column or a group
of columns using this command.

Insert Row
This command inserts an empty row above the row currently selected. A row can be inserted in a single
column or a range of columns.

Delete Row
This command removes selected rows from the data window. You can remove an entire row or a data selection
from the data window.

Add Rows
This command adds the specified number of rows to the data window. Rows are added in multiples of 100. If
the active cell is in the last row of the data window, pressing the Enter (Windows), Return (Macintosh), or
Down Arrow key adds 100 rows to the data window.

Compress Rows
This command compresses a data window to its minimum size by deleting all empty rows that follow the last
physical row of data. Rows are deleted in multiples of 100. A data window will never have less than 100 rows

Go To Cell
This command is used to view an exact cell location in the data window. Choosing Go To Cell displays a
dialog to enter the row and column numbers of the desired cell. The data window automatically scrolls to make
that cell position visible.

Column Format
This command is used to edit column titles and change the format of any column in the data window.

Posted Note
This command displays the Posted Note of the active data window. The same result can be obtained by
clicking the Posted Note button ( ) in the data window. The Posted Note can be used to store information
about the active data set.

A.5 Data Menu 265

KaleidaGraph

A.6 Functions Menu

Ascending Sort
This command sorts numeric or text data in ascending order (from low value to high value). You can sort a
column, a range of columns, or any data selection.

Descending Sort
This command sorts numeric or text data in descending order (from high value to low value). You can sort a
column, a range of columns, or any data selection.

Create Series
This command fills a selection in a data window with an arithmetic, geometric, or time series of data. This
command does not generate a series in a Text column.

Transpose
This command converts columns to rows and rows to columns. For example, if a selection contains four
columns and 128 rows, it contains 128 columns and four rows after transposing the data.

Bin Data
This command provides a Histogram-like binning feature. The Bin Data dialog calculates the number of data
points within each bin, based on the number of bins and the specified data range. The results can be exported
in any one of three formats for plotting or for annotating a plot.

Statistics
This command displays the statistics for the frontmost data window. The Statistics dialog provides a split-
screen display so that any two columns within the same data window can be compared.

Student t
This command performs a t-test on selected data. KaleidaGraph provides four types of tests: the single sample
t-test, the paired t-test, the unpaired t-test with equal variance, and the unpaired t-test with unequal variance.

Mask
This command masks one or more selected cells. Masked data is not plotted or used in curve fits. In the data
window, masked data is shaded (with a stipple pattern) to make it stand out from unmasked data.

Unmask
This command unmasks any masked data in the selected region of the data window.

266 A.6 Functions Menu

 Command Reference

A.7 Macros Menu

The Macros menu lists three commands followed by a list of the macros stored in your Macros file. This
section contains an overview of the macros provided with KaleidaGraph. For more information about a
specific macro, refer to the online help.

Show Macros
This command can be used to add new macros to the menu, remove macros already present, and rearrange the
macros. A maximum of 100 macros can be stored in this menu at once.

Note: The macros stored in the Macros menu are saved, by default, in a file called KGMacros (Windows)
or KG Macros (Macintosh). This file is loaded each time you start KaleidaGraph. To open a custom
file, use the Open or Import commands in the File menu.

Edit Macros
You can use this command to edit macros currently listed in the Macros menu.

Library
This command displays the contents of the current library. The library is a place where you can enter aliases
or shorthand references for functions, variables, and constants. For more information on using the library, refer
to Section 5.8.

Default Macros
This section describes the default macros that are supplied with KaleidaGraph. If these macros are not listed
in the Macros menu, see the troubleshooting section in the online help for instructions on adding them to the
menu.
• Filter - This macro eliminates outliers from a varying curve. It computes a moving-average curve
with a user-defined window size as the reference curve for comparison against the data.
• Smooth - This macro computes a moving average of a curve. The resulting column of data is the
average of the n-points surrounding the current data point. In this macro, n must be odd.
• Simplify - This macro masks any consecutive data points that do not differ from the last unmasked
value by a certain error. Notice that this is the opposite of what the Filter macro does.
• Invert Mask - This macro masks unmasked data and unmasks masked data.
• Integrate - Area - This macro finds the area under a curve, given a lower and upper limit and X-Y
data points describing the curve. The area is found by calculating the sum of the trapezoids formed
by the data points and, if necessary, interpolating the points forming the lower and upper limits.
• Integral - Curve - This macro finds the incremental area under a curve, given the X-Y data points
describing the curve. The macro then generates a new curve. The area is the sum of the trapezoids
formed by the data points and the reference value.
• Derivative - This macro finds the incremental slope of a curve, given the X-Y data points describing
the curve. The macro then generates a new curve. The slope is calculated using the two-point slope
formula.

A.7 Macros Menu 267

KaleidaGraph

• Series - This macro creates the series: xo, 2*xo, 3*xo, ... (by default, xo=1).

• Unit Series - This macro creates the series: xo, 1+xo, 2+xo, ... (by default, xo=1).

• π Series - This macro creates the series: –π/2, ..., –ε, +ε, ..., +π/2 (where ε=π/(# of selected rows)).
• Sinc (5x) - This macro creates a column containing sin(5x)/(5x).
• abs(x) - This macro takes the absolute value of the selected column and replaces the column in place
• Random# - This macro generates a series of random numbers between a lower and upper limit. The
resulting series of numbers is stored in column 0.

Other Macros
The following macros are not in the default Macros file, but are stored in the Macro Source folder as text files.
You may load these files into the Macro Calculator using either the File > Import > Program Text command
or the Open command in the program editor of the Macro Calculator.
• View General - This macro displays the results of the previous General curve fit.
• View Covariances - This macro displays the covariances of the previous General curve fit.
• Paste Covariances - This macro places the covariance/correlation matrix of the previous General
curve fit in the selected region of the data window. A group of cells must be selected before executing
this macro.

A.8 Format Menu

Plot Extras
This command controls the length and thickness of several plot elements. You can also set some of the options
associated with Line and Column plots.

Plot Color
This command controls the frame, grid, interior, and background colors of the plot. If None is selected for the
interior or background color, that portion of the plot is transparent.

X Label Format
This command controls the format of the labels on the X axis.

Y Label Format
This command controls the format of the labels on the Y axis.

Y2 Label Format
This command controls the format of the labels on the Y2 axis.

X2 Label Format
This command controls the format of the labels on the X2 axis.

268 A.8 Format Menu

 Command Reference

Value Label Format

This command controls the format of any value labels on the plot. Value labels are displayed when you use
the Add Values command (Plot menu) or add text error bars.

Equation Label Format

This command controls the format and precision of any curve fit equations on the plot.

Text Options
This command controls several options associated with text labels, including the default attributes used for the
various labels in the plot window.

Polar Options
This command controls the grid type, data format, reference angle, and direction for Polar plots.

Curve Fit Options

This command controls several options associated with curve fits, including whether or not curve fits are
drawn to the axis limits.

Probability Options
This command controls the type of distribution used in Probability plots. You can choose between a linear or
normal distribution.

Histogram Options
This command controls the bin size, reference value, and number of extra bins in a Histogram plot.

Step Options
This command controls the placement of the steps when using a Step plot.

A.9 Object Menu

Align
You can use this command to align selected objects in the plot or layout window. When using one of the edge
options, objects are aligned by their border centers, regardless of the thickness.

Up
This command moves one or more selected objects forward one level in the object order of a plot or layout
window, changing the draw order of the objects.

Bring To Front
This command moves one or more selected objects in front of all other objects in a plot or layout window,
changing the draw order of the objects.

A.9 Object Menu 269

KaleidaGraph

Down
This command moves one or more selected objects backward one level in the object order of a plot or layout
window, changing the draw order of the objects.

Send To Back
This command moves one or more selected objects behind all other objects in the plot or layout window,
changing the draw order of the objects.

Group
This command combines two or more objects into a single object.

UnGroup
This command separates a previously grouped object into its original components.

Edit Object
You can use this command to edit text, arrows, polygons, Bezier curves, tables, and plot axes. If a different
type of object is selected when you choose this command, a beep sounds to let you know that the selected item
cannot be edited.

Edit Colors
You can use this command to edit the colors on the palette, save a custom color file, load a saved color file,
or print the current palette. You can also reset the palette to its original defaults using this command.

Edit Arrow Heads

You can use this command to customize the height, length, and inset for each arrow style. You can also reset
the arrowheads to their default settings using this command.

A.10 Curve Fit Menu

The Curve Fit menu lists the types of curve fits that can be applied within KaleidaGraph. For more information
on a specific type of fit, refer to Section 9.1 or the online help. The following two commands are associated
with the General curve fit. See Section 9.5 for more information on the use of these commands.

Edit General
This command can be used to add new fits to the submenu, remove fits already present, and rearrange fits. A
maximum of 16 curve fits can be stored in this submenu.

Library
This command displays the contents of the current library. One of the main reasons for using the library is to
form aliases or shorthand references for functions, variables, and constants. This is particularly useful for
defining sections of a formula that exceed the 256 character limit in the Curve Fit Definition dialog for the
General curve fit. Section 9.5.6 provides some examples for defining curve fit equations in the library and
calling the definitions from the Curve Fit Definition dialog.

Note: Do not use the library to open text files containing saved curve fit definitions. These should be opened
from within the Curve Fit Definition dialog.

270 A.10 Curve Fit Menu

 Command Reference

A.11 Layout Menu

New Position
This command places an empty cell in the layout window. To place a plot into an empty cell position, click
the cell and select a plot from the Select Plot submenu.

Select Plot
You can use this command to place plots into the layout window. If you want to replace a plot or empty cell
in the layout, click the item to be replaced and choose a plot from the Select Plot submenu.

Arrange Layout
You can use this command to arrange the plots in the layout window by specifying the number of rows and
columns you want to have. The layout window is divided into equal sections, with each plot occupying one of
the divisions. The plots are arranged in the order they were added to the layout window, starting at the top of
the page and working down from left to right.

Set Background
You can use this command to set a background and border for the layout window.

A.12 Windows Menu

Hide Window
This command can be used to hide an open window. Hidden data and plot windows can be redisplayed using
the Show Data and Show Plot commands.

Show Data
This command can be used to bring any data window to the front.

Show Plot
This command can be used to bring any plot window to the front.

Show Layout
This command brings the selected layout window to the front. Each time you open or create a layout, it is
added to the Show Layout submenu.

If a default layout has been saved (in the KG Layout settings file), this submenu will always contain an item
called KG Layout. It is not possible to permanently add layouts to this submenu. They are only remembered
until you quit the program.

Clipboard
This command displays the Clipboard window, which contains the last item that was cut or copied. The
contents of the Clipboard remain intact until another selection is cut or copied. The contents also remain when
switching between programs. This allows you to easily transfer selections between programs.

A.11 Layout Menu 271

KaleidaGraph

Macro Calculator
This command displays the Macro Calculator. The calculator combines the RPN (Reverse Polish Notation)
programming language with support for 1000 program steps to give you a number of ways to manipulate and
transform data. Refer to the online help or the Macro Calculator online manual (on the CD-ROM) for more
information on the Macro Calculator.

Formula Entry
This command displays the Formula Entry window. See Chapter 5 for information on using the Formula Entry
window.

Plot Script
This command can be used to create a number of plots at once that all have the same characteristics. See
Section 6.4.3 for information on using the Plot Script command.

Show All Plots

This command displays all open plot windows at once.

Hide All Plots

This command hides all open plot windows at once.

Close All Plots

This command closes all open plot windows at once. A dialog appears if any of the plots contain unsaved
changes.

Close All Data

This command closes all open data windows at once. A dialog appears if any of the data windows contain
unsaved changes.

Menu Shortcuts
This command can be used to add or change keyboard shortcuts for commands in KaleidaGraph. These
shortcuts are saved as part of the Macros file.

Rename
This command can be used to edit the name of the data, plot, or layout window, without having to save it to
disk.

272 A.12 Windows Menu

KaleidaGraph’s Settings Files

Appendix B

KaleidaGraph maintains four settings files to save the modifications made to the program. These files are
opened each time you start KaleidaGraph, provided they are in the correct location and have the correct file
name. If a settings file has a different name or is located in a different directory, the file is skipped.

B.1 Style Files

Style files contain the settings for most of KaleidaGraph’s dialogs. Any changes made to the original defaults,
such as text attributes, plot layout, and dialog settings, are saved in the Style file.

A default Style file is automatically opened each time KaleidaGraph is started. This way you can save the
settings and have them opened the next time you use the program. The name and location of this file differs
between the Windows and Macintosh versions of KaleidaGraph.
• Windows: The default settings file is named KGStyle. This file must be in the same directory as
KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.
• Macintosh: The default settings file is named KG Style. This file must be in the Preferences folder
(System Folder) or in the same folder as KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.

Custom Style files can be created by choosing File > Export > Style. These files can be opened by choosing
Open or Import > Style from the File menu. All of the settings change to reflect the contents of the new
Style file.

B.2 Macros Files

Macros files contain the macros in the Macros menu, the contents of the library, any formulas assigned to the
function buttons in Formula Entry, the settings in the Text File Input Format dialog, the keyboard shortcuts,
and the curve fits in the General submenu.

A default Macros file is automatically opened each time KaleidaGraph is started. This way you can save the
settings and have them opened the next time you use the program. The name and location of this file differs
between the Windows and Macintosh versions of KaleidaGraph.
• Windows: The default settings file is named KGMacros. This file must be in the same directory as
KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.
• Macintosh: The default settings file is named KG Macros. This file must be in the Preferences
folder (System Folder) or in the same folder as KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.

B.1 Style Files 273

KaleidaGraph

Custom Macros files can be created by choosing File > Export > Macros. These files can be opened by
choosing Open, Import > New Macros, or Import > Append Macros from the File menu. All of the affected
menus and options change to reflect the contents of the new Macros file.

B.3 Layout Files

Layout files contain the cell positions and background, as well as any text or graphic objects in the active
layout window. These files do not save the plots as part of the layout file. Only the positions of the cells are
saved.

A default Layout file is automatically opened each time KaleidaGraph is started. This way you can save a
layout and have it opened the next time you use the program. You can access the default layout by choosing
Windows > Show Layout > KG Layout. The name and location of this file differs between the Windows and
Macintosh versions of KaleidaGraph.
• Windows: The default settings file is named KGLayout. This file must be in the same directory as
KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.
• Macintosh: The default settings file is named KG Layout. This file must be in the Preferences
folder (System Folder) or in the same folder as KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.

Custom Layout files can be created by choosing Save Layout or Export > Layout from the File menu when
a layout window is active. These files can be opened by choosing Open or Import > Layout from the File
menu. The layout opens into a new window, displaying any items that were saved as part of the layout.

B.4 Script Files

Script files contain the settings and group selections from the Plot Script window.

If one has been created, a default Script file is automatically opened each time KaleidaGraph is started. This
way you can save the plot script and have it opened the next time you use the program. The name and location
of this file differs between the Windows and Macintosh versions of KaleidaGraph.
• Windows: The default settings file is named KGScript. This file must be in the same directory as
KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.
• Macintosh: The default settings file is named KG Script. This file must be in the Preferences folder
(System Folder) or in the same folder as KaleidaGraph for it to be opened.

Custom Script files can be created by choosing Save Script or Export > Script from the File menu when the
Plot Script window is active. These files can be opened by choosing Open or Import > Script from the File
menu. The Plot Script window changes to reflect the contents of the new Script file.

274 B.3 Layout Files

Toolbox Shortcuts

Appendix C

This chapter lists the shortcuts available for selecting plot tools and making changes to plot elements directly
from the toolbox. The online help contains information about the other kinds of shortcuts available in
KaleidaGraph.

C.1 Shortcuts for Selecting Plot Tools

The table below lists the keyboard shortcuts available for selecting the various plot tools.

To: Press:

Select the Selection Arrow Spacebar

Select the Text tool T
Select the Line/Arrow tool L
Select the Box tool 1
Select the Rounded-Rectangle tool 2
Select the Oval tool 3
Select the Polygon tool 4
Select the Arc tool 5
Select the Bezier curve tool 6
Activate whatever Object tool is selected in the pop-up menu O
Select the Table tool A
Select the Eraser tool E
Select the Identify tool I
Select the Data Selection tool S
Select the Zoom Selection tool Z
Activate the last tool selected Ctrl (Windows) or
(Macintosh)

C.1 Shortcuts for Selecting Plot Tools 275

KaleidaGraph

C.2 Changing Axis Options from the Toolbox

Before using the toolbox to change the axis options, an axis must be selected by clicking twice
on the desired axis. The bottom portion of the toolbox will display the icons shown to the right.

C.2.1 Exchanging and Removing Axes

To exchange or remove axes:
1. Select the desired axis.
2. Click the first Axis Options icon to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Turn on Swap X & Y to exchange the X and Y axes or No Axis to remove the selected axis and its
tick marks.

C.2.2 Axis Scaling, Reversing, and Auto Limits

To change scaling, reverse an axis, or return to auto limits:
1. Select the desired axis.
2. Click the second Axis Options icon to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Choose Log or Linear to change the axis scaling, turn on Reverse to reverse the axis, or turn on
AutoScale to return to the limits originally calculated by KaleidaGraph. The rest of the options are
discussed in Sections C.2.4–C.2.6.

276 C.2 Changing Axis Options from the Toolbox

 Toolbox Shortcuts

C.2.3 Linking Axes

To link the X2 or Y2 axes:
1. Select the X2 or Y2 axis.
2. Click the second of the two Axis Options icons to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Choose Link to display the submenu shown below.

4. Choose the type of link to be used for the selected axis.

C.2.4 Tick Marks

To change the display of tick marks or let KaleidaGraph calculate the number of ticks:
1. Select the appropriate axis.
2. Click the second of the two Axis Options icons to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Choose Major or Minor to display a submenu that contains the tick mark options. The submenus
for Major and Minor are identical.

4. Use the Inside and Outside commands to change how the ticks are displayed. Turn on Auto to have
KaleidaGraph calculate the number of tick marks displayed on the selected axis.

C.2 Changing Axis Options from the Toolbox 277

KaleidaGraph

C.2.5 Grid Lines

To change how the grid lines are displayed:
1. Select the appropriate axis.
2. Click the second of the two Axis Options icons to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Choose Major or Minor to display a submenu that contains the grid line options. The submenus for
Major and Minor are identical.

4. Turn on Grid to display a gray (dotted) line or Solid to display a solid line. If both items are turned
off, grid lines are not displayed.

C.2.6 Axis Labels

To change the display of the axis labels:
1. Select the desired axis.
2. Click the second of the two Axis Options icons to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Choose # Format to display a submenu that contains the display options. The options in the submenu
depend on the format of the data plotted along the selected axis. The following three figures show
the submenus that appear for Numeric (Float, Double, or Integer), Date, and Time formats.

278 C.2 Changing Axis Options from the Toolbox

 Toolbox Shortcuts

Numeric formats Date formats Time formats

Using these options, you can change the format of the axis labels as well as display trailing zeros,
commas, a prefix, or a suffix. Changes are based on the current settings in the appropriate Label
Format dialog (Format menu).
4. Make the desired changes to the submenu.

C.3 Changing Plot Style from the Toolbox

Before using the toolbox to change the variable options, a plot symbol must be selected in the
legend by clicking twice on the symbol. The bottom portion of the toolbox will display the Plot
Style icons shown to the right.

C.3.1 Variable Color

To change the variable color from the toolbox:
1. Select a plot symbol in the legend.
2. Click the Variable Color icon to display a color palette containing the current color choices.

C.3 Changing Plot Style from the Toolbox 279

KaleidaGraph

3. Select a different color from the palette.

C.3.2 Marker Type, Size, or Number of Markers

To change the marker type, size, or number of markers displayed:
1. Select a plot symbol in the legend.
2. Click the Marker icon to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Select a different marker type, size, or number from the pop-up menu.

C.3.3 Fill Pattern

To change the fill pattern of the variable:
1. Select a plot symbol in the legend.
2. Click the Fill Pattern icon to display the pop-up menu shown below.

3. Select a different fill pattern from the pop-up menu.

280 C.3 Changing Plot Style from the Toolbox

 Toolbox Shortcuts

C.3.4 Variable Line Style or Width

To change the variable’s line style or width:
1. Select a plot symbol in the legend.
2. To change the line style, click the left portion of the Style icon and select a different line style. The
active line style is enclosed in a dotted box.
3. To change the line width, click the right portion of the Style icon and select a different line width.
The active line width is enclosed in a dotted box.

Line Style pop-up menu Line Width pop-up menu

C.4 Changing Plot Color from the Toolbox

Before using the toolbox to change the plot colors, either the plot frame or an axis must be selected. If the
frame is selected, you can edit the interior and background colors. If an axis is selected, you can change the
frame and grid colors.

C.4.1 Interior and Background Colors

To change the interior or background colors from the toolbox:
1. Click any of the axes once to select the plot’s frame. The bottom portion of the
toolbox will display the icons shown to the right.
The Color icon controls the interior and background color. It consists of two sections:
an interior color icon (upper left) for setting the plot’s interior color, and a background
icon (lower right) for setting the background color.
2. Click one of the icons in the palette to display a color palette containing the color choices.

C.4 Changing Plot Color from the Toolbox 281

KaleidaGraph

3. Select a different color from the palette.

To make the interior or background of the plot transparent:

1. Click any of the axes once to select the plot’s frame. The bottom portion of the toolbox will display
two icons.
2. Click the bottom icon to display the following pop-up menu.

3. Turn on either of the commands in this pop-up menu to make that portion of the plot transparent.

C.4.2 Frame and Grid Colors

To change the frame or grid colors from the toolbox:
1. Select one of the plot’s axes. The bottom portion of the toolbox will display the icons
shown to the right.

The first icon controls the frame and grid color. It consists of two sections: a frame
color icon (upper left) for setting the plot’s frame color, and a grid icon (lower right)
for setting the grid color.
2. Click one of the icons in the palette to display a color palette containing the color choices.

3. Select a different color from the palette.

282 C.4 Changing Plot Color from the Toolbox

 Toolbox Shortcuts

C.5 Changing Text Attributes from the Toolbox

Holding down the mouse button after clicking the Text tool displays the pop-up menu shown below. You can
use this pop-up menu to change the attributes of selected text objects directly from the toolbox. If a selection
is not present in the plot window, the default attributes can be set for any text labels created with the Text tool

To change the attributes of a text label directly from the toolbox:

1. Select the label(s) to be modified.
• Individual labels are selected by clicking the label once with either the Text tool or Selection
Arrow.
• Legend text is selected by clicking the label once with the Text tool.
• Axis or value labels are selected as a group by clicking any of the labels in the group with the
Selection Arrow. They may also be selected individually by clicking with the Text tool.
• Multiple text labels can be selected by pressing Shift and clicking each label with the Selection
Arrow.
• All of the text labels can be selected at once by choosing Edit > Select All. Everything in the
plot is selected, but changes made using the Text tool only affect text objects.
2. Click the Text tool and hold down the mouse button to display the pop-up menu.
3. Choose any of the commands in the pop-up menu. Choosing any of the commands except Erase
Background displays a submenu that contains the options for that item.
4. Continue making selections from the pop-up menu until all of the labels are set up as desired.

To set the default attributes:

1. Verify that a selection is not present in the plot window.
2. Click the Text tool and hold down the mouse button to display the pop-up menu.
3. Choose any of the commands in the pop-up menu. Choosing any of the commands except Erase
Background displays a submenu that contains the options for that item.
4. Make the desired changes in the pop-up menu.

Any text objects that you create with the Text tool have these attributes. The attributes that you set are saved
as part of the Style file. You can also use the Text Options command (Format menu) to set the defaults for
standard text labels.

C.5 Changing Text Attributes from the Toolbox 283

KaleidaGraph

284 C.5 Changing Text Attributes from the Toolbox

Reference Information

Appendix D

This chapter provides information on the methods and equations used in different areas of the program.

D.1 Box Plot Definition

Each box encloses 50% of the data with the median value of the variable displayed as a line. The top and
bottom of the box mark the limits of ± 25% of the variable population. The lines extending from the top and
bottom of each box mark the minimum and maximum values within the data set that fall within an acceptable
range. Any value outside of this range, called an outlier, is displayed as an individual point.

Note: Outliers are used in the calculations for the Box plot. Removing outliers changes the entire plot. You
do not have any control over the marker used to represent outliers.

Upper Quartile (UQ)

Median Interquartile Distance (IQD)

Lower Quartile (LQ)

Outlier
Figure D-1 Box plot terms
• Median - The data value located halfway between the smallest and largest values.
• Upper Quartile (UQ) - The data value located halfway between the median and the largest data
value.
• Lower Quartile (LQ) - The data value located halfway between the median and the smallest data
value.
• Interquartile Distance (IQD) - The distance between the Upper and Lower Quartiles (UQ - LQ).
• Outliers - Points whose value is either:
greater than UQ + 1.5 * IQD or less than LQ - 1.5 * IQD

D.1 Box Plot Definition 285

KaleidaGraph

D.2 Statistics Equations

n = number of data points Mean RMS (Root Mean Square)

xi = current data value (from 1 to n) n n 1/2
1
x = mean of the data x = --- ∑ x i 1
--- ∑ x i
2
n n
i=1 i=1

Standard Deviation Standard Error Variance

n
n Standard Deviation
∑ xi – n ( x )2
---------------------------------------------- 2
∑
2
xi – n( x )2 n
i=1
i=1
---------------------------------- ---------------------------------
-
n–1 n–1

Skewness Kurtosis
n n
1 1
--- ∑ ( x i – x ) 3 --- ∑ ( x i – x ) 4
n n
i=1 i=1
---------------------------------------------
- ----------------------------------------- –3
n n
1  3/2 1  2
 --- ∑ ( x i – x )   --- ∑ ( x i – x ) 
2 2
 n
i=1   n
i=1 

D.3 Student t-Test Equations

x = mean of the data N = number of data points xi and yi = current data value (from 1 to N)

t value (single sample)

x – Test Value
t = -------------------------------------------
Standard Error ( x )
t value (paired data)

x A – xB
t = -----------------
sD

Var ( x A ) + Var ( x B ) – 2Cov ( x A, x B )

sD = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
N
N
1
Cov ( x A, x B ) ≡ ------------- ∑ ( x Ai – x A ) ( x Bi – x B )
N–1
i=1

286 D.2 Statistics Equations

 Reference Information

t value (unpaired data with equal variance)

x A – xB
t = -----------------
sD

∑i ∈(Axi – x A ) + ∑ ( xi – xB )
2 2

i∈B
-  ------- + -------
1 1
sD = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
N A + NB – 2  N A N B

t value (unpaired data with unequal variance)

x A – xB
t = ------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Var(x A) ⁄ N A + Var(x B) ⁄ N B
Correlation

∑ ( xi – x ) ( yi – y )
i
---------------------------------------------------------------
∑ ( xi – x ) 2 ∑ ( yi – y ) 2
i i

F value
Larger Variance
-----------------------------------------
Smaller Variance

D.4 Curve Fit References

General Curve Fit
Press, W. H., Flannery, B. P., Teukolsky, S. A., and Vetterling, W. T. Numerical Recipes in C. Cambridge
University Press, New York (1988).

Linear, Polynomial, Exponential, Logarithmic, and Power Curve Fits

Beyer, W. H. Standard Mathematical Tables. CRC Press, Cleveland (1976).

Smooth Curve Fit

Stineman, R. W. A consistently well-behaved method of interpolation. Creative Computing, July (1980).

Weighted Curve Fit

Chambers, J. M., Cleveland, W. S., Kleiner, B., and Tukey, P. A. Graphical Methods for Data Analysis.
Duxbury Press, Boston (1983).

D.4 Curve Fit References 287

KaleidaGraph

Cubic Spline Curve Fit

Press, W. H., Flannery, B. P., Teukolsky, S. A., and Vetterling, W. T. Numerical Recipes in C. Cambridge
University Press, New York (1988).

Interpolate Curve Fit

Stineman, R. W. A consistently well-behaved method of interpolation. Creative Computing, July (1980).

D.5 Pearson’s R and Chi Square Equations

χ2 = Chi Square yi = actual value xi = calculated value
σi = weight y = mean of actual values x = mean of calculated values
Pearson’s R (Least Squares curve fits)

∑ ( xi – x ) ( yi – y )
i
R = ---------------------------------------------------------------
∑ ( xi – x ) 2 ∑ ( yi – y ) 2
i i

Pearson’s R (General curve fit)

χ2
R = 1 – ---------------------------------
∑ σi ( yi – y ) 2
i

Chi Square

yi – f ( xi )
∑  ----------------------
-
2
χ2 =
σi 
i

288 D.5 Pearson’s R and Chi Square Equations

Glossary
active window: The frontmost window on the desktop. The active window’s title bar is highlighted.

Align tool: A tool used to align a group of selected objects in the plot or layout window.

anchor point: An endpoint on a segment of a Bezier curve. Anchor points contain direction points and tangent
lines. The position of the anchor points and their direction points determine the shape of the curve segment.

anchor tick: The anchor tick specifies the value from which all other major tick marks are calculated. When
placing major ticks at a specific interval, the interval is counted from the value of the anchor tick. This tick
does not have to be at the edge of the axis; it can be placed anywhere.

AppleScript: A system-level scripting language available on the Macintosh. It is used to automate processes
within programs that support AppleScript.

Apple Event: A system-level command sent between programs. The command tells the destination program
to perform a specific operation.

Arc tool: A tool used to draw arcs in the plot or layout window.

axis: One of the horizontal or vertical lines in a plot along which values or categories are plotted.

axis labels: Labels that display the values associated with the major tick marks on the plot.

axis titles: Titles that are used to identify which variable is plotted along an axis. The titles are taken from the
column names being plotted. If multiple variables are plotted on the same axis, the title comes from the first
column being plotted.

background color: The color KaleidaGraph uses to represent white pixels in fill and pen patterns.

Bezier curve: A curve made up of one or more segments. Each segment is defined by four points: two anchor
points, which determine the endpoints, and two direction points, which determine its shape.

Boolean: A value that results from evaluating an expression. The value can be either true (non-zero) or false
(zero).

Box tool: A tool used to draw squares and rectangles in the plot or layout window.

cell: The basic unit of a data window where values are entered and stored.

Chooser: This command is located in the Apple menu on Macintosh computers. It is used to select the active
output device.

Clipboard: A window that contains the last selection that was cut or copied. The contents remain until the
next time you cut or copy a selection.

289
KaleidaGraph

column: In the data window, a vertical line of cells. A maximum of 1000 columns are available. In a column
plot, columns are the vertical bars that represent the data values.

column title: The name identifying a column in the data window.

column numbers: The numbers located to the left of the column titles, used to identify each column. The
column numbers are used by Formula Entry and the Macro Calculator during calculations. These numbers
change when a selection is made in the data window.

Command key: This key ( ) enables you to use keyboard shortcuts to choose commands on a Macintosh
computer.

comments: Notes added to a macro or function to make it easier to follow.

Ctrl key: This key enables you to use keyboard shortcuts to choose commands under Windows.

curve fitting: The process of applying one of 10 different types of fits to a variable in the plot window. The
fits can be used to find an equation for the data, to smooth the curve between the points, or to see how closely
the data compares to a specific equation.

Data Selection tool: A tool used to select a portion of the data on a plot for further plotting and analysis.

data window: A window containing a spreadsheet used to enter and store data for plotting and analysis.

default settings: Settings that KaleidaGraph uses unless you specify different settings. You can save the
current settings as default settings by choosing File > Export > Style.

delimiter: A character used to separate data within a text file; for example, tabs, spaces, or commas.

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE): A feature that is used to create a link between data in a source document
and a KaleidaGraph for Windows data window. If the data in the source document changes, the data window
updates to reflect the changes.

edition: The edition is what is sent by the publisher or received by the subscriber whenever an update occurs

edition file: A file created to store a published portion of a document, known as an edition. These files are
linked to the file containing the publisher and to any files which subscribe to it.

Eraser tool: A tool used to delete text and other objects (such as lines, boxes, and pictures) from the plot or
layout window.

error bars: Vertical or horizontal lines on a plot that illustrate the statistical error of the data.

extract: To retrieve the original data from a plot which was saved with data. You can use either the Extract
Data command or the Find Data button ( ) to display the plot’s data.

fill pattern: A pattern chosen from the pattern palette to fill a selected object.

290
 Glossary

Find Data button: This button ( ) is located in the upper-right corner of the plot window. Clicking this
button displays data windows referenced by the plot. If the data is archived in the plot, the data windows are
extracted and displayed.

foreground color: The color KaleidaGraph uses to represent black pixels in fill and pen patterns.

format: How the data in a column is displayed. Each column has its own format, which controls the way its
values are displayed and used in a plot.

formula: A sequence of values, column references, memory references, functions, or operators that generate
data from existing data.

Formula Entry: A window that is used to enter and execute algebraic formulas which operate on the active
data window.

formula script: A program written in the Posted Note of the Formula Entry window. Formula scripts can
automate the process of opening data, creating plots, and exporting plots to disk or to a printer.

frame: The line surrounding a bar, column, pie wedge, legend, or object in the plot or layout window.

Gaussian equation: An equation of the form m1+m2*exp(–(m0–m3)*(m0–m3)/(m4*m4)). A good starting

value for m1 is the value that the tails of the curve approach for large values of |x|. The maximum of the curve
can be used for m2. The mean of the data is a good guess for m3. The bell-width is a good guess for m4.

grid lines: Horizontal or vertical lines that may be displayed at the major and minor tick marks.

group: To combine two or more objects so that they act as a single object.

handles: Points at the corners of an object’s boundary which can be used to modify the size and shape of the
object.

Home button: This button ( ) is located in the upper-left corner of the data window. Click this button to
return the data window to its origin (row 0, column 0).

Identify tool: A tool used to find coordinates of points on a plot.

insertion point: The blinking vertical line that appears whenever you click within a cell or a text dialog.

justification: The method used to align text and labels. You can left, center, or right justify text and labels.

layer: A separate part of the plot window used to organize objects. You can create plots with several layers,
with each layer containing different objects.

Layout window: A window used to place multiple plots on a single page. Text, tables, and other objects may
be placed anywhere in the layout window. The page may be copied to the Clipboard, saved in a variety of
formats, or printed.

legend: The portion of the plot that contains symbols and labels used to identify each variable in a plot.

library: Used to create and store shorthand references for functions, curve fits, constants, and variables.

291
KaleidaGraph

Line/Arrow tool: A tool used to add lines or arrows to the plot or layout window.

macro: An RPN program that performs a series of calculations on the active data window.

Macro Calculator: An RPN calculator which can be used to write and execute macros that operate on the
active data window.

major ticks: Marks that display the major divisions along an axis.

marker: A symbol which represents a single data point in the plot window.

Metafile: A Windows file format used by graphics programs to transfer documents to different programs.

minor ticks: Minor ticks display the divisions between the major tick marks.

object handles: Small squares that appear when an object is selected. The object can be resized by dragging
these handles.

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE): A feature that can be used to embed a KaleidaGraph for Windows
plot in another application. To edit an embedded plot, double-click the plot to start KaleidaGraph and make
changes.

Oval tool: A tool used to draw circles and ovals in the plot or layout window.

overlay: To place multiple plots on top of each other in the layout window to get the appearance of a single
plot.

pen pattern: A pattern given to the line segments of an object.

PICT: A Macintosh file format used by graphics programs to transfer documents to different programs.

plot script: A series of data selections from any number of data windows that are used to create multiple plots
at once. A plot script is created in the Plot Script window.

plot title: The name of the graph. By default, its name is taken from the name of the data window.

plot window: Any window that contains a plot. Plots are created by choosing a plot type from the Gallery
menu. When the plot window is active, certain menus are displayed that only affect the plot window.

Polygon tool: A tool used to draw an object with any number of sides in the plot or layout window.

Posted Note: A text editor available in both the data and Formula Entry windows. In the data window, it is
used to enter information about the current data set. In Formula Entry, it can be used to write a multi-line
formula or a script to automate the plotting process.

publisher: A document or portion of a document which was used to create an edition.

residual: The difference between an actual data value and a mean or other estimated value.

Rounded Rectangle tool: A tool used to draw squares and rectangles which have rounded corners.

292
 Glossary

row: A horizontal line of cells. A maximum of 1 million rows can be displayed in the data window.

row numbers: The column of numbers that appear on the left side of every data window.

Selection Arrow: A tool used to select, move, and resize objects. This tool is also used to select an object’s
properties from pop-up menus.

shift-click: To click the mouse button while pressing Shift. This technique is used to select multiple objects
or deselect individual objects.

sort key: A column that contains the values you want to sort by. You can specify three sort keys at a time for
each sort.

subscriber: A copy of an edition that is placed into a document.

Table tool: A tool used to create tables of data within the plot or layout window.

template: Any plot that is used as a base for creating new plots. The new plot has the same characteristics as
the template.

Text tool: A tool used to create and edit labels in the plot or layout window.

tick marks: The lines which indicate the major or minor increments along an axis.

toolbox The floating window which displays the tools available to create and edit items in the plot or layout
window.

ungroup: To separate a grouped object into its original components.

Update Plot button: This button ( ) is located in the upper-right corner of the data window. Click this
button to force an immediate update of the plot that is currently linked to it.

X axis: The horizontal axis in a plot, which usually represents the independent variable.

Y axis: The vertical axis in a plot, which usually represents the dependent variable.

Zoom Selection tool: A tool that can be used to quickly change the axis limits.

293
KaleidaGraph

294
Index
Symbols ^ 95
! 95 || 96
- 95 π Series macro 268
!= 96
#CLOSE command 102
Numerics
#CLOSE/ALL command 102 0o Rotation command 186
#CLOSE/OPT command 102 180o Rotation command 186
#COPY command 103 270o Rotation command 186
#DATA command 103 90o Rotation command 186
#DATA/NOTITLE command 103
#DATAFILE command 104
A
abs() function 96
#FORMULA command 104
abs(x) macro 268
#MERGEFILE command 105
active window, changing 41, 137
#METAFILE command 105
Add Rows command 44, 265
#METAFILE/OPT command 105
Add Values command 158, 163, 264
#OPEN command 106
Add Windows file extensions check box 17
#PAGE_PRINT command 106
adding
#PASTE command 106
background or border to a layout 252
#PICT command 106
comments to a formula script 102
#PICT/OPT command 107 comments to formulas 87
#PLOT_PRINT command 107 curve fits to Curve Fit menu 207
#SAVE command 107 curve fits to saved plots 208
#SCRIPT command 108 data to saved plot 156
#SELECTION command 109 empty cells to a layout 246
#SET_DIRECTORY command 110 error bars 223–233
lines to Bar/Column plots 159
% 95
plots to a layout 246
&& 96 rows and columns 44
( ) 95 subscripts and superscripts to text 185
* 95 value labels 158, 163
+ 95 Align command 180, 269
/ 95 Align tool
< 95 description 167
<= 95 using 180
= 96 aligning objects 180
== 96 All Windows check box 47
> 95 Allowable Error field 205
>= 95 Alt. Font command
? : 96 Edit Table dialog 172
[ ] 88, 96 alternate font 46

295
KaleidaGraph

Anchor Tick field 142, 146 axis labels

angular axis 160 description 15
annotating markers 225 editing 148–150, 184
Append Columns command 44, 265 formatting 149–150, 278
frequency 149
applying
removing 149
Cubic Spline curve fit 201–203 reversing 143, 276
General curve fit 211–213
axis limits
Polynomial curve fit 199–201
setting 142
Arc tool
Zoom Selection tool 175
description 166
Axis Options command 142–150, 263
using 189
Axis settings
arcs
Plot Size dialog 248
creating 189
Set Plot Size dialog 153
editing 190
error arcs 228 axis titles
Arrange Layout command 249, 271 description 15
editing 184
arranging plots 249
arrowheads, editing 189
B
arrows
background
creating 188
editing 189 adding to a layout 252
color
Ascending Sort command 63, 266
editing plot color 152, 282
ASCII files, importing 53–60 legend 139
aspect ratio 247 objects 194
assigning formulas to function buttons 85 Bar charts 120–122, 157–159
Auto Link command 155, 263 Bezier curve tool
Auto Print check box 135 description 166
Auto Refresh command 256, 263 using 191–193
Auto Save check box 135 Bezier curves
Automatically dispose of old plots check box 136, 138 creating 191
automating 101–113, 130–136 description 191
axes editing 192
editing 142–145 Bin Data command 66, 266
exchanging 143, 276 Binary Mode command 61, 261
linking 144, 277 binning data 66–68
axis Black Column Frame check box 157
angular 160 border 252
hiding 143, 276 Box plot
limits 142, 175 definition 285
linking a second axis 144 description 119
radial 160
Box tool
removing 276
resizing 153–154 description 166
reversing 143, 276 using 189
scaling 276 break 51
thickness 145 Bring To Front command 181, 269
buttons

296
 Index

Find Data button 14, 128, 155–156 Chi Square 218

Home button 12, 42 Chi Square equation 288
Posted Note button 48, 86, 101, 265 circles
Update Plot button 12, 155–156, 263
creating 189
editing 190
C Clear command 61, 179, 261
calculating Edit String dialog 185
curve fit values 90–93 Edit Table dialog 170
statistics 62, 87–88 Clear Data command 61, 261
with date and time data 93
Clear w/Titles command 261
Can't Undo command 260
clearing data 61
canceling
Clipboard 61, 173, 179, 237, 254
DDE link 76
Clipboard command 271
General curve fit 212
publishers 78, 242 Close All Data command 42, 272
subscribers 79, 243 Close All Plots command 138, 272
Cell Background command 171 Close command 42, 138, 257
Cell Horizontal Line command 171 Close/NoSave command 42, 138, 257
Cell Vertical Line command 171 closing
cell() function 84, 96 data windows 42
cells plot windows 138
entering data into 49 cmax() function 98
moving between 42 cmin() function 98
referencing in formulas 84 Coefficient of Determination 218
selecting 43 color
Center Justification command background 152, 194, 281
Edit String dialog 186 curve fit 151
Edit Table dialog 171 customizing 270
Center Text check box 225 error bars 224
changing foreground 194
grid line 152, 282
axis limits 142, 175
interior 152, 281
axis scaling 143, 276
legend text 141
axis thickness 145
plot frame 152, 282
cap length 232
text 186
color of legend text 141
variable 151, 279
column width 47
data format 47 Color icon 139, 194, 252
display of tick marks 145 toolbox 167–168
fill and pen patterns 139, 194 column
foreground and background color 139, 194 numbers 13
grid line thickness 148 titles 13
line styles and widths 140, 195 width 47
magnification 138, 255 Column Format command 46–47, 50, 265
number of tick marks 146
Column Offset field 157
plot color 152, 281
plot lines, markers, and fill patterns 150 Column plot
tick mark interval 146 adding lines 159
tick mark length and thickness 147 adding value labels 158

297
KaleidaGraph

changing column offset 157 layouts 254

customizing 157–159 objects 179
description 121 plots to Clipboard 237
removing column frame 157 residuals to data window 220
Column Width field 47 correlation 72, 287
columns Correlation check box 71
adding 44 correlation coefficients 218
changing width 47 correlation probability 72
deleting 45 cos() function 96
editing titles 46
Create Link command 75, 262
formatting 46–47
inserting 45 Create Publisher command 77, 241, 261
referencing in formulas 84 Create Series command 51, 266
selecting 43 creating
transposing data 64 arcs 189
combining data files 257 arrows 188
commands Bezier curves 191
Edit String dialog 185–186 circles 189
Edit Table dialog 170–172 custom library 94
Formula Entry 95–100 data link 75
formula scripting 102–110 data series 51–52
KaleidaGraph 257–272 formula scripts 101
formulas 84
comments
library definitions 94
adding to a formula script 102 lines 188
adding to formulas 87 new data window 41
Compress Rows command 265 new layout 245
conditional testing 96 ovals 189
constants 94 plot script 130–132
constraining plots 124
polygons 190
parameters 214
publishers 77–78, 241–242
shape of objects 178
rectangles 189
coordinates 173 rounded rectangles 189
Copy command 61, 260 rounded squares 189
Edit String dialog 185 shapes 188–193
Edit Table dialog 170 similar plots 128–136
Copy Graph command 237, 240, 260 squares 189
Copy Layout command 254, 260 tables 169
Copy Selection command 179, 260 text labels 183
Copy Style command 171 csum() function 98
Copy Table command 171 Cubic Spline curve fit
Copy to Clipboard button 62, 67 applying 202–203
data restrictions 199
Copy w/Titles command 260
description 199
copying reference 288
coordinates 173 Curve Fit button 152
curve fit coefficients 218, 219
curve fit coefficients 217, 219
curve fit values to data window 219
data 61 curve fit definition

298
 Index

constructing 203 extrapolating 221

defining in the library 214 forcing fit through the origin 222
entering 209 getting values from 90–93
initial conditions 204 increasing curve fit points 222
multiple independent variables 213 limiting parameters 214
Curve Fit Definition dialog 204 line style 151
curve fit equations line width 151
multiple independent variables 213
changing format 269
removing 220
correlation coefficient display 218
viewing coefficients 217
displaying 217
weighting data 213
editing 217
hiding 263 customizing plots
Curve Fit menu 270 Bar plots 157–159
Pie charts 162–163
adding a new fit 207
Polar plots 159–161
rearranging curve fits 207
removing curve fit definitions 208 Cut command 61, 179, 260
saving changes 208 Edit String dialog 185
Curve Fit Options command 221–222, 269 Edit Table dialog 170
Curve Fit Points field 222 Cut w/Titles command 260
curve fit results cutting data 61
Chi Square 218
copying fit values to data window 219 D
copying residuals to data window 220 data
copying to Calculator 219 adding to saved plot 156
copying to Clipboard 219 binning 66–68
correlation coefficients 218 clearing 61
displaying the equation 217 copying 61
editing the equation 217 creating a series 51
parameter errors 218 cutting 61
viewing coefficients 217 entering 49–51
curve fit types executing macros 72
Cubic Spline 199 extracting from plot 154–155
Exponential 198 format 47
General 197 importing 53
Interpolate 199 interpolating 89
Linear 198 linking 75
Logarithmic 198 masking 65, 89, 174
Polynomial 198 missing values 51
Power 198 opening 16
Smooth 198 pasting 61
Weighted 199 printing 74
curve fits saving 74
sorting 63
applying 199–203, 211–213
statistics 62
color 151
transposing 64
defining in the library 214
unmasking 65, 89
displaying equation 217
updating in a plot 155
displaying only the curve fit 222
editing resulting equation 217 data files, merging 257
exporting results 219–220 Data Format field 57

299
KaleidaGraph

data link Text tool 283

canceling 76 Default Date Format setting 50
creating 75 Define Layout command 128, 141, 264
updating 76 defining
Data menu 264–265 curve fits in library 214
Data Selection tool General curve fit equation 209–210
description 167 plot layouts 128
using 173–175 degrees of freedom 72
data windows Delete Column command 45, 265
adding rows and columns 44 Delete Columns command 171
changing column widths 47 Delete Row command 45, 265
changing data format 47
Delete Rows command 171
closing 42
copying curve fit values into 219 deleting
copying residuals into 220 items in layout window 256
creating a publisher 77–78 objects 179
creating new 41 rows and columns 45
cutting, copying, pasting, and clearing data 61 Delimiter setting 53
deleting rows and columns 45 Derivative macro 267
displaying 41 Descending Sort command 63, 266
editing column titles 46 deselecting objects 177
elements 12–13
diff() function 96
entering data 49–51
extracting 154 Display Equation command 217, 263
going to a cell 43 Display Legend command 263
hiding 41 Display R^2 instead of R check box 218
importing text files 53 Display Title command 263
inserting rows and columns 45 displaying
linking data 75
curve fit coefficients 217
merging 257
curve fit equations 217
moving around 42
data used to create a plot 154
opening 16
data windows 41
printing 74
equations 263
renaming 272
error arcs 228
saving 74
error bar cap 231
selecting cells 43–44
grid lines 147–148
subscribing 78–79
in layout window 255
switching between Overwrite and Insert Mode 43
in plot window 138
toolbar 16
layout window 245
dates legend 263
entering 50 plot title 263
performing calculations 93 plot windows 138
DDE 75 point coordinates 173
default attributes ruler 138, 255
legend 128, 141, 264 tick marks 145, 277
objects 193 Double X plot 116
setting 20 Double XY plot 116
tables 173 Double Y plot 116
text labels 186 Down command 181, 270

300
 Index

Draw Cap Only check box 231 plot labels 184

Draw Column Frame check box 157 plot symbol 150–152, 280
Draw Error Arc check box 228 plot titles 184
polygons 190
drawing shapes 188–193
rectangles 190
Duplicate command 178, 261 rounded rectangles 190
duplicating objects 178 rounded squares 190
Dynamic Data Exchange 75 shapes 188–193
squares 190
E tables 170
Edit Arrow Heads command 189, 270 text labels 183–187, 283
tick marks 145–147
Edit Colors command 194, 270
value labels 184
Edit General command 207–208, 270 variable color 151, 279
Edit Macros command 267 variable line style 151, 281
Edit menu 260–262 variable line width 151, 281
Edit Object command 189, 190, 192, 270 embedding an OLE object 239
Edit Text command 262 entering
editing curve fit definition 209
arcs 190 data 49–51
arrowheads 189 date and time data 50
arrows 189 formulas 85
axes 142–145 numeric data 49
axis labels 148–150, 184 text data 51
axis titles 184 EPSF files
background plot color 152, 282 exporting 238
Bezier curves 192 importing 235
circles 190 Equation Label Format command 217, 269
column titles 46
equations
curve fit color 151
curve fit equations 217 Chi Square 288
curve fit line style 151 General curve fit 288
curve fit line width 151 kurtosis 286
data format 47 mean 286
grid color 152, 282 R 288
grid lines 147–148, 278 RMS 286
interior plot color 152, 282 skewness 286
keyboard shortcuts 272 standard deviation 286
legend frame 139 standard error 286
legend text 141, 184 statistics 286
lines 189 t-test 286
marker size 151, 280 variance 286
marker type 151, 280 See also curve fit equations
master curve fit list 207 Erase Background command 186, 252
number of markers displayed 151, 280 Eraser tool 167, 179, 256
object attributes 194–195 erf() function 97
OLE objects 241 erfc() function 97
ovals 190
error arcs 228
plot color 152, 281, 282
plot frame color 152, 282 Error Bar Length field 232
error bars

301
KaleidaGraph

adding 223–233 extrapolating curve fits 221

cap length 232
color 224 F
displaying arcs 228–230 F probability 72
only displaying error cap 231
F Test check box 71
plotting values from a column 225
removing 232 F value 72, 287
single-sided 228 factorial 95
text 225–227 File menu 257–259
thickness 224 files
Error Bars command 223–233, 264 exchanging 17
errors opening 16
General curve fit results 218 sharing 17
Exchange X and Y check box 143 fill pattern
exchanging legend 139
axes 143, 276 objects 194
files 17 variable 151, 280
execute() function 100, 101 Filter macro 267
executing filter() function 89
formulas 85 Find Data button 14, 128, 155–156, 264
macros 72 Fix Size setting 248
Exit command 22, 259 Fixed Column Width check box 172
Edit Table dialog 170 Fixed Row Height check box 172
exp() function 97 Force Line fit through zero check box 222
exploded Pie chart 162 foreground color
Exponential curve fit legend 139
data restrictions 198 objects 194
description 198 Format menu 268–269
function 198 formatting
reference 287 axis labels 149–150, 278
Export command 74, 136, 236, 238, 259 columns 46–47
Export OLE Data check box 240 Formula Entry
exporting adding comments 87
data 74 assigning formulas to function buttons 85
EPS files 238 calculating statistics 87–88
graphics files 238 calculating values from a curve fit 90–93
layout files 255 commands 95–100
layouts 254 creating a formula 84
plot script files 136 creating a formula script 101
plots curve fit functions 99–100
to Clipboard 237 date and time calculations 93
via a plot script 135 entering a formula 85
with data 236 executing a formula 85
without data 236 formula scripts 101–113
text files 74 formula structure 84
expr() function 99 guided tour 35–36
interpolating data 89
Extract Data command 124, 128, 154–156, 264
masking data 89
Extrapolate Fit to Axis Limits check box 221

302
 Index

math functions 96–98 Curve Fit Definition dialog 204

multi-line formulas 86–87 curve fit equation 203
operators 95–96 defining equations in library 210, 214–216
referencing cells 84 description 197
referencing columns 84 entering curve fit definition 209
referencing memory registers 84 equations 288
special functions 100 guided tour 36–38
statistics functions 98–99 initial conditions 204
unmasking data 89 limiting parameters 214
Formula Entry command 82, 272 master curve fit list 207
formula scripts 101–113, 136 math functions 96
multivariate fits 213
commands 102–110
operators 95
creating 101
parameter errors 218
examples 111–113
rearranging a curve fit 207
saving 101
reference 287
formulas removing a curve fit definition 208
assigning to function buttons 85 saving changes 208
creating 84 specifying partial derivatives 205
entering 85 statistics functions 98
executing 85 using text files 209
multi-line 86–87 weighting data 213
structure of 84 General submenu 207–208
using 85
getting Help 18
fract() function 97
GIF files
Frame Color command 171
exporting 238
Frame settings importing 235
Plot Size dialog 248 Go To Cell command 43, 265
Set Plot Size dialog 153
graphic files
Frame Style command 171
exporting 238
frame thickness 145 importing 235–236
Frame Thickness field 145 grid lines
frequency of axis labels 149 description 15
function buttons 85 displaying 147–148
Function plot 123, 127 in layout window 255
Functions menu 266 in plot window 138
editing 147–148, 278
G editing color 152, 282
thickness 148
Gallery menu 263
Grid Thickness field 148
Gaussian equation 291
Group command 179, 270
gen() function 99
grouping objects 179
General curve fit 203–216
guided tour
adding a new fit 207
adding fits to saved plots 208 applying a General curve fit 36–38
affect on Macro Calculator 216 creating and editing a Column plot 30–33
applying 211–213 creating and editing a Scatter plot 25–29
Chi Square 218 editing the legend 34
constructing equation 203 generating data set 23–25
modifying data in a saved plot 39

303
KaleidaGraph

using Formula Entry 35–36 Import command 16, 136, 235, 258
using the layout window 33 importing
data files 16
H graphic files 235–236
Help 18 layout files 255
Help files missing data 54
location 18 plot script files 136
plots 16
Hide All Plots command 137, 272
plots into layout window 246
Hide Borders command ??–76, 77–??, 242–243, 262 text files 53–60
Hide Window command 41, 137, 271 text files using Special format 56–60
hiding increasing number of curve fit points 222
axis 143, 276 independent t-test 71
data windows 41 index() function 97
equations 263
initial conditions 204
grids 138, 255
legend 263 inorm() function 97
plot title 263 Insert Column command 45, 265
plot windows 137 Insert Columns command 171
ruler 138, 255 Insert Mode command 43, 264
High/Low plot 117 Insert Row command 45, 265
Histogram Options command 119, 269 Insert Rows command 171
Histogram plot 119 inserting
Home button 12, 42 OLE objects 239
Horizontal Bar plot rows and columns 45
adding lines 159 installing KaleidaGraph 8
adding value labels 158 int() function 97
changing column offset 157 Integral - Curve macro 267
customizing 157–159 Integrate - Area macro 267
description 120
interior color, editing 152, 282
removing column frame 157
interp() function 99
I Interpolate curve fit
icons data restrictions 199
description 199
Color 139, 194, 252
reference 288
Pattern 139, 194, 252
Style 140, 195, 252 interpolating data 89
toolbox 167 interval 146
Axis Options 168 invcos() function 97
Color 167–168 Invert Mask macro 267
Fill Pattern 168 invsin() function 97
Marker 168 invtan() function 97
Pattern 167
Style 167
Variable Color 168
J
Identify tool JPEG files
description 167 exporting 238
using 173 importing 235
if-else function 96 justification

304
 Index

Edit String dialog 186 grids 255

Edit Table dialog 171 opening saved layout files 255
overlaying plots 250
K placing plots in the layout 246
KaleidaGraph printing 254
refreshing 256
command reference 257–272
renaming 272
guided tour 23–39
ruler 255
installing 8
setting plot size and position 247–248
quitting 22
switching between layouts 256
settings files 273–274
toolbar 16
starting 11
toolbar 16 layout, defining 128
toolbox 165 Least Squares curve fitting 199
uninstalling 10 Left Justification command
keyboard shortcuts Edit String dialog 186
editing 272 Edit Table dialog 171
moving in data window 42 legend
moving objects 178 background color 139, 194
plot window 275 description 15
toolbox 275 displaying 263
KG Layout file 274 editing text 141, 184
KG Macros file 273 fill pattern 139
KG Script file 274 foreground color 139, 194
hiding 263
KG Style file 273
line style 140
kurtosis equation 286 line width 140
kurtosis() function 98 moving 177
moving text labels 141, 184
L order of variables 15, 139
labels pen pattern 139
See axis labels or text labels removing frame 140
resizing 178
layering objects 181
saving default style 128, 264
layout files 274 text color 141
exporting 255 length of tick marks 147
importing 255
Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm 197, 203
Layout menu 271
library
layout window
adding a definition 214
adding basics 94
background 252 creating
border 252 basic curve fit definition 214
empty cells 246 complex curve fit definition 215
plots 246 custom library 94
arranging plots 249 definitions 94
changing magnification 255 using 94
copying 254
Library command 94, 214, 267, 270
creating new layout 245
deleting items 256 limit() function 214
displaying 245 limits
exporting 254 axis limits 142

305
KaleidaGraph

parameters 214 M
lin() function 99 Macro Calculator 216
Line plot 115 Macro Calculator command 272
line style macro files 208, 273
curve fit 151 macro() function 100
legend 140
macros
objects 195
variable 151, 281 using 72–74
Line tool Macros menu 267–268
description 166 magnification level 138, 255
using 188–189 major
line width grids 147
curve fit 151 tick marks
legend 140 changing display 145, 277
objects 195 changing intervals 146
variable 151, 281 description 15
number of 146
linear
making
interpolation 89, 98
scaling 143, 276 notes about the data 48
selections 43
Linear Correlation Coefficient 218
Marker Size field 151
Linear curve fit
markers
description 198
forcing through origin 222 number displayed 151, 280
function 198 opaque 151
reference 287 size 151, 280
transparent 151
lines
type 151, 280
adding to Bar/Column plots 159
Mask command 65, 266
creating 188
editing 189 mask() function 89, 100
Lines Skipped field 54 masking data 65, 89, 174
Link Error Bars check box 228 master curve fit list 207–208
Link Options command 76, 262 matrix operator 88, 96
Link Text To Variable Color check box 141, 151 Max field 142
Link To pop-up menu 144 mean difference 72
linking mean equation 286
axes 144, 277 mean() function 98
data 75 median() function 99
ln() function 97 memory registers 84, 216
log() function 97 Menu Shortcuts command 272
Logarithmic curve fit Merge command 257
data restrictions 198 Metafile images
description 198 exporting 238
function 198 importing 235
reference 287 Min field 142
logarithmic scaling 143, 276 Minimum Column Size field 172
logr() function 99 Minimum Row Size field 172

306
 Index

minor foreground color 194

grids 147 line style 195
tick marks line width 195
changing display 145, 277 pen pattern 194
description 15 setting defaults 193
number of 146 Object Linking and Embedding 239–241
Missing Data Breaks check box 51 Object menu 269–270
missing data values objects
entering 51 aligning 180
importing 54 constraining shape of 178
mod function 95 copying 179
moving creating 188–193
deleting 179
in the data window 42–43
deselecting 177
legend 177
duplicating 178
legend text 141, 184
editing 188–193
objects 177
grouping 179
pie slices 162
layering 181
plot 177
moving 177
text labels 177
pasting 179
toolbox 165
resizing 178
multi-line formulas 86 selecting 177
multiple sending up or down 181
data sets 125 ungrouping 180
independent variables 213 obtaining values from a curve fit 90
X-Y pairs on a plot 126 offset 154, 247
multivariate fits 213 OLE 239–241
OLE Options command 241, 262
N one sample t-test 70
name() function 100
Only use built-in sizes check box 185
New command 41, 257
Open command 16, 257
Edit Table dialog 170
Edit Table dialog 170
New Layout command 245, 259
opening
New Position command 246, 271
data files 16
No Axis check box 143, 160 KaleidaGraph files 16
nonlinear curve fit 203 layout files 255
norm() function 97 plot script files 136
Normal command plots 16
Edit Table dialog 172 text files 53
See also importing
notes 48
operators 95
npts() function 99
Options command 172
Number setting 54
origin 222
O Origin settings
object attributes Plot Size dialog 248
Set Plot Size dialog 153
background color 194
fill pattern 194 outliers
Box plot 285

307
KaleidaGraph

removing 173 plotting negative values 123

Oval tool removing plot frame 162
description 166 Plot Color command 152, 268
using 189 Plot Extras command 145, 147, 148, 157, 232, 268
ovals plot frame
creating 189 editing color 152, 282
editing 190 resizing 153–154
overlaying plots Plot menu 263–264
from multiple data windows 125 plot script
from one data window 126 creating 130–132
in the Layout window 250–251 exporting plots 135
Overwrite Mode command 43, 264 memory considerations 136
pattern recognition 134
P selecting different data windows 134
Pack Columns check box 172 setting legends 132–134
setting titles 132–134
Pack Rows check box 172
when to use 130
Page Setup command 236, 254, 259
Plot Script command 130–136, 272
paired data t-test 71
plot script files 274
parameter
exporting 136
errors 218 importing 136
limits 214
Plot Style command 150–152, 263
Paste command 61, 179, 236, 260
plot symbol
Edit String dialog 185
editing 150–152, 280
Edit Table dialog 170
plot title
Paste Covariances macro 268
adding subscripts and superscripts 185
Paste Link command 75, 262
defining in a plot script 132
Paste w/Titles command 260 description 15
pasting displaying 263
data 61 editing 184
objects 179 hiding 263
Pattern icon 139, 194, 252 setting defaults 186
toolbox 167 plot tools 165–167
pen pattern plot windows
legend 139 changing magnification 138
objects 194 closing 138
Percentile plot 120 creating a publisher 241–242
displaying 138
pi function 98
elements 14–15
π Series macro 268 grids 138
PICT files hiding 137
exporting 238 importing images into 235–236
importing 235 renaming 272
Pie chart ruler 138
adding value labels 163 subscribing 243
customizing 162–163 toolbar 16
description 122 plots
exploding 162 adding data 156

308
 Index

adding error bars 223–233 using 190

adding to layout window 246 polygons
changing plot color 152 creating 190
copying to Clipboard 237 editing 190
creating 124
Polynomial curve fit
creating and editing text 183–187
curve fitting 199–222 applying 200–201
defining layout 128 description 198
exporting function 198
with data 236 reference 287
without data 236 Posted Note
extracting data 154 data window 12
finding coordinates 173 Formula Entry window 82, 86–87, 101
modifying Posted Note button 48, 86, 101, 265
axes 142–145 Posted Note command 48, 265
axis labels 148–150, 278 pow() function 100
grid lines 147–148, 278
Power curve fit
legend 139–141
lines, markers, and fill patterns 150–152, 279 data restrictions 198
tick marks 145–147 description 198
moving 177 function 198
opening 16 reference 287
overlaying 250 preferences
plotting from multiple data sets 125 setting 20, 186, 193
plotting multiple X-Y pairs 126 Preferences command 20, 208, 259
printing 236 Print Bitmap command 259
removing outliers 173
Print command 259
resizing 153–154
saving Print Data command 74, 259
with data 236 Print Graphics command 236, 259
without data 236 Print Layout command 254, 259
similar 128–136 Print Program command 259
updating 155–156 Print Setup command 236, 254, 259
plotting printing
additional data 156 bitmaps 259
error values from a data column 225 data 74
function 127 layouts 254
multiple data sets 125 plots 236
multiple X variables 126 plots via a plot script 135
PNG files program text files 259
exporting 238 Probability Options command 118, 269
importing 235 Probability plot 118
Polar Options command 122, 160, 269 program text files, printing 259
Polar plot Promote 2 digit dates less than 40 check box 50
customizing 159–161 Publisher Options command 77, 242, 262
description 122 publishers
poly() function 100 canceling 78, 242
Polygon tool creating 77–78, 241–242
description 166 updating 77, 242

309
KaleidaGraph

Q description 166
using 189
Quit command 22, 259
rounded rectangles
quitting KaleidaGraph 22
creating 189
editing 190
R
rounded squares
R 218
creating 189
R equation 288
editing 190
R2 218
row numbers 13
radial axis 160
rows
ran() function 98
adding 44
Random# macro 268 compressing 265
Read Titles check box 54 deleting 45
rearranging the master curve fit list 207 inserting 45
Recent Files command 16, 259 selecting 43
rectangles transposing data 64
creating 189 rsum() function 98
editing 190 ruler 138, 255
Redo command 260 Ruler & Grids command 138, 255, 264
refreshing the layout 256 running sum 98
removing
axis 143, 276 S
axis labels 149 Same as Plot Window setting 248
curve fit 220 Save As command 258
curve fit from master list 208 Save command 258
error bars 232 Save Data As command 74, 258
frame in Pie chart 162
Save Data command 74, 258
outliers 173
Save Graph As command 236, 258
Rename command 272
Save Graph command 236, 258
renaming
Save Layout As command 255, 258
data windows 272
layout window 272 Save Layout command 255, 258
plot windows 272 Save Script As command 258
residuals 220 Save Script command 136, 258
resizing saving
axis 153–154 changes to Curve Fit menu 208
legend 178 data 74
objects 178 formula scripts 101
plot 153–154 layout files 255
plot frame 153–154 multi-line formulas 87
Reverse check box 143 plot script files 136
plots
Right Justification command
with data 236
Edit String dialog 186 without data 236
Edit Table dialog 171 plots via a plot script 135
RMS equation 286 text files 74
rms() function 99 See also exporting
Rounded Rectangle tool scaling 143, 276

310
 Index

Scatter plot 116 editing 188–193

scientific notation 50 fill pattern 194
script() function 100 foreground color 194
line style 195
scripting
line width 195
formula scripts 101–113 pen pattern 194
plot scripts 130–136
sharing files 17
scripts. See formula scripts or plot scripts
shortcuts
Select All command 44, 261
plot window 275
Edit String dialog 185 shortcut menu 16
Edit Table dialog 171 toolbox 275
Select Plot command 246, 271 Show All Plots command 138, 272
selecting Show Borders command 262
all cells 44 Show Data command 41, 271
columns 43
Show Layout command 245, 256, 271
fill patterns for variables 151, 280
Help topics 19 Show Macros command 267
objects 177 Show Markers pop-up menu 151
range of cells 43 Show Page command 245
rows 43 Show Plot command 137–138, 271
variables in the Plot Style dialog 150 Show the plot paper boundary check box 153
Selection Arrow Simplify macro 267
description 165 sin() function 98
Send To Back command 181, 270 Sinc (5x) macro 268
sending objects up or down 181 single sample t-test 70
series 51 single-sided error bars 228
Series macro 268 size
Set Background command 252, 271 markers 151, 280
Set Defaults command of plots in layout window 247
Edit Table dialog 170, 173 plot size 153
Set Legends button 132 skew() function 99
Set Plot Size command 153, 264 skewness equation 286
Set Titles button 132 Smooth curve fit
setting data restrictions 198
axis limits 142 description 198
default attributes for shapes 193 reference 287
defaults 20 Smooth macro 267
legends in a plot script 132–134 smooth() function 100
limits on parameters 214 sorting data 63
plot size and position in layout window 247
Special format 56–60
preferences 20
text defaults 186 Specify Partials check box 205
titles in a plot script 132–134 spline() function 100
settings files 273–274 sqrt() function 98
shapes squares
background color 194 creating 189
creating 188–193 editing 190
default attributes 193 Stack Bar plot

311
KaleidaGraph

adding value labels 158 switching between

changing column offset 157 layouts 256
customizing 157–158 Overwrite and Insert Mode 43
description 121 symbols 151
removing column frame 157
system requirements 7
Stack Column plot
adding value labels 158 T
changing column offset 157
t probability 72
customizing 157–158
description 122 t value 72, 286
removing column frame 157 Table tool
standard deviation equation 286 commands 170–172
standard error equation 286 description 166
using 169–173
starting KaleidaGraph 11
table() function 89, 98, 213
statistics
tables
calculating with Formula Entry 87–88
equations 286 creating 169
transposing 62 editing 170
viewing column statistics 62 setting defaults 173
Statistics command 62, 266 tan() function 98
std() function 99 Template plot
stderr() function 99 description 123
using 129
Step Options command 269
Test Value field 71
Step plot 118
text data, entering 51
Student t command 70–72, 266
text error bars 225–227
style files 128, 273
Text File Input Format dialog 53–57
Style icon 140, 195, 252
text files
Sub/Super Size field 185
importing 53–60
Subscribe To command 78, 243, 262
loading curve fit definition 209
Subscriber Options command 79, 243, 262 saving 74
subscribers text labels
canceling 79, 243 adding subscripts and superscripts 185
updating 79, 243 creating 183
subscribing editing 183–187, 283
to PICT editions 243 moving 177
to text editions 78–79 setting defaults 186
Subscript command Text Mode command 61, 261
Edit String dialog 185 Text Options command 185, 186, 269
Edit Table dialog 172 Text plot 123
Subscript Offset field 185 Text tool
subscripts 46, 185 commands 185–186
Superscript command description 166
Edit String dialog 185 editing legend 141
Edit Table dialog 172 using 183–187
Superscript Offset field 185 thickness
superscripts 46, 185 axis 145

312
 Index

error bars 224 Units setting

grid line 148 Plot Size dialog 248
plot frame 145 Unmask command 65, 266
tick marks 147
unmask() function 89, 100
tick marks
unmasking data 65
changing display 145
unpaired data t-test 71
description 15
editing 145–147 Up command 181, 269
intervals 146 Update & Return command 240, 257
length 147 Update command 240, 258
specifying number of 146 Update Plot button 12, 155–156, 263
thickness 147 Update Plot command 155–156, 263
Tick Thickness field 147 updating
TIFF files linked data 76
exporting 238 plots 155–156
importing 235 publishers 77, 242
time data subscribers 79, 243
entering 50 using
performing calculations 93 Align tool 180
Title Format field 57 Arc tool 189
titles Bezier curve tool 191–193
adding subscripts and superscripts 185 Box tool 189
defining in a plot script 132 Data Selection tool 173–175
editing 184 formula scripts 101–113
setting defaults 186 Identify tool 173
library 94
toolbar 16
Line tool 188
toolbox 165–168 macros 72
transferring files 17 Oval tool 189
Transpose command 64, 266 plot scripts 130–136
Transposed check box 62 Polygon tool 190
transposing Rounded Rectangle tool 189
shortcut menu 16
data 64
Special format 56
statistics 62
Table tool 169–173
t-test Template plots 129
equations 286 Text tool 183–187
interpreting results 72 toolbar 16
paired data 71 Zoom Selection tool 175–176
single sample 70
unpaired data 71 V
tutorial 23–39
Value Label Format command 158, 163, 269
value labels
U
adding 158, 163
Undo command 260 editing 184
UnGroup command 180, 270 var() function 99
ungrouping objects 180 variable
uninstalling KaleidaGraph 10 color 151, 279
Unit Series macro 268 fill pattern 151, 280

313
KaleidaGraph

line style 151, 281

line width 151, 281
selecting in the Plot Style dialog 150
variance equation 286
View Covariances macro 268
View General macro 268
viewing coefficients 217

W
Weight Data check box 205, 213
Weighted curve fit
data restrictions 199
description 199
reference 287
weights 205
wgt() function 100
width 47
Windows BMP files
exporting 238
importing 235
Windows menu 271–272
windows, renaming 272

X
X Label Format command 149, 268
X2 Label Format command 149, 268
X-Y Probability plot 118

Y
Y Label Format command 149, 268
Y2 Label Format command 149, 268

Z
Zoom Selection tool
description 167
panning 176
using 175–176
zoom setting 14, 138, 255

314